Sie sind auf Seite 1von 366

Business and Commuter Aviation Systems Honeywell Inc.

Box 29000 Phoenix, Arizona 85038

PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System

Embraer EMB-145

System Maintenance Manual


Volume II System Interconnects, Maintenance Practices, Shipping, Handling and Storage, and Honeywell Support

22-05-14
TITLE PAGE T-1
PRINTED IN U.S.A. PUB. NO. A15-1146-065 1 NOVEMBER 1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

PROPRIETARY NOTICE This document and the information disclosed herein are proprietary data of Honeywell Inc. Neither this document nor the information contained herein shall be used, reproduced, or disclosed to others without the written authorization of Honeywell Inc., except to the extent required for installation or maintenance of recipients equipment. NOTICE - FREEDOM OF INFORMATION ACT (5 USC 552) AND DISCLOSURE OF CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION GENERALLY (18 USC 1905) This document is being furnished in confidence by Honeywell Inc. The information disclosed herein falls within exemption (b) (4) of 5 USC 552 and the prohibitions of 18 USC 1905.

S96

22-05-14
TITLE PAGE T-2
Copyright 1996 Honeywell Inc. All Rights Reserved 1 NOVEMBER 1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

RECORD OF REVISIONS - VOLUME II


Upon receipt of a revision, insert the latest revised pages and dispose of superseded pages. Enter revision number and date, insertion date, and the incorporators initials on the Record of Revisions. The typed initials HI are used when Honeywell Inc. is the incorporator. Revision Number Revision Date Insertion Date Revision Number Revision Date Insertion Date

By

By

22-05-14

Page RR-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page RR-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES - VOLUME II


Original . . SUBHEADING AND PAGE Title T-1 T-2 Record of Revisions RR-1 RR-2 List of Effective Pages LEP-1 LEP-2 LEP-3 LEP-4 LEP-5 LEP-6 Section 3 System Interconnects 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 0 0 REVISION 0 . . Nov 1/1996 SUBHEADING AND PAGE 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-46 3-47 3-48 3-49 3-50 3-51 3-52 3-53 3-54 3-55 3-56 3-57 3-58 3-59 3-60 3-61 3-62 3-63 3-64 REVISION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

F indicates right foldout page with blank back.

22-05-14

Page LEP-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Section 3 (cont) System Interconnects 3-65 3-66 3-67 3-68 3-69 3-70 3-71 3-72 3-73 3-74 3-75 3-76 3-77 3-78 3-79 3-80 3-81 3-82 3-83 3-84 3-85 3-86 3-87 3-88 3-89 3-90 3-91 3-92 3-93 3-94 3-95 3-96 3-97 3-98 3-99 3-100 3-101 3-102 3-103 3-104 3-105 3-106 3-107 3-108 3-109 3-110 3-111 3-112

REVISION

SUBHEADING AND PAGE 3-113 3-114 3-115 3-116 3-117 3-118 3-119 3-120 3-121 3-122 3-123 3-124 3-125 3-126 3-127 3-128 3-129 3-130 3-131 3-132 3-133 3-134 3-135 3-136 3-137 3-138 3-139 3-140 3-141 3-142 3-143 3-144 3-145 3-146 3-147 3-148 3-149 3-150 3-151 3-152 3-153 3-154 3-155 3-156 3-157 3-158 3-159 3-160 3-161 3-162

REVISION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Page LEP-2 Nov 1/1996

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

22-05-14

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Section 3 (cont) System Interconnects 3-163 3-164 3-165 3-166 3-167 3-168 3-169 3-170 3-171 3-172 3-173 3-174 3-175 3-176 3-177 3-178 3-179 3-180 3-181 3-182 3-183 3-184 3-185 3-186 3-187 3-188 3-189 3-190 3-191 3-192 3-193 3-194 3-195 3-196 3-197 3-198 3-199 3-200 3-201 3-202 F 3-203/204 F 3-205/206 3-207 3-208 3-209 3-210 3-211 3-212

REVISION

SUBHEADING AND PAGE 3-213 3-214 3-215/216 3-217 3-218 3-219/220 3-221 3-222 3-223 3-224 3-225 3-226 3-227 3-228 3-229 3-230 3-231 3-232 3-233 3-234 3-235 3-236 3-237 3-238 3-239 3-240 3-241 3-242 3-243 3-244 3-245 3-246 3-247 3-248 3-249 3-250 3-251 3-252 3-253 3-254 3-255 3-256 3-257 3-258 3-259 3-260 3-261 3-262 3-263 3-264

REVISION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Page LEP-3 Nov 1/1996

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

22-05-14

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Section 3 (cont) System Interconnects 3-265 3-266 3-267 3-268 3-269 3-270 3-271 3-272 3-273 3-274 Table of Contents - Section 4 TC4-1 TC4-2 Section 4 Maintenance Practices 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-30

REVISION

SUBHEADING AND PAGE 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-38 4-39 4-40 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-44 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-48 4-49 4-50 4-51 4-52 4-53 4-54 4-55 4-56 4-57 4-58 4-59 4-60 4-61 4-62 4-63 4-64 4-65 4-66 4-67 4-68 4-69 4-70 4-71 4-72 4-73 4-74 Section 5 Shipping, Handling and Storage 5-1 5-2

REVISION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

22-05-14

Page LEP-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SUBHEADING AND PAGE Table of Contents - Section 6 TC6-1 TC6-2 Section 6 Honeywell Support 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6

REVISION

SUBHEADING AND PAGE

REVISION

0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

22-05-14

Page LEP-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page LEP-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 3

SYSTEM INTERCONNECTS
This section provides interconnect information as an aid in troubleshooting the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System. The interconnect information in Table 3-1 is based on Honeywell Engineering Bulletin EB7021523, Revision A. For specific avionics wiring information, refer to the wiring diagrams in the Embraer 145 aircraft maintenance manual.

22-05-14

Page 3-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page 3-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Para 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 (Deleted) (Deleted) (Deleted)

Title

Page 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-7 3-38 3-202

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION DESIGN ELECTRICAL INTERCONNECT DEFINITION SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING INFORMATION (FIGURES)

APPENDIX A APPENDIX B APPENDIX C APPENDIX D APPENDIX E

ARINC 429 INTERFACES OPTIONAL FMS PRIMUS 870/660/880 OPTIONS DUAL RAD ALT OPTION GPS OPTION

3-244 3-248 3-261 3-269 3-272

22-05-14

Page 3-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

LIST OF FIGURES Figure 4-1 4-2A 4-2B 4-2C 4-2D 4-2E 4-2F 4-2G 4-2H 4-2I 4-2J 4-2K 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 6-1A 6-1B 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 Title Voltage Drop as a Function of Cable Length Single Point Shield Grounding W/O Bulkhead Conn Single Point Shield Grounding W/O Bulkhead Conn Multi Point Shield Grounding W/O Bulkhead Conn Multi Point Shield Grounding W/O Bulkhead Conn Single Point Shield Grounding with Bulkhead Conn Single Point Shield Grounding with Bulkhead Conn Multi Point Shield Grounding with Bulkhead Conn Multi Point Shield Grounding with Bulkhead Conn Shield Grounding Example for Rack Mount Connectors Shield Grounding Example for Panel/Pedestal Mounted Units Shield Grounding Example for Bulkhead Connectors and for Non-Panel Mounted/Non-Rack Mounted Units Aircraft Grounding Installation Diagram of an ICB Bus Configuration High Speed Differential Input Termination DU/IC Bus Interface (Terminated DU) DU/IC Bus Interface (Unterminated DU) High Speed Differential Input Termination DU/WX Bus Interface (Terminated DU) DU/WX Bus Interface (Unterminated DU) RSB Bus Construction Digital Audio Bus Construction Lamp Driver Current Draw Requirements 28 V dc Power 28 V dc Power Weight On Wheels Functional Test AHRS Remote Switches Left WX/DU Picture Bus Right WX/DU Picture Bus Edge Lighting Lamp Test Page 3-8 3-12 3-12 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 3-15 3-15 3-17 3-20 3-22 3-24 3-26 3-28 3-29 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-31 3-34 3-36 3-37 3-203 3-205 3-207 3-208 3-209 3-210 3-211 3-212 3-213

22-05-14

Page 3-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

LIST OF FIGURES (cont) Figure 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 Display/SG Reversionary AHRS Reversion Switching MADC Reversion DAU Reversion Display Wrap Around RMU Engine Backup Display Interface AP/YD Off Warn AP Disconnect Interface Touch Control Steering (TCS) Go-Around Interface Elevator Trim Interface Surface Position Sensors RSB Interface COM/NAV Strapping Digital Audio Bus Pilots Primary MIC/Phone Copilots Primary MIC/Phone Observers Primary MIC/Phone No. 1 VHF COM/MIC PTT No. 2 VHF COM/MIC PTT Emergency NAV/COM Audio Passenger Address Interface DME/XPDR Mutual Suppression HF Considerations Master Caution/Warning Maintenance Panel Connections Title Page 3-215 3-217 3-219 3-221 3-222 3-223 3-224 3-225 3-226 3-227 3-228 3-229 3-230 3-231 3-232 3-233 3-234 3-235 3-236 3-237 3-238 3-239 3-240 3-241 3-242 3-243

LIST OF TABLES Table 4-1 4-2 Title Auxiliary Chassis Wire Grounding Circuit Breaker Selections Page 3-10 3-16

22-05-14

Page 3-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

1.0 2.0 3.0

(Deleted) (Deleted) (Deleted)

22-05-14

Page 3-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

4.0 4.1

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION DESIGN Power Requirements DC Power - The aircraft dc power supply must be 27.5 V dc (nominal). normal minimum and maximum allowable voltages are 22.0 and 29.5 V dc respectively (DO-160 CAT A). NOTE: The

4.1.1

For further information about aircraft power supply, refer to RTCA (Radio Technical Commission for Aeronautics) Specification DO-160C.

4.1.2 4.1.3

(Deleted) Power Supplied to LRUs - The voltage level of the power supplied to the LRUs is important in this installation. The potential is the difference between the power pins and power ground pins at the LRU. Excessive voltage drops in the power wire(s) and power ground wire(s) may cause one or more of the following conditions: The LRU will draw additional current from the aircraft supply system. Since the LRU is drawing more current, they produce more heat, lowering LRU MTBFs. LRU shutdowns may occur, even though the aircraft supply system voltages are within normal minimum and maximum levels.

Therefore, the recommended maximum total combined voltage drop (voltage drop of the power wire(s) plus voltage drop of the power ground wire(s)) is 0.5 volt. Voltage drop is a function of current and resistance (Resistance in this case is a function of wire gauge and wire length). See Figure 4-1 for determining proper wire gauge for LRU power and power ground wires. 4.2 Grounding Requirements Proper grounding is a key factor in ensuring proper system operation under normal conditions and under HIRF and lightning environments. This section must be complied with to satisfy these requirements. 4.2.1 Chassis Grounding - All units specified in this section must be properly grounded to the airframe ground. The grounding techniques to accomplish this are specified for (1) Panel/Pedestal Mount Units and for (2) Rack Mount/Remote Mount Units.

22-05-14

Page 3-7 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

CIRCUIT VOLTAGE 115 200 14 28 800 100 100 200 600 400 700 360 630 320 560 280 490 240 420 200 350 75 150 20 18 16 14

ELECTRIC CABLE CHART 12 10 8 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0

70 6 0 90 8 0 10 12 0 5

50 40

1. 5

15

CABLE LENGTH IN FEET PER VOLT DROP

50 100 45 90 40 80 35 70 30 60 25 50 EXAMPLE DESCRIBED IN SECTION 246 C & D

30

15

30
1 VE CUR

160 280 20 40 120 210 15 30 100 175 12 25 80 140 10 20 72 120 9 18 64 112 8 16 56 98 7 14 48 40 36 32 28 24 84 70 63 56 49 42 6 12 5 10 4 9 8 7 3 6 2 5 20

CU CU

2 RVE 3 RVE

CURVES: 1. CONTINUOUS RATING - AMPERES CABLES IN CONDUIT AND BUNDLES 2. CONTINUOUS RATING - AMPERES SINGLE CABLE IN FREE - AIR 3. INTERMITTENT RATING - AMPERES MAXIMUM IN 2 MINUTES 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0
AD-39740-R1@

20 35

CABLE SIZE

Voltage Drop as a Function of Cable Length Figure 4-1

10

22-05-14

Page 3-8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

40

20

0 17 5

10

20

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

4.2.1.1

Panel/Pedestal Mount Unit Grounding Panel/Pedestal Mount units (see Paragraph 4.2.2.3B) cannot be reliably grounded to the airframe via the panel mounting screws or DZUS fasteners. Grounding of these units is accomplished by using the shield grounding braid as detailed in Paragraph 4.2.2.3B and Figure 4-2J.

4.2.1.2

Rack Mount/Remote Mount Unit Grounding All Rack Mount/Remote Mount units shall be electrically bonded to the airframe. This is accomplished by ensuring that the mating surfaces between the LRU mounting tray (or LRU mounting feet if a tray is not used) provides a low impedance (< 0.1 ohm) electrical path. The mating surfaces must be free of all paint and elements and should be burnished to ensure a good mating surface is not conductive, a bonding strap wide (preferably 1/2 inch wide) tin coated copper between the LRU mounting tray (or LRU itself if a the nearest airframe grounding point. other non-conductive bond. If the aircraft of at least 1/4 inch braid can be used tray is not used) and

4.2.1.3

Auxiliary Chassis Grounding Auxiliary Chassis Grounding using a defined LRU connector pin is required for all the units specified in Table 4-2. This table lists all the Primus 1000 units that require an auxiliary chassis grounding wire. The auxiliary chassis grounding is accomplished by using a specified maximum length of 22 AWG insulated wire. The grounding points and maximum length of the wires is defined in Table 4-1.

22-05-14

Page 3-9 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

Table 4-1 Auxiliary Chassis Wire Grounding Unit Chassis Gnd Max Ground No. Description Conn Pin Wire Length Wire Grounding Point 1 AH-800 J1C-11 6 in. See Note 1 11 12 13 14 61 115 129 136 137 143 144 160 GC-550 SM-200A(AIL) SM-200A(EL) SM-200A(RUD) WC-650 DC-550 PC-400 DA-800 DA-800 RCZ-851 RM-855 AV-850A J1-79 J1-C J1-C J1-C J1-F J1-45 J1-j J1A-101 J2A-101 J1A-101 J2A-101 J1-67 J1-L J1-U J1-N J2_D 8 in. 12 in. 12 in. 12 in. 8 in. 8 in. 8 in. 6 6 6 6 in. in. in. in. See Note 1 See Note 2 See Note 2 See Note 2 See Note 1 See Note 1 See Note 1 See See See See Note Note Note Note 1 1 1 1

6 in. 8 in. 8 in. 8 in. 8 in.

See Note 3 See Note 1 See Note 1 See Note 1 See Note 1

193 RT-910 LBP-11 6 in See Note 1 NOTES: 1. Ground this wire to the end of the shield grounding braid (see Figure 4-2J). 2. Ground this wire to the nearest airframe ground point. Do not ground this wire to the servo/actuator itself because the wire is used as a backup ground path in case of poor or intermittent servo/actuator to airframe bonding. Ground this wire to the mounting rack grounding lug adjacent to the rack mating connectors.

3. 4.

Ground this wire by attaching a mounting bolt to the rear of the mounting tray and using this bolt to secure the wire via a lug.

22-05-14

Page 3-10 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

4.2.2

Shield Grounds Single Point Versus Multi Point Shield Grounding The majority of the shielded wires in the PRIMUS 1000 system have the shields grounded at both ends. This is called multi point grounding and is specified to minimize the adverse effects of HIRF and lightning. Due to technical considerations, multi point grounding cannot be used for all shielded wires. In these special cases only one end of each continuous shielded cable segment is grounded. This is called single point grounding. Deciding which cable segment end to ground on a single point ground cable should be based on the ease of locating a good shield ground in the particular installation (i.e., the end which provides the easiest grounding method should be grounded). If either end can be grounded easily, then the transmitter end should be grounded. The only shielded cables that are single point grounded are the following: All low-level analog audio signals DU-870 potentiometer dimming control (shield grounded at DU-870 only) ADF Antenna triaxial cable

4.2.2.1

The interconnect portion of this document (paragraph 5) specifies if one or both ends of a shielded cable requires grounding. Shields must not be connected to any LRU or bulkhead connector pin. Examples of both single and multi point shield grounding methods without bulkhead connectors are shown in Figures 4-2A through 4-2D. Bulkhead connector shield handling is detailed in Paragraph 4.2.2.2.

22-05-14

Page 3-11 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

J1 AUDIO OUTPUT (H) (L) 1 2

J1 9 10 (H) (L) AUDIO INPUT

NC

AD-30764@

Example #1 Single Point Shield Grounding W/O Bulkhead Conn Figure 4-2A

J1 AUDIO OUTPUT (H) (L) 1 2 NC

J1 5 6 (H) (L) AUDIO INPUT

J1 AUDIO INPUT (L) (H) 6 5 NC

AD-30099@

Example #2 Single Point Shield Grounding W/O Bulkhead Conn Figure 4-2B

22-05-14

Page 3-12 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

J1 ARINC 429 OUTPUT (H) (L) 1 2

J1 9 10 (H) (L) ARINC 429 INPUT

AD-30765@

Example #3 Multi Point Shield Grounding W/O Bulkhead Conn Figure 4-2C

J1 ARINC 429 OUTPUT (H) (L) 1 2

J1 5 6 (H) (L) ARINC 429 INPUT

J1 ARINC 429 INPUT (L) (H) 6 5

AD-30102@

Example #4 Multi Point Shield Grounding W/O Bulkhead Conn Figure 4-2D

22-05-14

Page 3-13 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

4.2.2.2

Bulkhead Connector Shield Handling The treatment of shields at bulkhead connectors is dependent on whether the shielded cable segment requires single or multi point shield grounding (see Paragraph 4.2.2.1). Shielded cables that require multi point shield grounding require that the shields be grounded at both sides of the bulkhead connectors. Shielded cables that require single point shield grounding are usually floating on both sides of the bulkhead connector. This is done because it is usually easier to ground a single point shield at the cable ends opposite the bulkhead connectors. Examples of bulkhead connector shield handling with both single and multi point shield grounding methods is shown in Figures 4-2E through 4-2H.

4.2.2.3

Shield Grounding Methods This section details the preferred method of shield grounding at all LRUs and bulkhead connectors. This grounding method represents just one method. Other methods may also be used but they must provide equivalent shield grounding effectiveness.

4.2.2.3A

Shield Grounding Method for Rack Mount Units This subsection describes the preferred shield grounding method for the following rack mount units: AH-800 DU-870 DA-800 RCZ-850/851B RNZ-850/850C IC-600 AHRU Computer Display Unit Data Acquisition Unit Com Unit Nav Unit Integrated Avionics Computer

The shield grounding method for rack mount units is detailed in Figure 4-2I.

22-05-14

Page 3-14 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

J1 AUDIO OUTPUT (H) (L) 1 2 NC BULKHEAD CONNECTOR A A

J1 9 10 NC AD-30098@ (H) (L) AUDIO INPUT

Example #1 Single Point Shield Grounding with Bulkhead Conn Figure 4-2E

J1 AUDIO OUTPUT (H) (L) 1 2 C C

J1 5 6 (H) (L) AUDIO INPUT

NC BULKHEAD CONNECTOR

NC

J1 AUDIO INPUT (L) (H) 5 6 NC AD-30100-R2@

Example #2 Single Point Shield Grounding with Bulkhead Conn Figure 4-2F

22-05-14

Page 3-15 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

J1 ARINC 429 OUTPUT (H) (L) 1 2 A A

J1 9 10 (H) (L) ARINC 429 INPUT

BULKHEAD CONNECTOR

AD-30101@

Example #3 Multi Point Shield Grounding with Bulkhead Conn Figure 4-2G

J1 ARINC 429 OUTPUT (H) (L) 1 2 C C

J1 5 6 (H) (L) ARINC 429 INPUT

BULKHEAD CONNECTOR

J1 ARINC 429 INPUT (L) (H) 5 6

AD-30103@

Example #4 Multi Point Shield Grounding with Bulkhead Conn Figure 4-2H

22-05-14

Page 3-16 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

TRAY CONNECTOR
TRAY BACKPLANE

SOLDER RING SLEEVE 4" MAX UNSHIELDED


4" MAX 22 AWG INSULATED PIGTAIL WIRE

SHIELDED CABLE

2" MAX 22 AWG INSULATED JUMPER WIRE 1/4" WIDE TIN PLATED COPPER FLAT BRAID
STEEL CLAMP TO SECURE BRAID(S) TO CONNECTOR BACKSHELL

CONNECTOR BACKSHELL

AD-30766@

Shield Grounding Example for Rack Mount Connectors Figure 4-2I

22-05-14

Page 3-17 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

NOTES FOR FIGURE 4-2I 1. The shield grounding example shows 2 shielded cable shields grounded at a connector backshell using a length of flat braid. Each pigtail wire provides a ground for a maximum of 2 shielded cables (do not use any more than one jumper wire per pigtail wire). The pigtail wires are attached to the end of the braid by crimp or solder. Each braid shall have a maximum of 6 pigtail wires connected to it. of the jumper wire, each braid can ground up to 12 shielded cables. If more than 12 shielded cables require grounding at a connector, use additional braids as required. Cover the exposed braid between the backshell and the pigtail wires with insulating tubing. The use of backshells is not mandatory. If backshells are not used the 1/4 inch wide shield ground braid should be grounded at the rear of the mounting tray using a lug terminal. If backshells are used, verify proper electrical bonding (< 0.1 ohm) between the backshell and the mounting tray. Because

2.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

22-05-14

Page 3-18 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

4.2.2.3B

Shield Grounding Method for Panel/Pedestal Mounted Units This subsection describes the preferred shield grounding method for the following panel/pedestal mounted units: GC-550 PC-400 WC-650 DC-550 CD-810 RM-855 AV-850A CD-850 Guidance Controller Turn/Pitch Controller WX Controller Display Controller Control Display Unit Radio Management Unit Audio Control Unit Clearance Delivery Head

The shield grounding method for panel/pedestal mounted units is detailed in Figure 4.2J. 4.2.2.3C Shield Grounding Method for Bulkhead Connectors and for Non-Panel Mounted/Non-Rack Mounted Units This subsection describes the preferred shield grounding method for the following units and for bulkhead connectors: AZ-850 SM-200 RT-300 WU-650 Air Data Computer Ail, Rud, Elev Servos Radio Altimeter R/T WX RT

The shield grounding method for non-panel mounted/non-rack mounted units and bulkhead connectors is detailed in Figure 4-2K. NOTE: The AZ-850 is included in this classification because its mounting tray does not have an integral mating connector.

22-05-14

Page 3-19 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

AIRCRAFT MATING CONNECTOR


BACKSHELL STEEL CLAMP TO SECURE BRAID TO CONNECTOR BACKSHELL SOLDER RING SLEEVE

4" MAX UNSHIELDED

4" MAX 22 AWG INSULATED PIGTAIL WIRE SHIELDED CABLE

2" MAX 22 AWG INSULATED JUMPER WIRE


FOLD BRAID IN HALF 22 AWG INSULATED CHASSIS GND WIRE (REF TABLE 4.2)

1/4" WIDE TIN PLATED COPPER FLAT BRAID (ONE CONTINUOUS LENGTH)

GROUNDING LUG (CONNECT TO AIRFRAME GROUND)

AD-30767@

Shield Grounding Example for Panel/Pedestal Mounted Units Figure 4-2J

22-05-14

Page 3-20 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

NOTES FOR FIGURE 4-2J 1. The shield grounding example shows 2 shielded cable shields grounded at a connector backshell and to aircraft ground using a length of flat braid. Braid length from connector backshell to grounding lug shall be 18 inches max. Each pigtail wire provides a ground for a maximum of 2 shielded cables (do not use any more than one jumper wire per pigtail wire). The pigtail wires are attached to the end of the braid by crimp or solder. Each braid shall have a maximum of 6 pigtail wires connected to it (7 wires if chassis gnd wire is connected). Because of the jumper wire, each braid can ground up to 12 shielded cables (one braid is sufficient for each panel/pedestal mounted unit). Cover the exposed braid between the backshell and the pigtail wires plus between the grounding lug and the backshell with insulating tubing. Connector strain reliefs can be used in lieu of backshells. Tie braid to strain relief using a mounting lug crimped or soldered to the braid (NOTE: Backshells are preferable over strain reliefs). The use of connector strain reliefs or backshells is not mandatory. If neither is used, the 1/4 inch wide shield ground braid is run directly from the wire harness to aircraft ground with a maximum length of 18 inches. If backshells or strain reliefs are used, verify proper electrical bonding (< 0.1 ohm) between the backshell/strain relief and the connector.

2.

3.

4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

22-05-14

Page 3-21 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

CONNECTOR 4" MAX UNSHIELDED

SOLDER RING SLEEVE


4" MAX 22 AWG INSULATED PIGTAIL WIRE

SHIELDED CABLE

2" MAX 22 AWG INSULATED JUMPER WIRE 1/4" WIDE TIN PLATED COPPER FLAT BRAID
BACKSHELL

STEEL CLAMP TO SECURE BRAID(S) TO CONNECTOR BACKSHELL

AD-30768@

Shield Grounding Example for Bulkhead Connectors and for Non-Panel Mounted/Non-Rack Mounted Units Figure 4-2K

22-05-14

Page 3-22 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

NOTES FOR FIGURE 4-2K 1. The shield grounding example shows 2 shielded cable shields grounded at a connector backshell using a length of flat braid. Each pigtail wire provides a ground for a maximum of 2 shielded cables (do not use any more than one jumper wire per pigtail wire). The pigtail wires are attached to the end of the braid by crimp or solder. Each braid shall have a maximum of 6 pigtail wires connected to it. of the jumper wire, each braid can ground up to 12 shielded cables. If more than 12 shielded cables require grounding at a connector, use additional braids as required. Cover the exposed braid between the backshell and the pigtail wires with insulating tubing. Connector strain reliefs can be used in lieu of backshells. Tie braid to strain relief using a mounting lug crimped or soldered to braid end (NOTE: Backshells are preferable over strain reliefs). Bulkhead connector shield grounding assumes that the bulkhead connectors are properly bonded to the bulkhead itself and that the bulkhead material is conductive and electrically bonded to the airframe. The use of connector strain reliefs or backshells is not mandatory. If neither is used, the 1/4 inch wide shield ground braid should be grounded to airframe ground with as short as run as possible, but no longer than 12 inches from the harness break-out point. Because

2.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

22-05-14

Page 3-23 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

4.2.2.3D

Units Without Shield Grounding Requirements The following unit does not have shield wires that can be grounded at the unit connector: FX-600 Flux Valve

4.2.3

Power/Signal Grounds - All DC power grounds shall be tied together, all signal grounds shall be tied together, and all lighting grounds shall be tied together. DC power, signal, and lighting ground groups are then tied together at a single point and connected to the airframe. The aircraft grounding diagram (figure 4-3) illustrates this grounding method. It is very important that this grounding technique be adhered to. Do not tie the various ground wires to multiple aircraft frame points and depend on the aircraft structure itself to provide a low impedance path for the individual grounds. ONLY chassis grounds and shield grounds are grounded at multiple points in the aircraft.

Aircraft Grounding Figure 4-3

22-05-14

Page 3-24 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

NOTE:

Because signal grounds are low currents, multiple signal grounds can be connected to remote aircraft terminal blocks other than the central grounding blocks as long as these remote terminal blocks are isolated from ground. The various remote signal ground blocks must all be grounded only at the aircraft central grounding point. For example, if ten signal grounds are connected to a remote terminal block, a minimum of one grounding wire must be run from this terminal block to the aircraft central grounding point.

4.3

Interconnect Requirements The PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System utilizes electrical and mechanical engage interlocks. The electrical interlocks consist of program pins on the units mating connector that electrically determine how a unit shall function. The mechanical interlocks are mechanically keyed connectors that prevent units from being incorrectly connected or installed. Polarities - Installing the system in accordance with the interconnect information defined in this document will result in the following servo phasing:

4.3.1

Roll Right - CCW drum rotation viewed from drum end Pitch Up - CW drum rotation viewed from drum end TO ASSURE THE FGC/SERVO WIRING IS CORRECT, THIS WIRING SHOULD BE 100% CONTINUITY CHECKED. THIS IS TO INSURE THE PROPER SERVO IS INSTALLED AND THE PHASING BETWEEN THE AUTOPILOT SENSORS AND AIRCRAFT CONTROLS IS CORRECT AS REFERENCED WITH THE ABOVE PHASING INFORMATION.

22-05-14

Page 3-25 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

4.4

ICB Requirements Maintaining proper bus cabling and stub connections within the aircraft is extremely important. The following installation guidelines have been optimized through actual tests to ensure reliable bus operation. These installation techniques reduce signal reflections and susceptance to radiated and conducted energy and radiated emissions. Alternate methods of installation must maintain the shielding integrity and minimize unshielded conductor lengths as illustrated in Figure 4-4 below.

Installation Diagram of an ICB Bus Configuration Figure 4-4

22-05-14

Page 3-26 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

To minimize bus driver power to a practical limit, twisted-pair shielded cable with a 125 ohm characteristic impedance shall be used. The airframe manufacturer can use Raychem 2524E0114 or Filotex 69654 or equivalent. Bus wires are not required to be terminated at both ends. The terminating resistors may be located inside the LRUs. The stub length outside the box, excluding the connector pin, shall be less than 4.3 inches. Butt splices with solder rings will be utilized for all stub interconnections. The shield connections at each stub shall be accomplished with a butt splice which will provide a maximum shield to shield connection of 0.3 inches. A minimum cable length of 23 inches is required between any two users. is necessary to minimize reflections. This

All stub wiring shall comprise twisted-pair unshielded wiring of suitable wire gauge (the use of thick insulation to minimize inter-wiring capacitance and 24-gauge is recommended). Because of the high levels of the HIRF and Lightning threats, it is recommended that the shield for the IC bus should be grounded at both ends using a 1-inch (maximum) length of 22 gauge wire. 4.5 IC/Display Unit Bus Interface The IC/DU buses provide PFD, MFD, and EICAS data from the ICs to the DUs. The IC/DU bus layout is shown in Paragraph 6, Figure 6-9. The following paragraphs define the electrical interface requirements for the IC/Display Unit interconnect. The IC/DU transmission lines shall have a characteristic impedance of 125 10 ohms. The characteristic capacitance shall be 12 2 picofarads/foot. Raychem 2524E0114 (with thermorad jacket) cable, Filotex Part No. 69654 cable, or equivalent can be used. (This is ASCB type cable.) Each DU has provisions for bus termination. The + and - inputs are always used. The - input is tied to the TERM input to terminate the bus within the display unit (see Figure 4-5).

22-05-14

Page 3-27 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

High Speed Differential Input Termination Figure 4-5 DUs are to be connected to a bus as shown in Figure 4-6 (Terminated DU) or Figure 4-7 (Unterminated DU). The maximum cable length from an IC-600 to a DU is 200 feet. There shall be a minimum of 23 inches of cable between adjacent stubs (see Figure 4-7). The preferred method of constructing a DU stub connection is the same as for the ASCB stub (see Figure 4-2). Using this method the unshielded stub length can be up to 6 inches. Butt splices with solder rings will be utilized for all stub interconnections (see Figure 4-2). The bus shield connections at each stub shall be accomplished with a butt splice which will provide a maximum shield to shield connection of 0.3 inches (see Figure 4-2). If a stub shield is used, connect the stub shield to the bus shield as shown in Figure 4-7 with a butt splice or minimum length (less than 2 inches) 20 AWG wire. All exposed wires at the splice and wires used to connect shields at the splice shall be covered with an overbraid material. The overbraid material shall then be tied to the shield or airframe ground. The Bus shields shall be grounded to the airframe ground at each LRU connector as specified in Paragraph 5 with a minimum length 20 AWG wire. Refer to Paragraph 4.2.2 for proper shield grounding points and overbraid or backshell protection. It is very important that the DU/IC buses in a redundant system be installed with consideration for damage failure modes. Therefore, the buses should be bundled separately wherever possible, should not pass through common connectors or feedthroughs, and should not be installed in high risk areas such as wing leading edges, engine shrapnel path, etc.

22-05-14

Page 3-28 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

200' MAX 23'' MIN 23'' MIN 23'' MIN + TERMINATED DU

SG 1 MHZ BUS

TERM

10'' MAX (NOTE 1)

UNTERMINATED DU

UNTERMINATED DU

NOTES: 1. THE STUB SHIELDING CAN BE ELIMINATED BY CONSTRUCTING THE STUB AS SHOWN IN FIG. 4-2, AND DISCUSSED IN PARAGRAPH 4.5

AD-21678-R3@

DU/IC Bus Interface (Terminated DU) Figure 4-6 NOTE: If a terminating DU is removed from the panel, all remaining DUs utilizing that particular bus may fail to operate or may operate intermittently. Therefore, optional termination resistors can be incorporated into the aircraft wiring should dispatch without a DU be required. The termination resistors should be noninductive 127 ohm, 1%, 1/4 watt, metal film. The cable length between the last stub and the termination resistor shall be a minimum of 23 inches. This optional termination method is shown in Figure 4-4. Provide overbraid protection for exposed wires and resistor at the termination point.
200' MAX 23'' MIN 23'' MIN 23'' MIN 23'' MIN

SG 1MHZ BUS

127

10'' MAX (NOTE 1)

UNTERMINATED DU

UNTERMINATED DU

UNTERMINATED DU

NOTES: 1. THE STUB SHIELDING CAN BE ELIMINATED BY CONSTRUCTING THE STUB AS SHOWN IN FIG. 4-2, AND DISCUSSED IN PARAGRAPH 4.5 CABLE: ASCB CABLE OR ELECTRICAL EQUIVALENT

AD-21675-R3@

DU/IC Bus Interface (Unterminated DU) Figure 4-7

22-05-14

Page 3-29 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

4.6

WX/Display Unit Bus Interface The WX/DU buses provide Weather Radar data from the WX unit to the DUs. The WX/DU bus layout is shown in Paragraph 6, Figures 6-5 and 6-6. The following paragraphs define the electrical interface requirements for the WX/Display Unit interconnect. The WX/DU transmission lines shall have a characteristic impedance of 70 10% ohms. The characteristic capacitance shall be 30 picofarads/foot max. Honeywell Part No. 3718911-1 cable or equivalent, such as ESC 422402, shall be used. (NOTE: ASCB type cable cannot be used). Each DU has provisions for bus termination. The + and - inputs are always used. The - input is tied to the TERM input to terminate the bus within the display unit.

High Speed Differential Input Termination Figure 4-8 DUs are to be connected to a bus as shown in Figure 4-9. the end of the cable shall be terminated. The maximum cable length from the WX to a DU is 50 feet. There shall be a minimum of 23 inches of cable between adjacent stubs (see Figure 4-10). The preferred method of constructing a DU stub connection is the same as for the ASCB stub (see Figure 4-2). Using this method the unshielded stub length can be up to 6 inches. Butt splices with solder rings will be utilized for all stub interconnections (see Figure 4-2). Only the DU at

22-05-14

Page 3-30 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

50' MAX 23'' MIN 23'' MIN 23'' MIN + TERMINATED DU

WX 1MHZ PICTURE BUS

TERM

10'' MAX (NOTE 1)

UNTERMINATED DU

UNTERMINATED DU

NOTES: 1. THE STUB SHIELDING CAN BE ELIMINATED BY CONSTRUCTING THE STUB AS SHOWN IN FIG.4-2 AND DISCUSSED IN PARAGRAPH 4.6
AD-30105-R1@

DU/WX Bus Interface (Terminated DU) Figure 4-9 NOTE: If a terminating DU is removed from the panel, all remaining DUs utilizing that particular bus may fail to operate or may operate intermittently. Therefore, optional termination resistors can be incorporated into the aircraft wiring should dispatch without a DU be required. The termination resistors should be noninductive 100 ohm, 1%, 1/4 watt, metal film. The cable length between the last stub and the termination resistor shall be a minimum of 23 inches. This optional termination method is shown in Figure 4-10. Provide overbraid protection for exposed wires and resistor at the termination point.
90' MAX 23'' MIN WX 1 MHz PICTURE BUS 23'' MIN 23'' MIN 23'' MIN

100 W

10'' MAX (NOTE 1)

+ UNTERMINATED DU

+ UNTERMINATED DU

+ UNTERMINATED DU
AD-39744@

DU/WX Bus Interface (Unterminated DU) Figure 4-10

22-05-14

Page 3-31 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

The bus shield connections at each stub shall be accomplished with a butt splice which will provide a maximum shield to shield connection of 0.3 inches (see Figure 4-2). If a stub shield is used, connect the stub shield to the bus shield as shown in Figure 4-10 with a butt splice or minimum length (less than 2 inches) 20 AWG wire. All exposed wires at the splice and wires used to connect shields at the splice shall be covered with an overbraid material. The overbraid material shall then be tied to the shield or airframe ground. The DU and WX Bus shields shall be grounded to the airframe ground at each LRU connector as specified in Paragraph 5 with a minimum length 20 AWG wire. Refer to Paragraph 4.2.2 for proper shield grounding points and overbraid or backshell protection.

4.7

Radio System Bus (RSB) Interface The RSB is the primary communication path between major subsystems of the PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System. The RSB consists of multi-point serial synchronous digital communications networks - one primary bus and two on-side (backup) buses. Each bus is electrically isolated from the other buses. The RSB bus layout is shown in Paragraph 6, Figure 6-21. The RSB complies with RTCA Document DO-160C which requires that the following installation requirements be met: There are three independent RSBs denoted "PRIMARY," "L SECONDARY," and "R SECONDARY" each consisting of one shielded wire pair. The RSB transmission lines shall have a characteristic impedance of 125 5 ohms. The characteristic capacitance shall be 12 2 picofarads/foot. Raychem 2524E0114 (with thermorad jacket) cable, Filotex Part No. 69654 cable, or equivalent can be used. Each RSB transmission line pair shall be terminated at its two ends with noninductive 120 ohm resistors 5%, 1/4 watt, metal film. 127 ohm 1% resistors may also be used. The cable length between the last stub and the termination resistor shall be 23 inches. Provide overbraid protection for exposed wires and resistor at termination point. The RSB transmission lines shall have a maximum length between terminators of 150 feet. There shall be a minimum of 23 inches of cable between adjacent stubs (see Figure 4-11). The preferred method of constructing an RSB stub connection is the same as for the ASCB (see Figure 4-2). Using this method the unshielded stub length can be up to 6 inches.

22-05-14

Page 3-32 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

Butt splices with solder rings will be utilized for all stub interconnections (Ref. Figure 4-2). The RSB bus shield connections at each stub shall be accomplished with a butt splice which will provide a maximum shield to shield connection of 0.3 inches (see Figure 4-2). If a stub shield is used, connect the stub shield to the RSB bus shield as shown in Figure 4-11 with a butt splice or minimum length (less than 2 inches) 20 AWG wire. All exposed wires at the splice and wires used to connect shields at the splice shall be covered with an overbraid material. The overbraid material shall then be tied to the shield or airframe ground. The RSB shield shall be grounded to the airframe ground at each LRU connector as specified in Paragraph 5 with a minimum length 20 AWG wire (see Figure 4-11). Refer to Paragraph 4.2.2 for proper shield grounding points and overbraid or backshell protection. It is very important that the three RSB buses in a redundant system be installed with consideration for damage failure modes. Therefore, the buses should be bundled separately wherever possible, should not pass through common connectors or feedthroughs, and should not be installed in high risk areas such as wing leading edges, engine shrapnel path, etc.

4.8

Digital Audio Bus Interface Requirements The Digital Audio bus is the primary audio communication path between major subsystems of the PRIMUS II Integrated Radio System and the Audio Panels. The Digital Audio bus consists of multi-point serial synchronous digital communications networks - two primary buses. Each bus is electrically isolated from the other bus. The Digital Audio bus layout is shown in Paragraph 6, Figure 6-23. The Digital Audio bus complies with RTCA Document DO-160C which requires that the following installation requirements be met: There are two independent Digital Audio buses denoted "Digital Audio 1" and "Digital Audio 2" each consisting of one shielded wire pair. The Digital Audio bus transmission lines shall have a characteristic impedance of 125 5 ohms. The characteristic capacitance shall be 12 2 picofarads/foot. Raychem 2524E0114 (with thermorad jacket) cable, Filotex Part No. 69654 cable, or equivalent can be used.

22-05-14

Page 3-33 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

150' MAX 23'' MIN 23'' MIN 23'' MIN

120 W

120 W

10'' MAX (NOTE 1)

SUBSYSTEM 1

SUBSYSTEM 2

SUBSYSTEM N

CABLE: RAYCHEM 2524E0114 OR FILOTEX 69654. 125 W , THERMORAD JACKET NOTES: 1. THE STUB SHIELDING CAN BE ELIMINATED BY CONSTRUCTING THE STUB AS SHOWN IN FIG. 4-2 AND DISCUSSED IN PARAGRAPH 4.7

AD-21676-R3@

RSB Bus Construction Figure 4-11

22-05-14

Page 3-34 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

Each Digital Audio bus transmission line pair shall be terminated at its two ends with noninductive 120 ohm resistors 5%, 1/4 watt, metal film. 127 ohm 1% resistors may also be used. The cable length between the last stub and the termination resistor shall be 23 inches. The Digital Audio bus transmission lines shall have a maximum length between terminators of 150 feet. There shall be a minimum of 23 inches of cable between adjacent stubs (see Figure 4-12). Butt splices with solder rings will be utilized for all stub interconnections (see Figure 4-2). The Digital Audio bus shield connections at each stub shall be accomplished with a butt splice which will provide a maximum shield to shield connection of 0.3 inches (see Figure 4-2). If a stub shield is used, connect the stub shield to the Digital Audio bus shield as shown in Figure 4-12 with a butt splice or minimum length (less than 2 inches) 20 AWG wire. All exposed wires at the splice and wires used to connect shields at the splice shall be covered with an overbraid material. The overbraid material shall then be tied to the shield or airframe ground. The Digital Audio bus shield shall be grounded to the airframe ground at each LRU connector as specified in Paragraph 5 with a minimum length 20 AWG wire (see Figure 4-12). Refer to Paragraph 4.2.2 for proper shield grounding points and overbraid or backshell protection. It is very important that the two Digital Audio buses in a redundant system be installed with consideration for damage failure modes. Therefore, the buses should be bundled separately wherever possible, should not pass through common connectors or feedthroughs, and should not be installed in high risk areas such as wing leading edges, engine shrapnel path, etc.

22-05-14

Page 3-35 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

150' MAX 23'' MIN 23'' MIN 23'' MIN

120 W

120 W

10'' MAX (NOTE 1)

SUBSYSTEM 1

SUBSYSTEM 2

SUBSYSTEM N
AD-39745@

Digital Audio Bus Construction Figure 4-12

22-05-14

Page 3-36 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

4.9

Special Considerations for Master Caution and Master Warning Lamp Drivers In order to supply sufficient current to the master caution and master warning lamps, current draw restrictions on other lamp driver outputs are required. Each bank of lamp driver outputs shall be limited to less than 500 milliamps of current draw as shown in Figure 4-13 below.

Lamp Driver Current Draw Requirements Figure 4-13

22-05-14

Page 3-37 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

5.0

ELECTRICAL INTERCONNECT DEFINITION This paragraph provides the electrical interconnect definition for the PRIMUS 1000 Digital Integrated Avionics System. The interconnect information is ordered per unit connector designation numbers.

5.1

Interconnect Format Definition Each connection is typically shown as indicated below. 1 IO BP (O) (O) 1 2 DESCRIPTION 3 FROM PIN 4 AWG 5 TO PIN(S) 6 COMMENTS

SERVO DRIVE (H) SERVO DRIVE (L) I = O = B = P = I/O

29AJ1-1 29AJ1-2

(22)-T-S----- 29J1-2 (22)-T-S----- 29J1-1

INPUT OUTPUT BI-DIRECTIONAL BUS POWER = INPUT/OUTPUT

2 3

DESCRIPTION OF SIGNAL FUNCTION FROM CONNECTION UNIT DESIGNATION CONNECTOR PIN 29A J1 -1

MINIMUM WIRE GAUGE SIZE S = Shield IS = Inner Shield T = Twisted OS = Outer Shield

TO CONNECTION UNIT DESIGNATION CONNECTOR PIN 29 J1 -2

22-05-14

Page 3-38 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

MISC. COMMENTS NOTES: 1. A letter "C" before a Unit No. indicates copilots side (2nd) LRU. A letter "E" before a Unit No. indicates 3rd LRU. All discrete output signals include the logic type in parenthesis after the function name. The first state within the parenthesis enables the function name. Example: DU VALID (GND/OPEN)

2.

This means the DU is valid with a ground. 5.2 Notes The following notes are referenced throughout the interconnect interface data. NOTES: 1. Recommended wire gauge for power input pins should only be used if total voltage drop from power source to LRU does not exceed 1 volt. Refer to paragraph 4.1.3 for determining proper wire gauge if the length of the wire is such that the voltage drop exceeds 1 volt for the recommended wire gauge. Use Raychem 2524E0114 (with thermorad jacket) cable, Filotex Part No. 69654, or equivalent. This same cable is used for ASCB, RSB, and SG/DU bus.

2.

22-05-14

Page 3-39 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE UNIT NO. 1 AH-800 IO BP (B) (B) (I) (I) (I) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B)

Function ASCB ONSIDE DATA (H) ASCB ONSIDE DATA (L) SHOP MAINTENANCE RESERVED RESERVED ASCB XSIDE DATA (H) ASCB XSIDE DATA (L) MEM MEM MEM MEM ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS

Connector Pin 1J1A-C10 -C13 -E1 -E2 -E3 -F10 -F13

Connects To

DATA (TX) -H3 (24)-T-S----------S-- DATA (RX) -H4 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. 6-34 COM -H7 (24)-T-S----------S-- MODE SEL -H10 (24)-T-S----------S-- SHIELD GND SHIELD GND ASCB BU DATA (H) -K3 ASCB BU DATA (L) 1J1A-K5

22-05-14

Page 3-40 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE UNIT NO. 1 (cont) AH-800 IO BP (O) (I) (I) (I) (I)

Function PROGRAM PIN COMMON

Connector Pin 1J1B-A1 -A7 -A8 -A9 -A10 (24)-----------------

Connects To

LAMP TEST (RESERVED) RESERVED RESERVED TEST COMMAND (RESERVED)

TEST SWITCH, FIG. 6-3

(O) (O) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O)

SERIAL DATA OUT (H) SERIAL DATA OUT (L) SERIAL DATA IN (H) SERIAL DATA IN (L) AHRS FAIL ANNUNCIATOR

-B6 -B7 -B10 -B11

-D2 BASIC MODE ANNUNCIATOR (RSVD) DISCRETE COMMON (RSVD) OVERTEMP WARN ANNUNCIATOR (RSVD) SLAVING FAIL ANNUNCIATOR (RSVD) DG MODE ANNUNCIATOR (RSVD) ARINC 429 OUT #2 (H) ARINC 429 OUT #2 (L) SHIELD GND -D3 -D7 -E1 -E2 -E3 -E5 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. -E6 (24)-T-S----------S-- 6-10 SHIELD GND

(O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

MAG HDG SYNCHRO (X) (RSVD) -E10 MAG HDG SYNCHRO (Y) (RSVD) -E11 MAG HDG SYNCHRO (Z) (RSVD) -E12 ALIGN ANNUNCIATOR (RSVD) MEMORY MODULE INHIBIT MEMORY MODULE POWER MEMORY MODULE RETURN MEMORY MODULE CLOCK MEMORY MODULE DATA

-F3 -F6 -F7 -F8 -F9 1J1B-F11

(24)----------------(24)----------------(24)----------------(24)----------------(24)-----------------

MEM MEM MEM MEM MEM

MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE

(ORN) (RED) (BLK) (YEL) (BRN)

22-05-14

Page 3-41 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE UNIT NO. 1 (cont) AH-800 IO BP (I)

Function

Connector Pin

Connects To

MAG HDG 26 V 400 HZ REF (RSVD) 1J1B-F13 ARINC 429 OUT 4 (H) ARINC 429 OUT 4 (L) AHRS VALID (RSVD) MAG HDG VALID (RSVD) -F14 -F15 -G1 -G2

(O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O)

ARINC 429 OUT 1 (H) -G7 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. ARINC 429 OUT 1 (L) -G8 (24)-T-S----------S-- 6-10 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND 26 V 400 HZ RET (RSVD) HEADING HEADING HEADING HEADING HEADING DG MODE SLEW COM SLEW 0 SLEW 1 SLEW 2 SLEW 3 SELECT -G13 -H1 -H2 -H3 -H4 -H5 -H6 (24)---- -------- (24)---------------- FIG. 6-4 (24)---------------- (24)----------------- INSTRUMENT PANEL FIG. 6-4 4J1-A 4J1-B 4J1-C 4J1-F NC

(I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

(I) (I) (I) (I)

FLUX FLUX FLUX FLUX

VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE

INPUT A INPUT B INPUT C COMMON F

-H8 (22)-T-S----------S--H9 (22)-T-S----------S--H10 (22)-T-S----------S--H11 (22)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND

(O) (O)

FLUX VALVE EXCITATION D -H12 (22)-T-S----------S-- 4J1-D FLUX VALVE EXCITATION E -H13 (22)-T-S----------S-- 4J1-E SHIELD GND NC ARINC 429 IN #2 (H) ARINC 429 IN #2 (L) AUX POWER ANNUNCIATOR (RSVD) -J10 (24) -J11 (24)

(O) (O) (O)

1J1B-J15

22-05-14

Page 3-42 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE UNIT NO. 1 (cont) AH-800 IO BP (I) (I)

Function

Connector Pin

Connects To

ARINC 429 #1 IN (H) 1J1B-K4 (24)-T-S---------S-FIG. ARINC 429 #1 IN (L) -K5 (24)-T-S---------S-6-11 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND ARINC 429 #3 OUT (H) -K12 (24)-T-S---------S-- FIG. ARINC 429 #3 OUT (L) -K13 (24)-T-S---------S-- 6-10 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND WOW 1J1B-K15 (24)---------------- FIG. 6-2

(0) (0)

(I)

22-05-14

Page 3-43 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE UNIT NO. 1 (cont) AH-800 IO BP (I) (O) (I) (O) (I)

Function 28 V DC AUXILIARY

Connector Pin 1J1C-2 -6 -7 -8 1J1C-11 (22)-----------------(22)-----------------(22)------------------

Connects To FIG. 6-1

CONTROLLER 28 V DC PWR 28 V DC PRIMARY 28 V DC RETURN CHASSIS GND

FIG. 6-1 DC PWR GND

22-05-14

Page 3-44 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

FLUX VALVE NO. 1 FX-600 IO BP (O) (O) (O) (O)

Function STATOR STATOR STATOR STATOR A B C COMMON F

Connector Pin 4J1-A (22)-T-S-----------S--B (22)-T-S-----------S--C (22)-T-S-----------S-4J1-F (22)-T-S-----------S-NC

Connects To 1J1B-H8 1J1B-H9 1J1B-H10 1J1B-H11 SHIELD GND

(I) (I)

EXCITATION D EXCITATION E

-D (22)-T-S-----------S-- 1J1B-H12 -E (22)-T-S-----------S-- 1J1B-H13 NC SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-45 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS MADC AZ-850 IO BP (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (P) (P) (O) (O) (B) (I) (I) (B) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function UNIT ID 1 UNIT ID 2 UNIT ID 3 UNIT ID 4 UNIT ID 5 UNIT ID 6 UNIT ID 7 SDI 1 SDI 2 SDI 3 SPARE WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS SIGNAL GROUND SPARE TAT PROBE HEAT DISCRETE Connector Pin 9J1-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 Connects To

(24)------------------ SIGNAL GROUND (24)------------------ SIGNAL GROUND (24)------------------ SIGNAL GROUND

(24)------------------ FIG. 6-2 (24)------------------ SIGNAL GROUND

-14 -15 (24)------------------ TAT PROBE HEAT SIGNAL BARO SELECT (IN/HPA) -16 (24)------------------ 190J2B-82 SPARE IN #3 GND -17 SPARE IN #4 GND -18 SPARE IN #1 +28 V -19 ---------------------- RESERVED FOR ALT. VMO SIGNAL SPARE IN #2 +28 V -20 DISCRETE OUT #1(170 KTS) -21 (24)------------------ RUDDER TRIM SYSTEM DISCRETE OUT #2(205 KTS) -22 (24)------------------ SPOILER COMMAND DISCRETE OUT #3(24,500 FT) -23 (24)------------------ SYSTEM DISCRETE OUT #4(TBD KTS) -24 ALTITUDE TRIP POINT(TBD FT) -25 +28 V DC HI -26 (22)------------------ FIG. 6-1 +28 V DC LO -27 (22)------------------ DC GROUND OVERSPEED WARNING DISC -28 (24)------------------ CREW ALERTING SYSTEM MADC VALID DISC -29 ASCB ON SIDE PRIMARY HI -30 TEMP PROBE HI -31 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 500 OHM TEMP PROBE TEMP PROBE LO -32 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 500 OHM TEMP PROBE SHIELD GND SHIELD GND SPARE -33 ASCB ON SIDE PRIMARY LO -34 AOA HI -35 AOA ARM -36 AOA LO -37 CALIBRATION ENABLE 9J1-38 --------------------- SHOP USE ONLY

22-05-14

Page 3-46 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS MADC (cont) AZ-850 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (B) (B) (B) (I) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B)

SPARE 9J1-39 SPARE -40 SPARE -41 ATC ENABLE DISC -42 ATC A1 -43 ATC A2 -44 ATC A4 -45 ATC B1 -46 ATC B2 -47 ATC B4 -48 ATC C1 -49 ATC C2 -50 ATC C4 -51 ATC D4 -52 SPARE -53 SPARE -54 RS-232 RX IN HI -55 (24)-T-S----------S-- RS-232 LO -56 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. 6-34 RS-232 TX OUT HI -57 (24)-T-S----------S-- SHIELD GND SHIELD GND VMO SELECT ASCB ON SIDE BACKUP HI ARINC 429 BUS 1 HI ARINC 429 BUS 1 LO SHIELD GND ASCB ON SIDE BACKUP LO ARINC 429 BUS 2 HI ARINC 429 BUS 2 LO SHIELD GND -58 -59 -60 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. -61 (24)-T-S----------S-- 6-11 SHIELD GND -62 -63 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. -64 (24)-T-S----------S-- 6-11 SHIELD GND

ASCB X-SIDE PRI (H) -65 ARINC 429 BUS 3 HI -66 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. ARINC 429 BUS 3 LO 9J1-67 (24)-T-S----------S-- 6-11 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-47 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS MADC (cont) AZ-850 IO BP (B) (B) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To

ARINC 429 BUS 4 HI 9J1-68 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. ARINC 429 BUS 4 LO 9J1-69 (24)-T-S----------S-- 6-11 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND FUNCTIONAL TEST DISC BARO SELECT DISC (STD) SSEC DISABLE(GND=DISABLE) SPARE BARO-CORRECTION A (H) BARO-CORRECTION B (L) SHIELD GND -70 (24)----------------- FIG. 6-3 -71 (24)----------------- 130J1-46 -72 -73 --------------------- SHOP USE ONLY -74 (24)-T-S----------S-- 130J1-21 -75 (24)-T-S----------S-- 130J1-25 SHIELD GND

(B)

SPARE -76 ASCB CROSS SIDE PRIMARY LO -77 SPARE -78 SPARE 9J1-79

22-05-14

Page 3-48 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

FLIGHT GUIDANCE CONTROLLER GC-550 IO BP (I) (I) (P) (P) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (P) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function PILOT MODE GND COPILOT MODE GND PANEL LGHTG 5 V (H) LGHTG COMMON ANNUNCIATOR LIGHTING SPARE #1 PUSHBUTTON (FD1) #2 PUSHBUTTON (AP ENG) #3 PUSHBUTTON (YD ENG) #4 PUSHBUTTON (CPL) #5 PUSHBUTTON (HDG) #6 PUSHBUTTON (BNK) #7 PUSHBUTTON (NAV) #8 PUSHBUTTON (APR) #9 PUSHBUTTON (ALT) #10 PUSHBUTTON (SPD) #11 PUSHBUTTON (FLC) #12 PUSHBUTTON (RESERVED) #13 PUSHBUTTON (VS) #14 PUSHBUTTON (FD2) +15 V MODE POWER #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 LAMP LAMP LAMP LAMP LAMP (FD2) (AP ENG) (YD ENG) (CPL L) (HDG) Connector Pin 11J1-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 Connects To

(22)------------------ SIGNAL GND (22)------------------ FIG. 6-7 (22)------------------ DC GND (22)------------------ DAY/NIGHT SWITCH (24)-----------------(22)-----------------(22)-----------------(24)-----------------190J1B-48 190J2B-85 190J2B-83 190J2B-55, C190J2B-55 190J1B-22, C190J1B-22 190J2B-56, C190J2B-56 190J1B-24, C190J1B-24 190J1B-25, C190J1B-25 190J1B-26, C190J1B-26 190J1B-27, C190J1B-27 190J1B-28, C190J1B-28

-11 (24)------------------12 (24)------------------13 (24)------------------14 (24)------------------15 (24)------------------16 (24)------------------17 (24)------------------18 -----NC

#6 LAMP (BNK) #7 LAMP (NAV) #8 LAMP (APR) #9 LAMP (ALT)

-19 (24)------------------ 190J1B-30, C190J1B-30 -20 (24)------------------ C190J1B-48 -21 (24)------------------ 190J2B-59, 129J1-C -22 (24)------------------ C190J1B-36 -23 (22)------------------ 190J2B-86 -24 (22)------------------ 190J2B-84 -25 (24)------------------ 190J2A-99 -26 (24)------------------ 190J2A-106, C190J2A-106 -27 (24)------------------ 190J2A-98, C190J2A-98 -28 (24)------------------ 190J2A-105, C190J2A-105 -29 (24)------------------ 190J2A-104, C190J2A-104 11J1-30 (24)------------------ 190J2A-103, C190J2A-103

22-05-14

Page 3-49 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

FLIGHT GUIDANCE CONTROLLER (cont) GC-550 IO BP (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function #10 LAMP (SPD) #11 LAMP (FLC) #12 LAMP (FD1) #13 LAMP (VS) SPARE #15 LAMP (CPL R) SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE Connector Pin Connects To

11J1-31 (24)------------------ 190J2A-102, C190J2A-102 -32 (24)------------------ 190J1B-37, C190J1B-37 -33 (24)------------------ 190J1B-36 -34 (24)------------------ 190J2A-101, C190J2A-101 -35 -36 (24)------------------ C190J2A-99 -37 -38 -39 -40

(O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O)

SPARE -41 SPARE -42 SPARE -43 #1 SET KNOB 1 -44 (24)-T-S-----------S-#1 SET KNOB 2 CRS 1 -45 (24)-T-S-----------S-#1 SET KNOB COMMON -46 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND #2 SET KNOB 1 #2 SET KNOB 2 HDG #2 SET KNOB COMMON -47 (24)-T-S-----------S- -48 (24)-T-S-----------S- -49 (24)-T-S-----------S- SHIELD GND -50 (24)-T-S-----------S- -51 (24)-T-S-----------S- -52 (24)-T-S-----------S- SHIELD GND

115J1-9 115J1-10 115J1-11 SHIELD GND 115J1-12, C115J1-12 115J1-13, C115J1-13 115J1-14, C115J1-14 SHIELD GND 115J1-15, C115J1-15 115J1-16, C115J1-16 115J1-17, C115J1-17 SHIELD GND

(O) (O) (O)

#3 SET KNOB 2 ALT #3 SET KNOB COMMON #3 SET KNOB 1

(O) (O) (O)

-53 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 115J1-18, C115J1-18 #4 SET KNOB 2 SPD -54 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 115J1-19, C115J1-19 #4 SET KNOB COMMON 11J1-55 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 115J1-20, C115J1-20 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND #4 SET KNOB 1

22-05-14

Page 3-50 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

FLIGHT GUIDANCE CONTROLLER (cont) GC-550 IO BP (O) (O) (O) Function Connector Pin Connects To C115J1-9 C115J1-10 C115J1-11 SHIELD GND

#5 SET KNOB 1 11J1-56 (24)-T-S-----------S-#5 SET KNOB 2 CRS 2 -57 (24)-T-S-----------S-#5 SET KNOB COMMON -58 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND SPARE SPARE SPARE CRS 1 PUSH TO SYNC HDG PUSH TO SYNC RESERVED

(O) (O)

-59 -60 -61 -62 (24)------------------ 115J1-70 -63 (24)------------------ 115J1-71, C115J1-71 -64 -65 (24)------------------ 115J1-68, C115J1-68 -66 (24)------------------ C115J1-70 -67 -68 -69 -70 -71 -72 -73 -74 -75 -76 -77 -78 11J1-79

(O) (O)

SPD (IAS/MACH SEL) CRS 2 PUSH TO SYNC SPARE SPARE

22-05-14

Page 3-51 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

AILERON SERVO SM-200 IO BP (I) (I) (P) (O) (O) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To

MOTOR INPUT + 12J1-A (18)-T-S------------S-- 190J2B-101 (CCW DRUM ROTATION) -B (18)-T-S------------S-- 190J2B-102 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND SERVO POWER GND POSITION SYNCHRO EXC 26 VAC, 400 HZ H C -C

(O) (O)

-D -E -F (22)------------------CLUTCH EXCITATION -G -H -J (22) GND TACH SHIELD -K TACHOMETER OUTPUT + -L (24)-T-S------------S-(CCW DRUM ROTATION) -N (24)-T-S------------S-SHIELD GND POSITION SYNCHRO OUTPUT X -P Y -R Z -S

190J2B-88,115J1-27

190J2B-99 190J2B-100 SHIELD GND

(O)

SPARES

-M -T -U 12J1-V

22-05-14

Page 3-52 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ELEVATOR SERVO SM-200 IO BP (I) (I) (P) (O) (O) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To

MOTOR INPUT + 13J1-A (18)-T-S------------S-- 190J2B-105 (CCW DRUM ROTATION) -B (18)-T-S------------S-- 190J2B-106 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND SERVO POWER GND POSITION SYNCHRO EXC 26 VAC, 400 HZ H C -C

(O) (O)

-D -E -F (22)------------------CLUTCH EXCITATION -G -H -J (22) GND TACH SHIELD -K TACHOMETER OUTPUT + -L (24)-T-S------------S-(CCW DRUM ROTATION) -N (24)-T-S------------S-SHIELD GND POSITION SYNCHRO OUTPUT X -P Y -R Z -S -M -T -U 13J1-V

190J2B-89,HSCU

190J2B-103 190J2B-104 SHIELD GND

(O)

SPARES

22-05-14

Page 3-53 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

RUDDER SERVO SM-200 IO BP (I) (I) (P) (O) (O) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To

MOTOR INPUT + 14J1-A (18)-T-S------------S-- 190J2B-98 (CCW DRUM ROTATION) -B (18)-T-S------------S-- 190J2B-97 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND SERVO POWER GND POSITION SYNCHRO EXC 26 VAC, 400 HZ CLUTCH EXCITATION H C -C -D -E 190J2B-87

(O) (O)

-F (22)-------------------G -H -J (22) GND TACH SHIELD -K TACHOMETER OUTPUT + -L (24)-T-S------------S-(CCW DRUM ROTATION) -N (24)-T-S------------S-SHIELD GND POSITION SYNCHRO OUTPUT X -P Y -R Z -S

190J2B-96 190J2B-95 SHIELD GND

(O)

SPARES

-M -T -U 14J1-V

22-05-14

Page 3-54 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

RADIO ALTIMETER NO. 1 RT-300 IO BP Function SPARE SPARE SPARE TEST INHIBIT OUTPUT TEST TRACK INVALID SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE TRIP NO. 4 (200 FT) Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (O)

(O) (P) (O)

(I) (O) (I) (O) (O) (O)

20J1-A -B -C -D -E -F -G -H -J -K -L (24)------------- +/- 15 V DC COMMON -M OUTPUT COMMON -N (24)---T-S-------S- ALT TRIP COMMON -P (24)---------------TRIP NO. 3 (50 FT) -R SPARE -S TEST* -T (24)---------------TRIP NO. 1 (1200 FT) -U TRIP NO. 2 (1500 FT) -V (24)--------------- ALT OUTPUT (EH) -W (24)-----T-S-------S- SHIELD GND AUX OUTPUT (H)

STALL PROTECTION COMPUTER 190J2A-50, C190J2A-50, 193RMP-2J, 93RBP-3B DC GND FIG. 6-3 AURAL WARNING SYSTEM 190J2A-51, C190J2A-51 SHIELD GND

(O) (O)

(P) (P) (O) (I)

-X (24)----T-S--------S-- 193RMP-2H, 193RBP-3A RAD. ALT VALID (28 V/OPEN) -Y (24)------------------ 190J2A-49, C190J2A-49, 193RMP-2K 193RBP-3C +15 V DC -Z -15 V DC -a POWER GND -b (22)------------------ DC GND +28 V DC 20J1-c (22)------------------ FIG. 6-1 TRANSMIT 20J2 * ------ --------- 21J1 COAX TO TRANSMIT ------ ANTENNA RECEIVE 20J3 * ------ --------- 22J1 COAX TO TRANSMIT ------ ANTENNA

22-05-14

Page 3-55 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ANTENNA AND RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER UNIT WU-650 IO BP (P) (P) (I) (I) Function 28 V DC POWER POWER GROUND H #2 CONTROL BUS L H #1 CONTROL BUS L Connector Pin 59J1-A -B -X -W -a -b (20)------------------(20)------------------(20)------------------(20)------------------Connects To FIG. 6-1 FIG. 6-1 DC GND DC GND

-c (24)-T-S------------S-- 61J1-A -d (24)-T-S------------S-- 61J1-B SHIELD GND 61J1-M -p -U -T -C -V -K -L (24) (24)------------------- 61J1-R (24)------------------- SIG GND, 59J1-R (24)-T-S------------S-(24)-T-S------------S- 1J1B-K12 1J1B-K13 (FIG. 6-10) SHIELD GND

(I) (I) (I) (I)

CONTROL BUS SHIELD REMOTE ON GND FOR 429 STABILIZATION TRANSMIT ON STABILIZATION INPUT (ARINC 429) H L

SHIELD GND (I) (I) (I)

(I) (I) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B)

-E GND FOR INVERTED MOUNT -S REACT COMPENSATION OVERRIDE -R (24)------------------GND FOR 200 MV/DEG -P -J -F -Y -M -N 10V -H STABILIZATION 400 HZ 26V -Z REF INPUT 115V -D COM -G H -m (24)-T-S------------S-LEFT EFIS CONTROL BUS L -n (24)-T-S------------S-SHIELD GND CENTER CONTROL BUS H L

SIG GND, 59J1-T

190J2A-17 190J2A-18 SHIELD GND

-t -r H -e (24)-T-S------------S-- C190J2A-17 RIGHT EFIS CONTROL BUS L -f (24)-T-S------------S-- C190J2A-18 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND 59J1-q (24)

22-05-14

Page 3-56 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ANTENNA AND RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER UNIT (cont) WU-650 IO BP (B) LEFT EFIS PICTURE (B) Function H Connector Pin 59J1-g (24)-T-S-------------S- L -h (24)-T-S-------------S- SHIELD GND H L Connects To 130J1-77, 131J1-77 FIG. 130J1-64, 786-5 131J1-78 SHIELD GND

(B) (B) (B) (B)

-i -j H -k (24)-T-S------------S-RIGHT EFIS PICTURE BUS L 59J1-s (24)-T-S------------S- SHIELD GND CENTER PICTURE BUS

C130J1-77, C131J1-77 FIG. C130J1-64, 78 6-6 C131J1-78 SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-57 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS WEATHER RADAR CONTROLLER WC-650 IO BP (B) (B) (P) (P) (I) (P) (P) (I) Function SERIAL CONTROL (HI) SERIAL CONTROL (LO) Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (O)

61J1-A (24)----T-S--------S-- 59J1-c -B (24)----T-S--------S-- 59J1-d SHIELD GND SPARE -C 28 V DC INPUT -D (22)----------------- FIG. 6-1 28 V DC GND -E (22)----------------- DC PWR GND CHASSIS GND -F (22)----------------- CHASSIS GND EDGE LIGHTING 28 V DC (+) -G EDGE LIGHTING 5 V AC/DC (+) -H (24)----------------- FIG. 6-7 EDGE LIGHTING RETURN -J (24)----------------- LIGHTING GND ANNUNCIATOR DIMMING -K (24)----------------- DAY NIGHT LOGIC SPARE -L CONTROL BUS SHIELD GND -M (24)----- SPARE -N FSB1 -P (24)------------------ FIG. 6-2 REMOTE ON -R (24)------------------ 59J1-U FSB2 OFF IN OFF OUT -S -T 61J1-U

22-05-14

Page 3-58 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DISPLAY CONTROLLER NO. 1 DC-550 IO BP (I) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function SIGNAL GND LGHTG 28 V (H) LGHTG 5 V (H) LGHTG COM +28 V DC POWER DC POWER GND #8 PUSH BUTN (DU #9 PUSH BUTN (DU #1 SET KNOB 1 #1 SET KNOB 2 #1 SET KNOB COM #2 SET KNOB 1 #2 SET KNOB 2 #2 SET KNOB COM #3 SET KNOB 1 #3 SET KNOB 2 #3 SET KNOB COM #4 SET KNOB 1 #4 SET KNOB 2 #4 SET KNOB COM #5 SET KNOB 1 #5 SET KNOB 2 #5 SET KNOB COM #6 SET KNOB 1 #6 SET KNOB 2 #6 SET KNOB COM Connector Pin 115J1-1 (22)------------------2 -3 (22)------------------4 (22)------------------5 (22)------------------6 (22)-----------------2 BZ PB1) -7 (24)-----------------2 BZ PB2) -8 (24)----------------- -9 (24)--T-S----------S- CRS 1 -10 (24)-T-S----------S- -11 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND -12 (24)-T-S----------S--13 (24)-T-S----------S--14 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND HDG -15 (24)-T-S----------S--16 (24)-T-S----------S--17 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND ALT -18 (24)-T-S----------S--19 (24)-T-S----------S--20 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND SPD -21 (24)-T-S----------S--22 (24)-T-S----------S--23 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND MFD -24 (24)-T-S----------S--25 (24)-T-S----------S--26 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND EICAS -27 (22)----------------115J1-28 Connects To SIGNAL GND FIG. 6-7 DC GND FIG. 6-1 DC PWR GND 131J1-46 131J1-47 11J1-44 11J1-45 11J1-46 SHIELD GND 11J1-47,C115J1-12 11J1-48,C115J1-13 11J1-49,C115J1-14 SHIELD GND 11J1-50,C115J1-15 11J1-51,C115J1-16 11J1-52,C115J1-17 SHIELD GND 11J1-53,C115J1-18 11J1-54,C115J1-19 11J1-55,C115J1-20 SHIELD GND 131J1-21 131J1-25 131J1-63 SHIELD GND 132J1-21,C115J1-24 132J1-25,C115J1-25 132J1-63,C115J1-26 SHIELD GND 190J2B-88, 12J1-F

28V AUTOPILOT CLUTCH SPARE

22-05-14

Page 3-59 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DISPLAY CONTROLLER NO. 1 (cont) DC-550 IO BP (O) (O) (I) (I) (B) (B) (B) (B) Function Connector Pin Connects To FIG. 6-15 FIG. 6-15 FIG. 6-17 FIG. 6-16 190J2A-15 190J2A-16 SHIELD GND

AUTOPILOT OFF LIGHT 115J1-29 (22)----------------AUTOPILOT OFF HORN -30 (22)----------------SPARE -31 TCS -32 (24)----------------28V AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT -33 (24)----------------DC/SG BUS (H) -34 (24)-T-S----------S-DC/SG BUS (L) -35 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND DC/MG BUS (H) -36 DC/MG BUS (L) -37 PFD DIM (H) -38 PFD DIM (L) -39 MFD DIM (H) MFD DIM (L) -40 -41

(I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

LIGHT + HORN DISABLE -42 (22)----------------MOMENTARY LIGHT DISABLE -43 (22)----------------MOMENTARY HORN DISABLE -44 (22)----------------CHASSIS GND -45 (22)----------------LAMP TEST GND -46 #10 PUSH BUTTN (DU 2 BZ PB3)-47 (24)----------------#11 PUSH BUTTN (DU 2 BZ PB4)-48 (24)----------------#12 PUSH BUTTN (DU 2 BZ PB5)-49 (24)----------------PFD DIM (H) -50 PFD DIM (W) -51 PFD DIM (L) -52 DH SET DH SET DH SET (H) (W) (L) -53 (24)-T-S----------S--54 (24)-T-S----------S--55 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND (DU 2 BZ PB6)-56 (24)-----------------57 -58 -59 RESET BUTTON -60 (24)----------------RESET BUTTON -61 (24)-----------------62 -63 -64 -65 (IN/HPA) -66 (24)----------------115J1-67

190J2B-79,115J1-43 190J2B-79,115J1-42 190J2B-77 CHASSIS GND 131J1-50 131J1-51 131J1-60

(O) (O) (O) (I)

(I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

#13 PUSH BUTTN #14 PUSH BUTTN #15 PUSH BUTTN ADI ON GND MASTER CAUTION MASTER WARNING #18 PUSH BUTTN HSI ON GND #19 PUSH BUTTN #20 PUSH BUTTN #21 PUSH BUTTN WX ON GND

190J2A-12 190J2A-13 190J2A-10 SHIELD GND 131J1-62

FIG. 6-33 FIG. 6-33

130J1-47

22-05-14

Page 3-60 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DISPLAY CONTROLLER NO. 1 (cont) DC-550 IO BP (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To 11J1-65, C115J1-68 11J1-62 11J1-63,C115J1-71 FIG. 6-9 FIG. 6-10 FIG. 6-11

#22 PUSH BUTTN (SPD 115J1-68 (24)----------------IAS/MACH SEL) #23 PUSH BUTTN (RESERVED) -69 #24 PUSH BUTTN -70 (PUSH SYNC CRS 1) #25 PUSH BUTTN -71 (PUSH SYNC HDG) #1 SWITCH (DU #4 PFD SELECT)-72 #2 SWITCH (AHRS REVERSION) -73 #3 SWITCH (MADC REVERSION) -74 #4 SWITCH (DAU CH A -75 REVERSION) #5 SWITCH (DAU CH B -76 REVERSION) #6 SWITCH (DU #2 PFD SELECT)-77 #7 SWITCH (DU #2 EICAS -78 SELECT) #8 SWITCH (DU #4 115J11-79 EICAS SEL) (24)----------------(24)----------------(24)----------------(24)----------------(24)-----------------

(24)----------------- FIG. 6-12 (24)----------------- (24)----------------- (24)----------------- FIG. 6-9 (24)-----------------

22-05-14

Page 3-61 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

TURN KNOB/PITCH WHEEL CONTROLLER PC-400 IO BP (I) (O) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (P) (P) (O) (O) (P) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) (O) (O) Function Connector Pin Connects To 190J2B-60 190J2B-73 190J2B-59, 11J1-21 SHIELD GND

TURN KNOB -15V INPUT 129J1-A (24)-T-S-----------S-TURN KNOB SIGNAL -B (24)-T-S-----------S-TURN KNOB +15V INPUT -C (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND TURN KNOB SPARE TURN KNOB TURN KNOB TURN KNOB SIGNAL GND SWITCH (COM) IN DETENT NOT IN DETENT -D -E -F -G -H

(22)------------------ SIGNAL GND (24)------------------ +28 VOLT SERVO POWER (24)------------------ 190J2B-75, C190J2B-75

0 - 28 V EDGE LIGHTING -J ANNUNC POWER GND -K RESERVED -L RESERVED -M 0 - 28 V ANN DIM INPUT GND -N RESERVED -P RESERVED -R RESERVED -S RESERVED -T PITCH WHEEL (+) -U (24)-T-S-----------S-- 190J2B-68 PITCH WHEEL (-) -V (24)-T-S-----------S-- 190J2B-69 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND RESERVED -W RESERVED -X SPARE -Y RESERVED -Z SPARE -a SPARE -b SPARE -c SPARE -d SPARE -e RESERVED -f 0 - 5 V EDGE LIGHTING -g RESERVED -h RESERVED -i CHASSIS GND -j RESERVED -k 0 - 28 V ANN DIMMING INPUT -m EDGE LIGHTING LOW -n SPARE -p RESERVED -q RESERVED -r SPARE -s SPARE 129J1-t

(I) (P) (I) (I) (P) (I) (P) (P)

(24)-----------------(24)-----------------(24)------------------

FIG 6-7 CHASSIS GND LIGHTING GND

22-05-14

Page 3-62 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS PFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 1 DU-870 IO BP (I) BRIGHTNESS POT (I) Function Connector Pin (H)130J1-1 (24)-T-S-----------S-- (W) -14 (24)-T-S-----------S-- (L) -13 (24)-T-S-----------S-- NC -2 -15 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -16 -17 -18 (H) -19 (L) -20 (A) -21 (24)------------------22 (24)-----------------(H) -23 (22)------------------24 (22)-----------------(B) -25 (24)-----------------(H) -26 (L) -27 (H) -28 (24)-T-S-----------S-(L) -41 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND (H) -29 (24)-T-S-----------S-(L) -42 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND -30 -31 130J1-32 (H) (W) (L) Connects To AIRCRAFT DIMMING CONTROL SHIELD GND

WX DIMMING RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SPARE RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED BUS 3 (O) (I) (P) (P) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) SET KNOB (BARO) DU PWR DN* 5 V LIGHTING LIGHTING COMMON SET KNOB (BARO) REMOTE LT SENSOR REMOTE LT SENSOR DLS OUT

9J1-74 FIG. 6-9 FIG. 6-7 LIGHTING COMMON 9J1-75 131J1-29 131J1-42 SHIELD GND 131J1-28 131J1-41 SHIELD GND

ALS

(B) (B)

RESERVED HDLC OUT + HDLC OUT -

22-05-14

Page 3-63 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS PFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DU-870 IO BP Function BUS 3 TERM RESERVED BUS 2 (L) (H) (L) Connector Pin 130J1-33 -34 -35 (24)-T-S-----------S--36 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND Connects To

(I) (B) (O) (B) (B)

FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND

DU VALID (GND/OPEN) -37 BUS 1 (H) -38 (24)-T-S----------S-(L) -39 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND REMOTE LT SENSOR GND REMOTE LT SENSOR RESERVED RESERVED BUS 4 TRM (L) PB (STD) PB (IN/HPA) RESERVED BUS 2 TERM (L) PB PB BUS 1 TERM (L) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED BUS 4 (H) BUS 4 (L) PB WX BUS 2 TERM DH (H) DH (COM) WX BUS 1 TERM WX BUS 1 (H) -40 -53 PWR -54 -43 -44 -45 -46 (24)-----------------47 (24)-----------------48 -49 -50 -51 -52 -55 -56 -57 -58 -59 -60 (L) -61 -62 -63 (24)----------------(L) -64 (24)-T-S----------S--77 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND (H) (L)

(O)

9J1-71 115J1-66

(O)

(B) (B)

SIGNAL GND FIG. 6-5 SHIELD GND

(B) (B)

DU OVERTEMP (GND/OPEN) -65 DU WRAPAROUND (H) -66 (24)-T-S----------S-(ARINC 429) DU WRAPAROUND (L) 130J1-79 (24)-T-S----------S-(ARINC 429) SHIELD GND

FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-64 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS PFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DU-870 IO BP Function DH (L) RESERVED WX BUS 3 (H) WX BUS 3 (L) RESERVED SPARE SPARE WX BUS 2 (H) WX BUS 2 (L) SPARE WX BUS 1 (L) SIGNAL GROUND RESERVED RESERVED WX BUS 3 TERM RESERVED SPARE SPARE PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 I.D. #3 I.D. #2 I.D. #1 RESERVED CHASSIS GND RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SOFTWARE ENABLE* SOFTWARE ENABLE* 28 V DC 28 V DC 28 V DC 28 V DC RTN 28 V DC RTN 28 V DC RTN Connector Pin Connects To

(I)

(I)

(P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P)

130J1-67 -68 -69 -70 -71 -72 -73 -74 -75 -76 -78 (24)----------------- FIG. 6-5 -80 (24)----------------- SIGNAL GND -81 -82 (L) -83 -84 -85 -86 -87 (24)----------------- FIG.6-9 -88 -89 -90 -91 -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 -100 -101 (22)----------------- -102 (22)----------------- FIG. 6-1 -103 (22)----------------- -104 (22)----------------- -105 (22)----------------- A/C 28 V DC 130J1-106 (22)----------------- PWR RETURN

* FLIGHT TEST ONLY

22-05-14

Page 3-65 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS MFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 2 DU-870 IO BP (I) BRIGHTNESS POT (I) Function (H) (W) (L) (H) (W) (L) Connector Pin 131J1-1 (24)-T-S-----------S-- -14 (24)-T-S-----------S -13 (24)-T-S-----------S-- NC -2 -15 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -16 -17 -18 -19 -20 -21 -22 -23 -24 -25 -26 Connects To AIRCRAFT DIMMING CONTROL SHIELD GND

WX DIMMING RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SPARE RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED (O) (P) (P) (O)

(H) (L) SET KNOB #5(MFD) (H) DU PWR DN* 5 V LIGHTING (H) LIGHTING COMMON SET KNOB #5 (MFD) (L) REMOTE LT SENSOR (H) BUS 3 REMOTE LT SENSOR (H) DLS OUT (L) (H) (L) (L)

(24)----------------(22)----------------(22)----------------(24)-----------------

115J1-21 FIG. 6-7 LIGHTING COMMON 115J1-22

(O) (O) (I) (I)

-27 -28 (24)-T-S-----------S--41 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND -29 (24)-T-S-----------S--42 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND -30 -31 (24)--T-S---------S-131J1-32 (24)--T-S---------S-SHIELD GND

130J1-29 130J1-42 SHIELD GND 130J1-28 130J1-41 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND

ALS

(B) (B)

RESERVED HDLC OUT + HDLC OUT -

22-05-14

Page 3-66 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS MFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DU-870 IO BP Function BUS 3 TERM RESERVED (B) (B) BUS 2 BUS 2 (L) (H) (L) Connector Pin 131J1-33 -34 -35 (24)-T-S----------S--36 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND -37 FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND Connects To

DU VALID (GND/OPEN) (B) (B) BUS 1 BUS 1 (H) (L)

-38 (24)-T-S---------S--39 (24)-T-S---------S-SHIELD GND (H) (L)

REMOTE LT SENSOR GND REMOTE LT SENSOR PWR

(O) (O) (O) (O)

(O) (O)

-40 -53 -54 RESERVED -43 RESERVED -44 BUS 4 TRM (L) -45 PB (BEZEL BUTTON 1) -46 PB (BEZEL BUTTON 2) -47 RESERVED -48 BUS 2 TERM (L) -49 PB (BEZEL BUTTON 3) -50 PB (BEZEL BUTTON 4) -51 BUS 1 TERM (L) -52 RESERVED -55 RESERVED -56 RESERVED -57 BUS 4 (H) -58 BUS 4 (L) -59 PB (BEZEL BUTTON 5) -60 WX BUS 2 TERM (L) -61 PB -62 MFD BEZEL/SET KNOB #5 COMMON-63 WX BUS 1 TERM (L) -64 DU OVERTEMP (GND/OPEN) -65 DU WRAPAROUND (H) -66 (ARINC 429) DU WRAPAROUND (L) -79 (ARINC 429) RESERVED -67 RESERVED -68 WX BUS 3 (H) 131J1-69

(24)---------------(24)---------------(24)---------------(24)----------------

115J1-7 115J1-8 115J1-47 115J1-48

(24)---------------(24)---------------(24)----------------

115J1-49 115J1-56 115J1-23

22-05-14

Page 3-67 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS MFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DU-870 IO BP Function WX BUS 3 RESERVED SPARE SPARE WX BUS 2 WX BUS 2 SPARE WX BUS LEFT WX BUS LEFT (L) Connector Pin Connects To

(H) (L) (H) (L)

(B) (B) (I)

131J1-70 -71 -72 -73 -74 -75 -76 -77 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. -78 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-5 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -80 (24)------------------81 -82 (L) -83 -84 -85 -86 -87 (24)------------------88 -89 -90 (24)------------------91 -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 -100 -101 (22)---------------- -102 (22)---------------- -103 (22)---------------- -104 (22)---------------- -105 (22)---------------- 131J1-106 (22)---------------- SIGNAL GND

(O) (I) (I)

(P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P)

SIGNAL GROUND RESERVED RESERVED WX BUS 3 TERM PB (BEZEL BUTTON 6) SPARE SPARE PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 I.D. #3 I.D. #2 I.D. #1 RESERVED CHASSIS GND RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SOFTWARE ENABLE* SOFTWARE ENABLE* 28 V DC 28 V DC 28 V DC 28 V DC RTN 28 V DC RTN 28 V DC RTN

FIG. 6-9 FIG. 6-9

FIG. 6-1 A/C 28 V DC PWR RETURN

*FLIGHT TEST ONLY

22-05-14

Page 3-68 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

EICAS DISPLAY UNIT NO. 3 DU-870 IO BP (I) BRIGHTNESS POT (I) WX DIMMING RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SPARE RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED BUS 3 (O) (O) (O) (I) (P) (P) SET KNOB (CAS) SET KNOB (CAS) BEZEL COMMON Function (H) (W) (L) Connector Pin Connects To

132J1-1 (22)-T-S-----------S-- AIRCRAFT -14 (22)-T-S-----------S-- DIMMING -13 (22)-T-S-----------S-- CONTROL NC SHIELD GND (H) -2 (W) -15 (L) -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -16 -17 -18 (H) -19 (L) -20 (H) -21 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 115J1-24,C115J1-24 (L) -25 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 115J1-25,C115J1-25 -63 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 115J1-26,C115J1-26 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -22 (24)------------------23 (22)------------------24 (22)------------------25 -26 -27 -28 -41 -29 -42 -30 -31 (24)-T-S-----------S-132J1-32 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-9 FIG. 6-7 LIGHTING COMMON

DU PWR DN* 5 V LIGHTING (H) 5 V LIGHTING COMMON SET KNOB (CAS) (L) REMOTE LT SENSOR (H) REMOTE LT SENSOR (L) (H) DLS OUT (L) ALS RESERVED HDLC OUT + HDLC OUT (H) (L)

(B) (B)

22-05-14

Page 3-69 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

EICAS DISPLAY UNIT NO. 3 (cont) DU-870 IO BP Function BUS 3 TERM RESERVED (B) (B) BUS 2 (L) (H) (L) Connector Pin 132J1-33 -34 -35 (24)-T-S-----------S--36 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND Connects To

(B) (B)

DU VALID (GND/OPEN) -37 BUS 1 (H) -38 (24)-T-S-----------S-(L) -39 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND REMOTE LT SENSOR GND REMOTE LT SENSOR PWR -40 (H) -53 (L) -54 RESERVED -43 RESERVED -44 BUS 4 TRM (L) -45 PB 1 -46 PB 2 -47 RESERVED -48 BUS 2 TERM (L) -49 PB 3 -50 PB 4 -51 BUS 1 TERM (L) -52 RESERVED -55 RESERVED -56 RESERVED -57 BUS 4 (H) -58 BUS 4 (L) -59 PB 5 -60 WX BUS 2 TERM (L) -61 PB (MENU) -62 BEZEL COMMON -63 WX BUS 1 TERM (L) -64 DU OVERTEMP (GND/OPEN) -65 DU WRAPAROUND (H) -66 (ARINC 429) DU WRAPAROUND (L) 132J1-79

22-05-14

Page 3-70 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

EICAS DISPLAY UNIT NO. 3 (cont) DU-870 IO BP Function RESERVED RESERVED WX BUS 3 (H) WX BUS 3 (L) RESERVED SPARE SPARE WX BUS 2 (H) WX BUS 2 (L) SPARE WX BUS 1 (H) WX BUS 1 (L) SIGNAL GROUND RESERVED RESERVED WX BUS 3 TERM PB 6 SPARE SPARE PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 I.D. #3 I.D. #2 I.D. #1 RESERVED CHASSIS GND RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SOFTWARE ENABLE* SOFTWARE ENABLE* 28 V DC 28 V DC 28 V DC 28 V DC RTN 28 V DC RTN 28 V DC RTN Connector Pin Connects To

(I)

(I)

(I)

132J1-67 -68 -69 -70 -71 -72 -73 -74 -75 -76 -77 -78 -80 (24)----------------- SIGNAL GROUND -81 -82 (L) -83 -84 -85 -86 -87 (24)----------------- FIG. 6-9 -88 -89 -90 -91 (24)----------------- FIG. 6-9 -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 -100 -101 (22)----------------- -102 (22)----------------- FIG. 6-1 -103 (22)----------------- -104 (22)----------------- -105 (22)----------------- A/C 28 V DC 132J1-106 (22)----------------- PWR RETURN

(P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P)

*FLIGHT TEST ONLY

22-05-14

Page 3-71 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 DA-800 Function PACK VALVE 1 POS OUTBD BRAKE INOP INBD BRAKE INOP FUEL XFEED SW BATT CNTOR 1 ESS BUS CNTOR 1 GEN LINE CNTOR 1 GEN LINE CNTOR 3 APU LINE CNTOR APU STARTER CNTOR ENG 1 A/ICE SW ENG1 FIRE DET FAIL APU FIRE DET FAIL FLAP FAIL 1 GND SPOILER CMD GND SPLR ENG INPT FUEL LO LEVEL 1 2C POWER CNTOR ON 1C POWER CNTOR ON PITOT 1 INOP PITOT 3 INOP SPLR WHEELS A/G TAT 1 INOP W/S 1 OVERHEAT W/S 1 INOP L UPLOCK SNSR A L UPLOCK SNSR B L DOWNLOCK SNSR A L DOWNLOCK SNSR B AUTOPRESN CONTROL SPS 1 OFF STEERING FAIL DUCT OVERTEMP 1 PACK OVERTEMP 1 PACK OVERPRESS 1 L FLIGHT IDLE LCK AURAL WARN FAIL GEAR LEVER DOWN SPBK LEVER POS GEAR DOWN LOCKED VHF COM 1 PTT EMERG EXIT 1 SW DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN Connector Pin 136J1A-1 (24)----------------2 (24)----------------3 (24)----------------4 (24)----------------5 (24)----------------6 (24)----------------7 (24)----------------8 (24)----------------9 (24)----------------10 (24)---------------11 (24)---------------12 (24)---------------13 (24)---------------14 (24)---------------15 (24)---------------16 (24)---------------17 (24)---------------18 (24)---------------19 (24)---------------20 (24)---------------21 (24)---------------22 (24)---------------23 (24)---------------24 (24)---------------25 (24)---------------26 (24)---------------27 (24)---------------28 (24)---------------29 (24)---------------30 (24)---------------31 (24)---------------32 (24)---------------33 (24)---------------34 (24)---------------35 (24)---------------36 (24)---------------37 (24)---------------38 (24)---------------39 (24)---------------40 (24)---------------41 (24)--------------136J1A-42 (24)--------------Connects To PACK VLV POS SW 1 BRAKE CONTROL UNIT BRAKE CONTROL UNIT FUEL CNTRL PANEL BATTERY CONTACTOR 1 ESS BUS CONTACTOR 1 GEN LINE CONTACTOR 1 GEN LINE CONTACTOR 3 APU LINE CONTACTOR APU STARTER CNTOR A/ICE CNTRL PANEL ENG 1 FIRE CNTRL MOD APU FIRE CNTRL MOD FLAP ELEC CNTRL UNIT SPOILER CNTRL RELAYS SPOILER CNTRL RELAYS SIGNAL COND UNIT FUEL CONTROL PANEL FUEL CONTROL PANEL PITOT 1 CURRENT SNSR PITOT 3 CURRENT SNSR SPOILER CNTRL RELAYS TAT 1 CURRENT SNSR W/S TEMP CONTROLLER W/S TEMP CONTROLLER LG ELECTRONICS UNIT LG ELECTRONICS UNIT LG ELECTRONICS UNIT LG ELECTRONICS UNIT DIGITAL PRESS CNTRLR SWS CONTROL PANEL STRG ELEC CNTRL UNIT DUCT OVTP SW 1 PACK OVTP SW 1 PACK 1 OVR PRESS SW FLT IDLE LOCK SOLEN AURAL WARN COMPUTER LG CONTROL LEVER SPBK LEVER SW LG ELECTRONIC UNIT FIG. 6-27 EMERG EXIT DOOR 1 SW

22-05-14

Page 3-72 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function SPOILER LEFT OB ENG 1 A/I LO PRESS WING 1 A/I LO PRESS WING 1 A/I OVRPRESS REV/WOWS/DISAGREE SPARE GND/OPN SPARE GND/OPN PACK VALVE 1 CMD DC BUS 1 OFF ESS DC BUS 1 OFF SHED DC BUS 1 OFF ENG 1 FIRE EXTG BTL A PWR 1 EXTG BTL A PWR 2 EXTG BTL APU PWR 1A POWER CNTOR ON HS VALVE 1 CMD LDG GEAR MONITOR HYD 1 PUMP SELECT HYD 2 PUMP SELECT SPARE 28V/OPN SPARE 28V/OPN AUTOPRESN TEST HF COM PTT IDENT #1 CH. A IDENT #2 CH. A IDENT #3 CH. A BRK 1 PRESSURE { { DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN Connector Pin Connects To

136J1A-43 (24)-------------- SPLR PROX SW LEFT OB -44 (24)-------------- ENG 1 LOW PRESS SW -45 (24)-------------- WING 1 LOW PRESS SW -46 (24)-------------- WING 1 OVERPRESS SW -47 (24)-------------- COCKPIT RELAY -48 -49 -50 (24)--------------- PACK VALVE RELAY 1 -51 (24)--------------- RELAY BOX DC BUS 1 -52 (24)--------------- RELAY BOX ESS BUS 1 -53 (24)--------------- RELAY BOX SHED BUS 1 -54 (24)--------------- ENG 1 FIRE CNTRL MOD -55 (24)--------------- FIRE HANDLE -56 (24)--------------- FIRE HANDLE -57 (24)--------------- FIRE SWITCH APU -58 (24)--------------- FUEL SYS CONTACTOR -59 (24)--------------- HS VALVE 1 CMD SW -60 (24)--------------- LG ELECTRONIC UNIT -61 (24)--------------- HYD PUMP 1 SW -62 (24)--------------- HYD PUMP 2 SW -63 -64 -65 (24)--------------- DIGITAL PRESS CNTRLR -66 (24)--------------- HF COM XCVR PTT -67 -------------------} NC -68 -------------------} NC -69 (24)---------------} GND (H) -70 (24)-T-S-------S--- BRAKE CONTROL (L) -71 (24)-T-S-------S--- UNIT SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

115 VAC BUS OFF

-72 -73 -74 { (H) -75 (24)-T-S-------S--- 115 VAC { (L) 136J1A-76 (24)-T-S-------S--- BUS SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-73 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function RESERVED RESERVED BRAKE 1 TEMP Connector Pin Connects To

136J1A-77 -78 -79 { (H) -80 (24)-T-S----------S---- BRAKE TEMP { (L) -81 (24)-T-S----------S---- XMITTER NO. 1 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND -82 -83 (24)-T-S----------S---- BRAKE TEMP -84 (24)-T-S----------S---- XMITTER NO. 2 SHIELD GND -85 -86 (24)-T-S----------S---- BRAKE TEMP -87 (24)-T-S----------S---- XMITTER NO. 3 SHIELD GND -88 -89 (24)-T-S----------S---- BRAKE TEMP -90 (24)-T-S----------S---- XMITTER NO. 4 SHIELD GND -91 -92 (24)-T-S----------S---- OXYGEN PRESSURE -93 (24)-T-S----------S---- TRANSDUCER SHIELD GND

BRAKE 2 TEMP

BRAKE 3 TEMP

{ (H) { (L) SHIELD GND

BRAKE 4 TEMP

{ (H) { (L) SHIELD GND

OXYGEN PRESS

{ (H) { (L) SHIELD GND

RESERVED RESERVED SIGNAL GROUND #1 CH. A SIGNAL GROUND #2 CH. A CHASSIS GROUND CH. A +28 +28 +28 +28 VDC VDC VDC VDC #1 CH. #2 CH. RTN #1 RTN #2 A A CH. A CH. A

-94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 (24)--------------- SIGNAL GROUND -100 (24)-------------- SIGNAL GROUND -101 (24)-------------- CHASSIS GROUND -102 -103 (22)--------------} -104 (22)--------------} FIG. -105 (22)--------------} 6-1A 136J1A-106 (22)--------------}

22-05-14

Page 3-74 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function RESERVED RESERVED ROLL TRIM POS Connector Pin 136J1B-1 -2 { (H) -3 (24)-T-S-----------S---{ (W) -4 (24)-T-S-----------S---{ (L) -5 (24)-T-S-----------S---SHIELD GND { { { { { { SIG (H) SIG (L) SHIELD GND EXC (H) EXC (L) SHIELD GND Connects To

ROLL TRIM ACTUATOR POT SHIELD GND

-6 (24)-T-S-----------S---- ENGINE NO. 1 -7 (24)-T-S-----------S---- OIL SHIELD GND -8 (24)-T-S-----------S---- TEMPERATURE -9 (24)-T-S-----------S---- A SENSOR SHIELD GND -10 (24)-T-S----------S----11 (24)-T-S----------S----12 (24)-T-S----------S--- -13 (24)-T-S----------S----14 (24)-T-S----------S----15 (24)-T-S----------S--- -16 (24)-T-S----------S----17 (24)-T-S----------S----18 (24)-T-S----------S--- CONTROL COLUMN POSITION SENSOR NO. 1 SHIELD GND CONTROL WHEEL POSITION SENSOR NO. 1 SHIELD GND CONTROL WHEEL POSITION SENSOR NO. 2 SHIELD GND

ENG 1 OIL TEMP A

CTL COL POS 1

{ (H) { (W) { (L) SHIELD GND { (H) { (W) { (L) SHIELD GND { (H) { (W) { (L) SHIELD GND { { { { { { SIG (H) SIG (L) SHIELD GND EXC (H) EXC (L) SHIELD GND

CTL WHEEL POS 1

CTL WHEEL POS 2

-19 (24)-T-S----------S---- ENGINE NO. 1 -20 (24)-T-S----------S---- FUEL SHIELD GND -21 (24)-T-S----------S---- TEMPERATURE -22 (24)-T-S----------S---- SENSOR SHIELD GND

ENG 1 FUEL TEMP

CKPT TEMP SENSOR

{ (H) { (L)

-23 -24 (24)-T-S----------S---- COCKPIT 136J1B-25 (24)-T-S----------S---- TEMP SENSOR SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-75 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function { { { COOLER 1 INLT TMP { { { { { { COOLER 1 OTLT TMP { { { Connector Pin Connects To

SIG (H) 136J1B-26 (24)-T-S----------S---- COOLER NO. 1 SIG (L) -27 (24)-T-S----------S---- ANTI-ICE SHIELD GND SHIELD GND EXC (H) EXC (L) SHIELD GND SIG (H) SIG (L) SHIELD GND EXC (H) EXC (L) SHIELD GND -28 (24)-T-S----------S---- INLET TEMP -29 (24)-T-S----------S---- SENSOR SHIELD GND -30 (24)-T-S----------S---- COOLER NO. 1 -31 (24)-T-S----------S---- ANTI-ICE SHIELD GND -32 (24)-T-S----------S---- OUTLET TEMP -33 (24)-T-S----------S---- SENSOR SHIELD GND -34 -35 -36 -37

APU RPM OUTPUT

{ (H) { (L) SHIELD GND (H) (L) SHIELD GND (H) (L) SHIELD GND (H) (L)

-38 (24)-T-S----------S---- APU ELEC -39 (24)-T-S----------S---- SIGNAL UNIT SHIELD GND -40 (24)-T-S----------S---- FIG. -41 (24)-T-S----------S---- 6-14 SHIELD GND -42 (24)-T-S----------S---- FIG. -43 (24)-T-S----------S---- 6-12 SHIELD GND

ARINC 429 OUT #1 A ARINC 429 OUT #1 A (To RMU 1 & 2) ARINC 429 IN #1 ARINC 429 IN #1 (From IC 1) ARINC 429 IN #2 ARINC 429 IN #2

-44 (24)-T-S----------S---- SHIPS CLOCK (H) 136J1B-45 (24)-T-S----------S---- SHIPS CLOCK (L) SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-76 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function ARINC 429 IN #3 ARINC 429 IN #3 ARINC 429 IN #4 ARINC 429 IN #4 ARINC 429 OUT #2 A ARINC 429 OUT #2 A (To IC 1 & 2) { { { { { { (H) (L) (H) (L) SHIELD GND (H) (L) SHIELD GND SIG (H) SIG (L) SHIELD GND 10V EXC (H) 10V EXC (L) SHIELD GND Connector Pin Connects To

136J1B-46 (24)-T-S----------S---- FADEC NO. 1 -47 (24)-T-S----------S---- CH. A SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -48 (24)-T-S----------S---- FUEL COMPUTER -49 (24)-T-S----------S---- CH. A SHIELD GND -50 (24)-T-S----------S---- FIG. -51 (24)-T-S----------S---- 6-12 SHIELD GND -52 (24)-T-S----------S---- ENGINE NO. 1 -53 (24)-T-S----------S---- OIL SHIELD GND -54 (24)-T-S----------S---- PRESSURE -55 (24)-T-S----------S---- SENSOR SHIELD GND -56 -57 -58 -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 -67 -68 (24)-T-S----------S---- FDR A717 IN (H) -69 (24)-T-S----------S---- FDR A717 IN (L) SHIELD GND -70 -71 (24)-T-S----------S----72 (24)-T-S----------S----73 (24)-T-S----------S--- ENGINE NO. 1 OIL LEVEL SENSOR SHIELD GND

ENG 1 OIL PRESS

RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED A717 FDR

FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR OUT

TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND

RESERVED FOR TEST ENG 1 OIL LEVEL { (H) { (W) { (L) SHIELD GND BATT 1 TEMP SNS 1 { (H) { (L)

-74 -75 (24)-T-S----------S---- BATT NO. 1 136J1B-76 (24)-T-S----------S---- TEMP SENSOR SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-77 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function ENG 1 FUEL FLOW Connector Pin { IMPELLOR 136J1B-77 (24)-T-S----------S---{ COMMON -78 (24)-T-S----------S---{ DRUM -79 (24)-T-S----------S---SHIELD GND { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND USED ON DAU 2 USED ON DAU 2 USED ON DAU 2 USED ON DAU 2 NORMAL ACCEL FDR { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND APU GEN VOLTAGE BATT 1 VOLTAGE GEN 1 CURRENT { (H) { (L) { (H) { (L) { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND RESERVED RESERVED RS-422 XMT CH. A RS-422 XMT CH. A RS-422 RCV CH. A RS-422 RCV CH. A Connects To ENGINE NO. 1 FUEL FLOW METER SHIELD GND

FLAP POSITION 1

-80 (24)-T-S----------S---- FLAP ELEC. -81 (24)-T-S----------S---- CNTRL UNIT SHIELD GND -82 -83 -84 -85 -86 (24)-T-S----------S---- NORMAL -87 (24)-T-S----------S---- ACCEL SENSOR SHIELD GND -88 (24)------------------- APU GENERATOR -89 (24)------------------- LINE -90 (24)-------------------- HOT BATT -91 (24)-------------------- BUS NO. 1 -92 (24)-T-S----------S---- GENERATOR NO. 1 -93 (24)-T-S----------S---- SHUNT SHIELD GND

-94 -95 -96 -97 (H) -98 (24)-T-S----------S---- 137J1B-100 (H) (L) -99 (24)-T-S----------S---- 137J1B-101 (L) SHIELD GND SHIELD GND (H) (L) -100 (24)-T-S---------S---- 137J1B-98 (H) 136J1B-101 (24)-T-S---------S---- 137J1B-99 (L) SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-78 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function GEN 3 CURRENT { (H) { (L) Connector Pin Connects To

136J1B-102 (24)-T-S---------S---- GENERATOR NO. 3 -103 (24)-T-S---------S---- SHUNT SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -104 (24)------------------} -105 (24)------------------}FIG. 6-34 136J1B-106 (24)------------------}

RS-232 XMT CH. A RS-232 RCV CH. A RS-232 COM CH. A

22-05-14

Page 3-79 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function ELEC BAY OVTEMP EMRG LTS NOT ARMD MAIN DOOR SW ELEC BAY DOOR SW ACCESS DOOR 1 SW GPU CNTOR ESS BUS CNTOR 2 GEN LINE CNTOR 2 GEN LINE CNTOR 4 BKUP RELAY ENERG BATT CNTOR 2 ENG2 FIRE DET FAIL SPBK LEVER CMD FUEL LO LEVEL 2 ACCESS DOOR 2 SW ENGLISH/METRIC PITOT 2 INOP SPBK DRIVE RELAYS W/S 2 OVERHEAT W/S 2 INOP ICE DETECTOR FAIL ICE CONDITION N UPLOCK SNSR A R UPLOCK SNSR A N UPLOCK SNSR B R UPLOCK SNSR B N DOWNLOCK SNSR A R DOWNLOCK SNSR A N DOWNLOCK SNSR B R DOWNLOCK SNSR B R FLIGHT IDLE LCK SPS 2 OFF PACK VALVE 2 POS DUCT OVERTEMP 2 PACK OVERTEMP 2 PACK OVERPRESS 2 VHF COM 2 PTT OUTB BRK DEGRADED INBD BRK DEGRADED EMERG EXIT 2 SW SPOILER RIGHT OB APU FUEL SOV COMM REV/WOW 2 DISAGREE A/ICE SYSTEM TEST DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN Connector Pin 136J2A-1 (24)----------------2 (24)----------------3 (24)----------------4 (24)----------------5 (24)----------------6 (24)----------------7 (24)----------------8 (24)----------------9 (24)----------------10 (24)---------------11 (24)---------------12 (24)---------------13 (24)---------------14 (24)---------------15 (24)---------------16 (24)---------------17 (24)---------------18 (24)---------------19 (24)---------------20 (24)---------------21 (24)---------------22 (24)---------------23 (24)---------------24 (24)---------------25 (24)---------------26 (24)---------------27 (24)---------------28 (24)---------------29 (24)---------------30 (24)---------------31 (24)---------------32 (24)---------------33 (24)---------------34 (24)---------------35 (24)---------------36 (24)---------------37 (24)---------------38 (24)---------------39 (24)---------------40 (24)---------------41 (24)---------------42 (24)---------------43 (24)--------------136J2A-44 (24)--------------Connects To ELEC BAY OVTP SW EMERG LTS PANEL SW MAIN DOOR SW MONITOR ELEC BAY DOOR SW CKPT ACCESS DOOR SW GPU AUX RELAY CNTCT ESS BUS CONTACTOR 1 GEN LINE CNTOR 2 GEN LINE CNTOR 4 BACKUP RELAY CONTACT BAT CONTACTOR 2 ENG 1 FIRE CNTRL MOD SPBRK LEVER SWITCH SIGNAL COND UNIT TAIL ACCESS DOOR SW DAU STRAP (OPN=ENG) PITOT 2 CURRENT SNSR SPOILER CNTRL RELAYS W/S TEMP CONTROLLER W/S TEMP CONTROLLER ICE DETECT SENSOR ICE DETECT SENSOR LG ELECTRONIC UNIT LG ELECTRONIC UNIT LG ELECTRONIC UNIT LG ELECTRONIC UNIT LG ELECTRONIC UNIT LG ELECTRONIC UNIT LG ELECTRONIC UNIT LG ELECTRONIC UNIT FLT IDLE LOCK SOLEN SPS 2 CNTRL PANEL PACK VLV POS SW 2 DUCT OVERTEMP SW 2 PACK OVERTEMP SW 2 PACK OVPRESS SW 2 FIG. 6-28 BRAKE CONTROL UNIT BRAKE CONTROL UNIT EMERG EXIT DOOR 2 SW SPLR PROX SW RT OB APU RELAY/SWITCH COCKPIT RELAY A/I TEST SW

22-05-14

Page 3-80 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function RESERVED - END ITEM SPARE GND/OPN SPARE GND/OPN SPARE GND/OPN SPARE GND/OPN PACK VALVE 2 CMD DC BUS 2 OFF ESS DC BUS 2 OFF SHED DC BUS 2 OFF EXTG BTL B PWR 1 EXTG BTL B PWR 2 OUTBD CARD ENERG INBD CARD ENERG CENTRAL BUS OFF 1B POWER CNTOR ON AGCU ALC CONTROL AGCU ASC POWER HS VALVE 2 CMD SPARE 28V/OPN SPARE 28V/OPN SPARE 28V/OPN SPARE 28V/OPN IDENT #1 CH. B IDENT #2 CH. B IDENT #3 CH. B { RUDDER PEDAL POS { { { { { { { { TEST DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN Connector Pin Connects To

136J2A-45 -46 -47 -48 -49 -50 (24)--------------- PACK VALVE RELAY 2 -51 (24)--------------- DC BUS 2 RELAY BOX -52 (24)--------------- ESS BUS 2 RELAY BOX -53 (24)--------------- SHED BUS 2 RELAY BOX -54 (24)--------------- FIRE HANDLE -55 (24)--------------- FIRE HANDLE -56 (24)--------------- BRAKE CONTROL UNIT -57 (24)--------------- BRAKE CONTROL UNIT -58 (24)--------------- DC BUS RELAY BOX -59 (24)--------------- FUEL CONTROL PANEL -60 (24)--------------- APU GCU (Pin H) -61 (24)--------------- APU GCU (Pin Z) -62 (24)--------------- HS VALVE 2 CMD SW -63 -64 -65 -66 -67 -------------------} NC -68 -------------------} NC -69 -------------------} GND (H) -70 (24)-T-S----------S---- RUDDER PEDAL (W) -71 (24)-T-S----------S---- POSITION (L) -72 (24)-T-S----------S---- SENSOR SHIELD GND SHIELD GND SIG (H) SIG (L) SHIELD GND EXC (H) EXC (L) SHIELD GND -73 (24)-T-S----------S---- FUEL -74 (24)-T-S----------S---- TANK SHIELD GND -75 (24)-T-S----------S---- TEMPERATURE -76 (24)-T-S----------S---- PROBE SHIELD GND

FUEL TANK TEMP

RESERVED RESERVED AIR/GROUND 1 USED ON DAU 2 USED ON DAU 2 DIN

-77 -78 -79 -80 (24)--------------- LANDING GEAR SYS -81 136J2A-82

22-05-14

Page 3-81 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function Connector Pin Connects To

RESERVED RESERVED SIGNAL GROUND #1 CH. B SIGNAL GROUND #2 CH. B CHASSIS GROUND CH. B +28 +28 +28 +28 VDC VDC VDC VDC #1 CH. #2 CH. RTN #1 RTN #2 B B CH. B CH. B

136J2A-83 -84 -85 -86 -87 -88 -89 -90 -91 -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 (24)-------------- SIGNAL GROUND -100 (24)------------- SIGNAL GROUND -101 (24)------------- CHASSIS GROUND -102 -103 (22)-------------} -104 (22)-------------} FIG. -105 (22)-------------} 6-1A 136J2A-106 (22)-------------}

22-05-14

Page 3-82 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function RESERVED RESERVED Connector Pin Connects To

ENG 1 OIL TEMP B

136J2B-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 { SIG (H) -9 (24)-T-S-----------S---- ENGINE NO. 1 { SIG (L) -10 (24)T-S-----------S---- OIL { SHIELD GND SHIELD GND { { EXC (H) -11 (24)T-S----------S---- TEMPERATURE { EXC (L) -12 (24)T-S----------S---- B SENSOR SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -13 -14 -15 -16 -17 -18 -19 -20 -21 -22 -23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -30 (24)-T-S----------S---- BATT NO. 2 -31 (24)-T-S----------S---- TEMP SENSOR 1 SHIELD GND

BATT 2 TEMP SNS 1 { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND

GEN 3 VOLTAGE

{ (H) { (L)

-32 -33 -34 (24)------------------- GENERATOR NO. 3 136J2B-35 (24)------------------- LINE

22-05-14

Page 3-83 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function GEN 1 VOLTAGE USED ON DAU 2 USED ON DAU 2 ARINC 429 OUT #1 B ARINC 429 OUT #1 B ARINC 429 IN #5 ARINC 429 IN #5 ARINC 429 IN #6 ARINC 429 IN #6 { (H) { (L) Connector Pin Connects To

136J2B-36 (24)------------------- GENERATOR NO. 1 -37 (24)------------------- LINE -38 -39 -40 (24)-T-S----------S---- MAINTENANCE -41 (24)-T-S----------S---- COMPUTER SHIELD GND -42 (24)-T-S----------S---- STALL WARN CH. A -43 (24)-T-S----------S---- STALL WARN CH. A SHIELD GND -44 (24)-T-S----------S---- FADEC 1 -45 (24)-T-S----------S---- CH. B SHIELD GND -46 -47 -48 -49 -50 (24)-T-S----------S---- FIG. -51 (24)-T-S----------S---- 6-12 SHIELD GND

(H) (L) SHIELD GND (H) (L) SHIELD GND (H) (L) SHIELD GND

ARINC 429 OUT #2 B ARINC 429 OUT #2 B (To IC 1 & 2)

(H) (L) SHIELD GND

RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED

FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR

TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST

RESERVED FOR TEST

-52 -53 -54 -55 -56 -57 -58 -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 -67 -68 -69 136J2B-70

22-05-14

Page 3-84 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 1 (cont) DA-800 Function Connector Pin 136J2B-71 -72 -73 -74 -75 -76 -77 -78 -79 -80 -81 -82 -83 -84 -85 -86 -87 -88 -89 -90 -91 -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 -100 -----NC -101 -----NC -102 -103 -104 (24)------------------} -105 (24)------------------} FIG. 6-34 136J2B-106 (24)------------------} Connects To

RESERVED RESERVED RS-422 XMT CH. B RS-422 XMT CH. B RS-422 RCV CH. B RS-422 RCV CH. B (H) (L) (H) (L)

RS-232 XMT CH. B RS-232 RCV CH. B RS-232 COM CH. B

22-05-14

Page 3-85 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 DA-800 Function AIL SYS1 PRESS SW ENG 1 BLEED POS XBLEED VLV POS R/AIR ACTR 1 POS SPARE GND/OPN BLEED DUCT LEAK 1 L AIR STARTER VLV ACCUM LOW PRESS BAGGAGE DOOR SW SERVICE DOOR SW FUELING DOOR SW EXTG BTL A CRTG 1 EXTG BTL A CRTG 2 EXTG BTL A PRESS FUEL PRESS SW 1 HYD 1 THERMAL SW HYD 1 ENG PUMP SW HYD 1 ELEC PUMP SW E1 A/ICE POS VLV WING1 A/I VLV POS STAB A/I VLV POS WING1 A/ICE LEAK STAB A/ICE LEAK ENG1 OIL LO PRESS ENG1 OIL LO LEVEL ENG1 FUEL FILTER RUD 1 PRESS SW CARGO SMOKE DET HS VALVE 1 POS SPOILER LEFT IB TR 1 INHIBIT TR 1 UP DEPLOY TR1 3RY UNLOCK TR1 UP NOT STOW TR1 LOW NOT STOW TR 1 PRESS ISOL MAIN PTRIM INOP BACKUP PTRIM INOP TR 1 LOW DEPLOY TR 1 TRANSIT STAB A/I LO PRESS ENG 1 A/I OVRPRESS DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN Connector Pin 137J1A-1 (24)---------------2 (24)---------------3 (24)---------------4 (24)---------------5 -6 (24)---------------7 (24)---------------8 (24)---------------9 (24)---------------10 (24)--------------11 (24)--------------12 (24)--------------13 (24)--------------14 (24)--------------15 (24)--------------16 (24)--------------17 (24)--------------18 (24)--------------19 (24)--------------20 (24)--------------21 (24)--------------22 (24)--------------23 (24)--------------24 (24)--------------25 (24)--------------26 (24)--------------27 (24)--------------28 (24)--------------29 (24)--------------30 (24)--------------31 (24)--------------32 (24)--------------33 (24)--------------34 (24)--------------35 (24)--------------36 (24)--------------37 (24)--------------38 (24)--------------39 (24)--------------40 (24)--------------41 (24)-------------137J1A-42 (24)-------------AIL EBV CBV ACT HYD POS POS POS Connects To PRESS MICRO MICRO MICRO SW 1 SW 1 SW SW 1

BLD DUCT LEAK SWS 1 ATS VALVE L ACCUM PRESSURE SW BAGGAGE DOOR SW MONIT SERVICE DOOR SW MONIT FUELING DOOR SW EXTINGUISHER BTL A EXTINGUISHER BTL A EXTINGUISHER BTL A FUEL 1 PRESS SW HYD 1 THERMAL SW ENG PUMP PRESS SW 1 ELEC PUMP PRESS SW 1 ENG 1 A/ICE VALVE WING 1 A/ICE VALVE STAB A/ICE VALVE WING 1 DUCT LEAK SWS TAIL DUCT LEAK SWS ENG 1 OIL LO PRESS SW ENG 1 OIL LO LEVEL SW ENG 1 FLTR BYPASS SW RUD PRESSURE SW 1 CARGO SMOKE DETECTOR HS VALVE 1 POS SW SPLR PROX SW LEFT IB ICU INHIBIT SWITCH TR 1 UP DEPLOY SW UP/LOW 3RY UNLCK SWS INB/OUT 1 STOW SWS INB/OUT STOW SWS ICU ISOLATION SW STAB CNTRL UNIT MAIN STAB CNTRL UNIT BKUP TR 1 LOW DEPLOY SW UP/LOW TRANSIT SW STAB LOW PRESS SW ENG 1 OVERPRESS SW

22-05-14

Page 3-86 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function STAB A/I OVRPRESS BEARING 1 FAIL BEARING 2 FAIL SPARE GND/OPN SPARE GND/OPN SPARE GND/OPN TAT 2 INOP ENG 1 BLEED CMD FUEL XFD VLV OPEN FUEL XFD VLV CLSD FUEL SOV 1 OPEN FUEL SOV 1 CLOSED HYD SOV 1 OPEN HYD SOV 1 CLOSED TOILET SMOKE DET APU BLEED CMD XBLEED VLV CMD APU FIRE APU MALFUNCTION SPARE 28V/OPN SPARE 28V/OPN SPARE 28V/OPN SPARE 28V/GND DFDR STATUS IDENT #1 CH. A IDENT #2 CH. A IDENT #3 CH. A BRK 3 PRESSURE { { DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN Connector Pin Connects To

137J1A-43 (24)-------------- STAB OVERPRESS SW -44 (24)-------------- GEN 1 -45 (24)-------------- GEN 2 -46 -47 -48 -49 (24)-------------- TAT 2 CURRENT SENSOR -50 (24)-------------- EBV RELAY 1 -51 (24)-------------- CROSSFEED VLV POS (O) -52 (24)-------------- CROSSFEED VLV POS (C) -53 (24)-------------- ENG1 FUEL SOV POS (O) -54 (24)-------------- ENG1 FUEL SOV POS (C) -55 (24)-------------- ENG1 HYD SOV POS (O) -56 (24)-------------- ENG1 HYD SOV POS (C) -57 (24)-------------- TOILET SMOKE DETECT -58 (24)-------------- APU BLD DUMP RELAY -59 (24)-------------- XBLEED BYPASS RELAY -60 (24)-------------- APU FIRE CNTRL MOD -61 (24)-------------- APU -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 (24)--------------- FLT DATA RECORDER -67 -------------------} NC -68 (24)---------------} GND -69 -------------------} NC (H) -70 (24)-T-S----------S---- BRAKE CONTROL (L) -71 (24)-T-S----------S---- UNIT SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -72 -73 -74 -75 137J1A-76

USED ON DAU 1 USED ON DAU 1

22-05-14

Page 3-87 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function RESERVED RESERVED USED ON DAU 1 USED ON DAU 1 LATERAL ACCEL FDR { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND LONG ACCEL FDR { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND ENG 1 LP VIB { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND ENG 1 HP VIB { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND RESERVED RESERVED SIGNAL GROUND #1 CH. A SIGNAL GROUND #2 CH. A CHASSIS GROUND CH. A +28 +28 +28 +28 VDC VDC VDC VDC #1 CH. #2 CH. RTN #1 RTN #2 A A CH. A CH. A Connector Pin 137J1A-77 -78 -79 -80 -81 -82 -83 (24)-T-S----------S---- LATERAL -84 (24)-T-S----------S---- ACCEL SENSOR SHIELD GND -85 -86 (24)-T-S----------S---- LONGITUDINAL -87 (24)-T-S----------S---- ACCEL SENSOR SHIELD GND -88 -89 (24)-T-S----------S---- ENGINE NO. 1 -90 (24)-T-S----------S---- LP VIB SENSOR SHIELD GND -91 -92 (24)-T-S----------S---- ENGINE NO. 1 -93 (24)-T-S----------S---- HP VIB SENSOR SHIELD GND Connects To

-94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 (24)--------------- SIGNAL GROUND -100 (24)-------------- SIGNAL GROUND -101 (24)-------------- CHASSIS GROUND -102 -103 (22)--------------} -104 (22)--------------} FIG. -105 (22)--------------} 6-1B 137J1A-106 (22)--------------}

22-05-14

Page 3-88 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function RESERVED RESERVED YAW TRIM POS Connector Pin 137J1B-1 -2 { (H) -3 (24)-T-S-----------S---{ (W) -4 (24)-T-S-----------S---{ (L) -5 (24)-T-S-----------S---SHIELD GND { { { { { { SIG (H) SIG (L) SHIELD GND EXC (H) EXC (L) SHIELD GND Connects To

YAW TRIM ACTUATOR POT SHIELD GND

-6 (24)-T-S-----------S---- ENGINE NO. 2 -7 (24)-T-S-----------S---- OIL SHIELD GND -8 (24)-T-S-----------S---- TEMPERATURE -9 (24)-T-S-----------S---- A SENSOR SHIELD GND -10 (24)-T-S----------S----11 (24)-T-S----------S----12 (24)-T-S----------S--- -13 (24)-T-S----------S----14 (24)-T-S----------S----15 (24)-T-S----------S--- -16 (24)-T-S----------S----17 (24)-T-S----------S----18 (24)-T-S----------S--- CONTROL COLUMN POSITION SENSOR NO. 2 SHIELD GND HYDRAULIC QTY POT NO. 1 SHIELD GND HYDRAULIC QTY POT NO. 2 SHIELD GND

ENG 2 OIL TEMP A

CTL COL POS 2

{ (H) { (W) { (L) SHIELD GND { (H) { (W) { (L) SHIELD GND { (H) { (W) { (L) SHIELD GND { { { { { { SIG (H) SIG (L) SHIELD GND EXC (H) EXC (L) SHIELD GND

HYD 1 FLUID QTY

HYD 2 FLUID QTY

-19 (24)-T-S----------S---- ENGINE NO. 2 -20 (24)-T-S----------S---- FUEL SHIELD GND -21 (24)-T-S----------S---- TEMPERATURE -22 (24)-T-S----------S---- SENSOR SHIELD GND

ENG 2 FUEL TEMP

PAX TEMP SENSOR

-23 { (H) -24 (24)-T-S----------S---- PASSENGER { (L) 137J1B-25 (24)-T-S----------S---- TEMP SENSOR SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-89 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function { { { COOLER 2 INLT TMP { { { { { { COOLER 2 OTLT TMP { { { Connector Pin Connects To

SIG (H) 137J1B-26 (24)-T-S----------S---- COOLER NO. 2 SIG (L) -27 (24)-T-S----------S---- ANTI-ICE SHIELD GND SHIELD GND EXC (H) EXC (L) SHIELD GND SIG (H) SIG (L) SHIELD GND EXC (H) EXC (L) -28 (24)-T-S----------S---- INLET TEMP -29 (24)-T-S----------S---- SENSOR SHIELD GND -30 (24)-T-S----------S---- COOLER NO. 2 -31 (24)-T-S----------S---- ANTI-ICE SHIELD GND -32 (24)-T-S----------S---- OUTLET TEMP -33 (24)-T-S----------S---- SENSOR -34 -35 -36 -37

APU EGT OUTPUT

{ (H) { (L) SHIELD GND (H) (L) SHIELD GND (H) (L) SHIELD GND

-38 (24)-T-S----------S---- APU ELEC -39 (24)-T-S----------S---- SIGNAL UNIT SHIELD GND -40 (24)-T-S----------S---- FIG. -41 (24)-T-S----------S---- 6-14 SHIELD GND -42 (24)-T-S----------S---- FIG. -43 (24)-T-S----------S---- 6-10 SHIELD GND

ARINC 429 OUT #1 A ARINC 429 OUT #1 A (To RMU 1 & 2) ARINC 429 IN #1 ARINC 429 IN #1 (From AH 1) ARINC 429 IN #2 ARINC 429 IN #2

(H) -44 (24)-T-S----------S---- CABIN PRESSURE (L) 137J1B-45 (24)-T-S----------S---- SENSOR UNIT SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-90 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function ARINC 429 IN #3 ARINC 429 IN #3 ARINC 429 IN #4 ARINC 429 IN #4 ARINC 429 OUT #2 A ARINC 429 OUT #2 A (To IC 1 & 2) { { { { { { Connector Pin Connects To

(H) 137J1B-46 (24)-T-S----------S---- FADEC NO. 2 (L) -47 (24)-T-S----------S---- CH. A SHIELD GND SHIELD GND (H) (L) SHIELD GND (H) (L) SHIELD GND SIG (H) SIG (L) SHIELD GND 10V EXC (H) 10V EXC (L) SHIELD GND -48 (24)-T-S----------S---- FUEL COMPUTER -49 (24)-T-S----------S---- CH. B SHIELD GND -50 (24)-T-S----------S---- FIG. -51 (24)-T-S----------S---- 6-12 SHIELD GND -52 (24)-T-S----------S---- ENGINE NO. 2 -53 (24)-T-S----------S---- OIL SHIELD GND -54 (24)-T-S----------S---- PRESSURE -55 (24)-T-S----------S---- SENSOR SHIELD GND -56 -57 -58 -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 -67 -68 -69 -70 -71 (24)-T-S----------S----72 (24)-T-S----------S----73 (24)-T-S----------S---

ENG 2 OIL PRESS

RESERVED FOR TEST RESERVED FOR TEST RESERVED FOR TEST RESERVED FOR TEST RESERVED FOR TEST RESERVED FOR TEST RESERVED FOR TEST RESERVED FOR TEST RESERVED FOR TEST RESERVED FOR TEST RESERVED FOR TEST RESERVED FOR TEST USED ON DAU 1 USED ON DAU 1 RESERVED FOR TEST ENG 2 OIL LEVEL { (H) { (W) { (L) SHIELD GND

ENGINE NO. 2 OIL LEVEL SENSOR SHIELD GND

-74 BATT 2 TEMP SNS 2 { (H) -75 (24)-T-S----------S---- BATT NO. 2 { (L) 137J1B-76 (24)-T-S----------S---- TEMP SENSOR SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-91 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function ENG 2 FUEL FLOW Connector Pin Connects To

{ IMPELLOR 137J1B-77 (24)-T-S----------S---- ENGINE NO. 2 { COMMON -78 (24)-T-S----------S---- FUEL FLOW { DRUM -79 (24)-T-S----------S---- METER SHIELD GND SHIELD GND { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND { (H) { (L) { (H) { (L) { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND -80 (24)-T-S----------S---- FLAP ELEC. -81 (24)-T-S----------S---- CNTRL UNIT SHIELD GND -82 (24)-T-S----------S---- HYD PRESS -83 (24)-T-S----------S---- XDUCER NO. 1 SHIELD GND -84 (24)-T-S----------S---- HYD PRESS -85 (24)-T-S----------S---- XDUCER NO. 2 SHIELD GND -86 (24)-T-S----------S---- ENGINE NO. 2 -87 (24)-T-S----------S---- LP VIB SENSOR SHIELD GND -88 (24)------------------- GENERATOR NO. 2 -89 (24)------------------- LINE -90 (24)------------------- GENERATOR NO. 4 -91 (24)------------------- LINE -92 (24)-T-S----------S---- GENERATOR NO. 2 -93 (24)-T-S----------S---- SHUNT SHIELD GND -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 (24)-T-S----------S---- 136J1B-100 (H) -99 (24)-T-S----------S---- 136J1B-101 (L) SHIELD GND

FLAP POSITION 2

HYD 1 PRESSURE

HYD 2 PRESSURE

ENG 2 LP VIB

GEN 2 VOLTAGE GEN 4 VOLTAGE GEN 2 CURRENT

RESERVED RESERVED RS-422 XMT CH. A RS-422 XMT CH. A RS-422 RCV CH. A RS-422 RCV CH. A (H) (L) SHIELD GND

(H) -100 (24)-T-S---------S---- 136J1B-98 (H) (L) 137J1B-101 (24)-T-S---------S---- 136J1B-99 (L) SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-92 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function GEN 4 CURRENT { (H) { (L) Connector Pin Connects To

137J1B-102 (24)-T-S---------S---- GENERATOR NO. 4 -103 (24)-T-S---------S---- SHUNT SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -104 (24)------------------} -105 (24)------------------} FIG. 6-34 137J1B-106 (24)------------------}

RS-232 XMT CH. A RS-232 RCV CH. A RS-232 COM CH. A

22-05-14

Page 3-93 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function AIL SYS2 PRESS SW ENG 2 BLEED POS APU BLEED POS R/AIR ACTR 2 POS SPARE GND/OPN BLEED DUCT LEAK 2 APU DUCT LEAK R AIR STARTER VLV APU LOW OIL PRESS APU HI OIL TEMP EXTG BTL B CTRG 1 EXTG BTL B CRTG 2 EXTG BTL APU CRTG EXTG BTL B PRESS EXTG APU PRESS ENGLISH/METRIC FLAP FAIL 2 FUEL PRESS SW 2 APU FUEL PRESS SW HYD 2 THERMAL SW HYD 2 ENG PUMP SW HYD 2 ELEC PUMP SW E2 A/ICE POS VLV WING2 A/I VLV POS WING2 A/ICE LEAK ENG2 OIL LO PRESS ENG 2 A/ICE SW ENG2 OIL LO LEVEL ENG2 FUEL FILTER RUD 2 PRESS SW HS VALVE 2 POS SPOILER RIGHT IB TR 2 INHIBIT TR 2 UP DEPLOY TR2 3RY UNLOCK TR2 UP NOT STOW TR2 LOW NOT STOW TR 2 PRESS ISOL TR 2 LOW DEPLOY TR 2 TRANSIT ENG 2 A/I LO PRESS WING 2 A/I LO PRESS DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN Connector Pin 137J2A-1 (24)---------------2 (24)---------------3 (24)---------------4 (24)---------------5 -6 (24)---------------7 (24)---------------8 (24)---------------9 (24)---------------10 (24)--------------11 (24)--------------12 (24)--------------13 (24---------------14 (24)--------------15 (24)--------------16 (24)--------------17 (24)--------------18 (24)--------------19 (24)--------------20 (24)--------------21 (24)--------------22 (24)--------------23 (24)--------------24 (24)--------------25 (24)--------------26 (24)--------------27 (24)--------------28 (24)--------------29 (24)--------------30 (24)--------------31 (24)--------------32 (24)--------------33 (24)--------------34 (24)--------------35 (24)--------------36 (24)--------------37 (24)--------------38 (24)--------------39 (24)--------------40 (24)--------------41 (24)-------------137J2A-42 (24)-------------AIL EBV APU ACT Connects To HYD PRESS SW 2 POS MICRO SW 2 BLEED VALVE POS MICRO SW 2

BLD DUCT LEAK SWS 2 APU DUCT LEAK SWS ATS VALVE R APU LOW OIL PRESS SW APU OIL TEMP SWITCH EXTINGUISHER BTL B EXTINGUISHER BTL B APU EXTINGUISHER BTL EXTINGUISHER BTL B APU EXTINGUISHER BTL DAU STRAP (OPN=ENG) FLAP ELEC CNTRL UNIT FUEL 2 PRESS SW APU FUEL PRESS SW HYD 2 THERMAL SW ENG PUMP PRESS SW 2 ELEC PUMP PRESS SW 2 ENG 2 A/I VALVE WING 2 A/ICE VALVE WING 2 DUCT LEAK SWS ENG 2 OIL LO PRESS SW A/ICE CNTRL PANEL ENG 2 OIL LO LEVEL SW ENG 2 FLTR BYPASS SW RUD PRESSURE SW 2 HS VALVE 2 POS SW SPLR PROX SW RIGHT IB HCU INHIBIT SWITCH TR 2 UP DEPLOY SW UP/LOW 3RY UNLCK SWS INB/OUT 2 STOW SWS INB/OUT STOW SWS HCU ISOLATION SW TR 2 LOW DEPLOY SW UP/LOW TRANSIT SW ENG 2 LOW PRESS SW WING 2 LOW PRESS SW

22-05-14

Page 3-94 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function ENG 2 A/I OVRPRESS WING 2 A/I OVRPRESS RESERVED - END ITEM SPARE GND/OPN BEARING 3 FAIL BEARING 4 FAIL SPARE GND/OPN FUEL SOV 2 OPEN FUEL SOV 2 CLOSED APU FUEL SOV CLSD APU FUEL SOV OPEN HYD SOV 2 OPEN HYD SOV 2 CLOSED ENG 2 BLEED CMD APU MASTER SW ON ENG 2 FIRE WING A/ICE SWITCH STAB A/ICE SWITCH 2A POWER CNTOR ON 2B POWER CNTOR ON SPARE 28V/OPN SPARE 28V/OPN SPARE 28V/OPN SPARE 28V/OPN IDENT #1 CH. B IDENT #2 CH. B IDENT #3 CH. B DIN DIN TEST DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN Connector Pin 137J2A-43 -44 -45 -46 -47 -48 -49 -50 -51 -52 -53 -54 -55 -56 -57 -58 -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 -67 -68 -69 -70 -71 -72 -73 -74 -75 -76 -77 -78 -79 -80 Connects To

(24)-------------- ENG 2 OVERPRESS SW (24)-------------- WING 2 OVERPRESS SW (24)-------------- GEN 3 (24)-------------- GEN 4 (24)-------------(24)-------------(24)-------------(24)-------------(24)-------------(24)-------------(24)-------------(24)-------------(24)-------------(24)-------------(24)-------------(24)-------------(24)-------------ENG2 FUEL SOV POS (O) ENG2 FUEL SOV POS (C) APU FUEL SOV POS (C) APU FUEL SOV POS (O) ENG 2 HYD SOV POS (O) ENG 2 HYD SOV POS (C) EBV RELAY 2 APU CNTRL PANEL ENG 2 FIRE CNTRL MOD ANTI-ICE CNTRL PANEL ANTI-ICE CNTRL PANEL FUEL CONTROL PANEL FUEL CONTROL PANEL

------------------} NC ------------------} SIGNAL GROUND ------------------} NC

USED ON DAU USED ON DAU USED ON DAU USED ON DAU RESERVED RESERVED AIR/GROUND 2 ENG 2 HP VIB

1 1 1 1

-----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC

DIN

(24)-------------- LANDING GEAR SYS

{ (H) -81 (24)-T-S----------S---- ENGINE NO. 2 { (L) 137J2A-82 (24)-T-S----------S---- HP VIB SENSOR SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-95 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function Connector Pin Connects To

RESERVED RESERVED SIGNAL GROUND #1 CH. B SIGNAL GROUND #2 CH. B CHASSIS GROUND CH. B +28 +28 +28 +28 VDC VDC VDC VDC #1 CH. #2 CH. RTN #1 RTN #2 B B CH. B CH. B

137J2A-83 -84 -85 -86 -87 -88 -89 -90 -91 -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 (24)-------------- SIGNAL GROUND -100 (24)------------- SIGNAL GROUND -101 (24)------------- CHASSIS GROUND -102 -103 (22)-------------} -104 (22)-------------} FIG. -105 (22)-------------} 6-1B 137J2A-106 (22)-------------}

22-05-14

Page 3-96 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function RESERVED RESERVED Connector Pin Connects To

ENG 2 OIL TEMP B

137J2B-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 { SIG (H) -9 (24)-T-S-----------S---- ENGINE NO. 2 { SIG (L) -10 (24)T-S-----------S---- OIL { SHIELD GND SHIELD GND { { EXC (H) -11 (24)T-S-----------S---- TEMPERATURE { EXC (L) -12 (24)T-S-----------S---- B SENSOR SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -13 -14 -15 -16 -17 -18 -19 -20 -21 -22 -23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -30 (24)-T-S----------S---- BATT NO. 1 -31 (24)-T-S----------S---- TEMP SENSOR 2 SHIELD GND

BATT 1 TEMP SNS 2 { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND

GPU VOLTAGE

{ (H) { (L)

-32 -33 -34 (24)------------------- BATTERY RELAY BOX 137J2B-35 (24)------------------- LINE CONNECTOR

22-05-14

Page 3-97 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function BATT 2 VOLTAGE APU GEN CURRENT { (H) { (L) { (H) { (L) SHIELD GND ARINC 429 OUT #1 B ARINC 429 OUT #1 B ARINC 429 IN #5 ARINC 429 IN #5 ARINC 429 IN #6 ARINC 429 IN #6 (H) (L) SHIELD GND (H) (L) SHIELD GND (H) (L) SHIELD GND Connector Pin Connects To

137J2B-36 (24)------------------- HOT BATT -37 (24)------------------- BUS NO. 2 -38 (24)-T-S----------S---- APU GENERATOR -39 (24)-T-S----------S---- SHUNT SHIELD GND -40 (24)-T-S----------S---- MAINTENANCE -41 (24)-T-S----------S---- COMPUTER SHIELD GND -42 (24)-T-S----------S---- STALL WARN CH. B -43 (24)-T-S----------S---- STALL WARN CH. B SHIELD GND -44 (24)-T-S----------S---- FADEC NO. 2 -45 (24)-T-S----------S---- CH. B SHIELD GND -46 -47 -48 -49 -50 (24)-T-S----------S---- FIG. -51 (24)-T-S----------S---- 6-12 SHIELD GND

ARINC 429 OUT #2 B ARINC 429 OUT #2 B (To IC 1 & 2)

(H) (L) SHIELD GND

RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED

FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR

TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST

RESERVED FOR TEST

-52 -53 -54 -55 -56 -57 -58 -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 -67 -68 -69 137J2B-70

22-05-14

Page 3-98 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DATA AQUISITION UNIT NO. 2 (cont) DA-800 Function Connector Pin 137J2B-71 -72 -73 -74 -75 -76 -77 -78 -79 -80 -81 -82 -83 -84 -85 -86 -87 -88 -89 -90 -91 -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -----NC -99 -----NC -100 -----NC -101 -----NC -102 -103 -104 (24)------------------} -105 (24)------------------} FIG. 6-34 137J2B-106 (24)------------------} Connects To

RESERVED RESERVED RS-422 XMT CH. B RS-422 XMT CH. B RS-422 XMT CH. B RS-422 XMT CH. B (H) (L) (H) (L)

RS-232 XMT CH. B RS-232 RCV CH. B RS-232 COM CH. B

22-05-14

Page 3-99 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS COMMUNICATIONS UNIT RCZ-851E IO BP

Function RESERVED +28 V DC +28 V DC +28 V DC +28 V DC

Connector Pin 143J1-1 -2 -4 -5 -6

Connects To

(O) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (B) (B)

FAN POWER COMM POWER COMM POWER COMM POWER

(24)------------------ COOLING FAN - RED (22)------------------ (22)------------------ FIG. 6-1 (22)------------------ (22)-----------------DC POWER GND

+28 V DC XPDR POWER RETURN -7 +28 +28 RSB RSB V DC XPDR POWER V DC XPDR POWER PRIMARY (H) PRIMARY (L) SHIELD GROUND

-8 (22)------------------ FIG. 6-1 -9 (22)------------------ -10 -T-S---------------S-- FIG. 6-21 -11 -T-S---------------S-- SHIELD GND -12 -22 -13 -14 -15 -28 -16 (24)-----------------FIG. 6-22

(B) (B)

SELCAL/ACARS (L) SELCAL/ACARS (H) RESERVED COM +28 V ACH PWR RCB RCVR (#1) (L) RCB RCVR (#1) (H) COMM STRAP +5 V DC +28 +28 +28 +28 V V V V DC DC DC DC COMM COMM COMM XPDR POWER POWER POWER POWER RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN

(O) (B) (B) (O) (P) (P) (P) (P) (I)

-17 -18 -19 -20

(22)------------------ (22)------------------ DC POWER GND (22)------------------ (22)------------------ FIG. 6-27 C143J1-24 C143J1-35 SHIELD GND

VHF 1 PTT (GND/OPEN)

-21 (24)------------------

(I/O) SIMULCOM RET (I/O) SIMULCOM

-24 (24)-T-S-----------S--35 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GROUND -25 -33 -26 143J1-27

(B) (B)

COM ACH DATA (L) COM ACH DATA (H) RESERVED RESERVED

22-05-14

Page 3-100 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS COMMUNICATIONS UNIT (cont) RCZ-851E IO BP (O) (O)

Function

Connector Pin

Connects To

EMER COM AUDIO (L) 143J1-29 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-29 EMER COM AUDIO (H) -31 (24)-T-S-----------S-- SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND REC PHONE AUDIO AUX AUD 4 (L) AUX AUD 4 (H) AUDIO STATUS 3 (GND/OPEN) COM 3 XMIT (GND/OPEN) AUX AUD 2 (H) AUX AUD 2 (L) HF COM DISABLE (GND/OPEN) GND (AUDIO SHIELDS) COM +28V ACH RTN AUDIO BUS SHIELD (GND) COM STRAP +5 V DC RETURN GND GND GND AUDIO STATUS 3 (GND/OPEN) (H) -30 -34 -62 -36 -37 (24)------------------38 -49 -39 -40 -41 -42 -43 (24)------------------44 (24)------------------45 (24)------------------46 (24)------------------48 COM 3 PTT

(O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

COMM 1 STRAP CAA FIG. 6-22 BOBBIN

COM 3 AUD (L) -50 (24)-T-S-----------S-- COM 3 COM 3 AUD (H) -66 (24)-T-S-----------S-- AUDIO SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND AUX AUD 3 (L) -51 AUX AUD 3 (H) -52 RCB RCVR (#2) (L) -53 RCB RCVR (#2) (H) -68 +28 V DC FAN POWER RETURN -54 (24)-----------------XPDR TO TCAS 429A -55 (24)-T-S-----------S-XPDR TO TCAS 429B 143J1-87 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GROUND

(I) (I) (B) (B) (O) (B) (B)

COOLING FAN - BLUE 193RMP-14F 193RMP-14G SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-101 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS COMMUNICATIONS UNIT (cont) RCZ-851E IO BP (B) (B)

Function

Connector Pin

Connects To

AUDIO BUS #1 (H) 143J1-56 -T-S---------------S-- FIG. 6-23 AUDIO BUS #1 (L) -70 -T-S---------------S-- SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND SIDETONE PHONE AUDIO (H) GND AGC ANALOG TP GND -57 -58 (24)------------------ BOBBIN -59 -60 (24)------------------ BOBBIN

(O) (I) (O) (I) (B) (B)

LEFT SEC RSB (L) -61 -T-S---------------S-- FIG. 6-21 LEFT SEC RSB (H) -74 -T-S---------------S-- SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND CHASSIS GND RESERVED RESERVED AUDIO STATUS 1 (GND/OPEN) ALT SRC SEL 2 (NO) RCB XMTR (#1) (H) RCB XMTR (#1) (L) RCB XMTR (#2) (H) RCB XMTR (#2) (L) WOW RESERVED RESERVED COM STRAP CLK COM STRAP SIDE A0 -67 (24)------------------71 -72 -76 -80 (24)------------------81 -95 -82 -96 -83 (24)------------------84 -85 BOBBIN

(I)

(I) (I) (B) (B) (B) (B)

FIG. 6-11

FIG. 6-2

(O) (O) (B) (B)

-88 (24)------------------ COMM 1 STRAP CCA -89 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-22

TCAS TO XPDR 429A -90 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 193RMP-15J TCAS TO XPDR 429B -104 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 193RMP-15K SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND TO AIRCRAFT ANT. RELAY VHF 1 MIC (H) -92 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. 6-27 VHF 1 MIC (L) -106 (24)-T-S----------S-- SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND COMM OFF (GND/OPEN) -93 XPDR MUT SUP (P) 143J1-94 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-31 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND XPDR ACTIVE (NO) -91 (24)------------------

(O) (I) (I)

(I)

22-05-14

Page 3-102 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS COMMUNICATIONS UNIT (cont) RCZ-851E IO BP (I) (I) (B) (B)

Function

Connector Pin

Connects To

RESERVED 143J1-97 RESERVED -98 ADC 1 TO XPDR 429A -99 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 9J1-66, FIG.6-11 ADC 1 TO XPDR 429B -86 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 9J1-67 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND ADC 2 TO XPDR 429A C9J1-66, C1J1B-K4, FIG. 6-11 ADC 2 TO XPDR 429A -69 (24)-T-S----------S-- C9J1-67, C1J1B-K5 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND COM STRAP DATA COM STRAP LOAD COM STRAP SIDE A1 RESERVED RESERVED -101 (24)----------------- -102 (24)----------------- FIG. 6-22 -103 (24)----------------- -104 143J1-105 -100 (24)-T-S----------S--

(B) (B)

(I) (O) (O)

(I)

22-05-14

Page 3-103 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS COMMUNICATIONS UNIT (cont) RCZ-851E IO BP

Function TRANSPONDER ANTENNA (BOTTOM)

Connector Pin 143J2-1 ---(RG-214/U)-S------- 143J2-2 143J3-1 ---(RG-142/U)-S-------143J3-2 143J6-1 ---(RG-214/U)-S------- 143J6-2

Connects To BOTTOM XPDR ANTENNA

COM ANTENNA

COM ANT #1 TOP XPDR ANTENNA

TRANSPONDER ANTENNA (TOP)

22-05-14

Page 3-104 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS RADIO MANAGEMENT UNIT RM-855 IO BP (P) (P) (P) (P) (B) (B) (P) (P) (P) (P) (I) (B) (B) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (B) (B) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To

28 V DC LIGHTING 144J1-A 28 V DC LIGHTING RET -B +28 V DC POWER -C (22)------------------ FIG. 6-1 +28 V DC POWER RETURN -D (22)------------------ DC GND NAV BACKUP BUS (+) -E (24)-T-S-----------S-- 164J1B-102 NAV BACKUP BUS (-) -F (24)-T-S-----------S-- 164J1A-84 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND 5 V DC LIGHTING 5 V DC LIGHTING RETURN 0-5 V AC LIGHTING 0-5 V AC LIGHTING RET CHASSIS GROUND -G (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-7 -H (24)-T-S-----------S-- LIGHTING GND NC SHIELD GND -J -K -L (24)------------------ CHASSIS GND

LEFT SEC RSB (H) -M -T-S---------------S-- LEFT SEC RSB (L) -N -T-S---------------S-- FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND WOW (GND/OPEN) WOW POLARITY (GND/OPEN) ATC IDENT (GND/OPEN) DISCRETE 1 INPUT 4 CHASSIS GROUND -P -R -S -T -U (24)------------------ CHASSIS GROUND (24)------------------ FIG. 6-2 (24)------------------ SIGNAL GROUND (GND FOR WOW=GND) (24)------------------ TO ID SWITCHES, C144J1-S

PRIMARY RSB (H) -V -T-S---------------S-- PRIMARY RSB (L) -W -T-S---------------S-- FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND DISCRETE 1 INPUT 3 -X ON/OFF PAGE DISABLE -Y (GND/OPEN) DISCRETE 1 INPUT 1 -Z DISCRETE 1 INPUT 0 -a SIDE SEL B0 (GND/OPEN) -b SIDE SEL B1 (GND/OPEN) -c SIDE SEL EV PARITY -d (GND/OPEN) TEST ENABLE (GND/OPEN) -e COM FREQ XF (GND/OPEN) -f COM MEM SEL 144J1-g (GND/OPEN) (24)------------------ SIGNAL GND

(24)------------------ SIG. GND (24)------------------ SIG. GND (24)------------------ SIG. GND

22-05-14

Page 3-105 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS RADIO MANAGEMENT UNIT (cont) RM-855 IO BP (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (B) (B) (I) (B) (B) (I) (B) (B) (P) (P) (I) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To

MKR SENSE LEFT 144J1-h (24)------------------ 160J2-L, C144J1-h MKR SENSE RIGHT -i (24)------------------ C160J2-L, C144J1-i COM POWER OFF (GND/OPEN) -j ATC POWER OFF (GND/OPEN) -k VOR POWER OFF (GND/OPEN) -m DME POWER OFF (GND/OPEN) -n ADF POWER OFF (GND/OPEN) -p MLS POWER OFF (GND/OPEN) -q DISCRETE OUTPUT 1 -r DISCRETE OUTPUT 0 -s FMS BUS (-) -t (24)------------------ 121J1B-30,C144J1-t ENG BACKUP FUNCTION ENABLE -u NAV BACKUP FUNCTION ENABLE -v ENG DISPLAY ENABLE #1 -w (24)------------------ 190J1B-34 ENG DISPLAY ENABLE #2 -x (24)------------------ C190J1B-34 ENG DISPLAY ENABLE #3 -y DAU CONFIGURATION (2 DAUS) -z FMS BUS (+) -AA (24)------------------ 121J1B-31,C144J1-AA IAC CONFIGURATION 2 -BB DAU #1 (+) DAU #1 (-) SPARE DAU #2 (+) DAU #2 (-) SPARE ARINC ARINC +28 V +28 V SPARE SPARE -CC (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-14 -DD (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-14 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -EE -FF (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-14 -GG (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-14 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -HH -JJ -KK -LL (22)------------------ FIG. 6-1 -MM (22)------------------ DC GND -NN 144J1-PP

DAU 3 (H) DAU 3 (L) DC PRIMARY POWER DC PRIMARY POWER RTN

NOTE:

THE REMOTE ON/OFF FUNCTION MUST NOT BE CONNECTED ON THE EMERGENCY RADIO SIDE.

22-05-14

Page 3-106 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ADF ANTENNA IO BP (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (P) (P) (I) NOTE: Function ADF MOD SHLD ADF COS MOD ADF SIN MOD ADF ANT TEST ADF OUTER SHLD ADF INNER SHLD ADF RF INPUT ADF +15 VDC ADF +15 VDC RETURN ADF LOOP EN Connector Pin 158J1-A -B -H -C -D -E -F -G -J 158J1-K (24)-T-S---------------(24)-T-S--------------- (24)------------------ -(TRIAX)-IS-OS---------164J1A-91 164J1A-104 164J1A-77 SEE NOTE BELOW 164J2-1 Connects To

(24)-------------------- 164J1B-1 (24)-------------------- 164J1B-27 (24)-------------------- 164J1A-101

RECOMMENDED ADF ANTENNA TRIAXIAL CABLE IS TROMPETER PN TRC-50-2 OR EQUIVALENT. THE TRIAXIAL CABLE OUTER SHIELD IS GROUNDED AT THE ADF ANTENNA END ONLY, TO THE AIRFRAME AND TO THE ADF MODULATION SHIELD. THE GROUND WIRE SHALL BE 20 AWG OR LARGER AND THE LENGTH SHALL NOT EXCEED 10 INCHES.

22-05-14

Page 3-107 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS AUDIO PANEL AV-850A IO BP (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (P) (I) (I) (I) Function HAND MIC PTT (GND/OPEN) EMERGENCY COM PTT (GND/OPEN) Connector Pin Connects To

160J1-A (24)------------------ FIG. 6-24 -B (24)------------------ FIG. 6-27 -C (24)------------------ -D (24)---S-----------S-- FIG. 6-28 -W (24)---S-----------S-- SHIELD GND -E (24)---S-----------S-- -R (24)---S-----------S-- FIG. 6-27 SHIELD GND -F (24)------------------

VHF 2 PTT (GND/OPEN) VHF 2 MIC (H) VHF 2 MIC (L) SHIELD GND VHF 1 MIC (L) VHF 1 MIC (H) SHIELD GND VHF 1 PTT (GND/OPEN)

EMER COM AUDIO (H) -G (24)-T-S-----------S-- EMER COM/NAV AUDIO (L) -m (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-29 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND EMER NAV AUDIO (H) -f (24)-T-S-----------S-- EMER COM/NAV AUDIO (L) -m (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-29 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND EMER COM MIC (L) EMER COM MIC (H) -H (24)-T-S-----------S-- -P (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-27 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

HAND MIC/MASK-BOOM MIC (L) -J (24)---S-----------S-- HAND MIC (H) -K (24)---S-----------S-- FIG. 6-24 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND CABIN/COCKPIT SPKR (L) COCKPIT SPKR (H) SHIELD GND CABIN/COCKPIT SPKR (L) CABIN SPKR (H) SHIELD GND +28 V DC POWER RETURN COMMON GND RESERVED HF MIC RESERVED HF MIC (L) (H) -L (22)-T-S-----------S-- NO. 1 COCKPIT -Y (22)-T-S-----------S-- SPEAKER SHIELD GND -L (22)-T-S-----------S-- CABIN -e (22)-T-S-----------S-- SPEAKER SHIELD GND -M (22)------------------ DC GND -N -S (24)-T-S-----------S-- HF 160J1-T (24)-T-S-----------S-- MIC SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-108 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS AUDIO PANEL (cont) AV-850A IO BP (P) (P) (I) (I) (I) (O) (B) (B) (B) (B) (I) (P) (I) (I) (I/O) (I/O) (O) (O) (P) Function +28 V DC POWER +28 V DC POWER HF PTT COM 3 MIC (L) COM 3 MIC (H) Connector Pin 160J1-U -V -X -Z -a (22)------------------ (22)------------------ (24)-----------------(24)-T-S-----------S-- (24)-T-S-----------S-- Connects To FIG. 6-1 FIG. 6-1 HF PTT SWITCH COM 3 MIC SHIELD GND

HF 1 PTT (GND/OPEN) -b DIG AUDIO BUS 2 (+) -c (24)-T-S-----------S-- DIG AUDIO BUS 2 (-) -n (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-23 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND DIG AUDIO BUS 1 DIG AUDIO BUS 1 5 V LIGHTING GND 5 V LIGHTING MASK/BOOM PTT (GND/OPEN) MASK/BOOM MIC (H) (+) -d (24)-T-S-----------S-- (-) -p (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-23 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -g (24)-T-S-----------S-- LIGHTING GND -q (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-7 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -h (24)------------------ FIG. 6-24 -i

INTERPHONE AUDIO (L) -j (24)-T-S-----------S-- E160J1-j, C160J1-j INTERPHONE AUDIO (H) -s (24)-T-S-----------S-- E160J1-s, C160J1-s SHIELD GND SHIELD GND PHONE AUDIO (L) PHONE AUDIO (H) +28 V DC DIMMING -k (24)---S-----------S-- -t (24)---S-----------S-- FIG. 6-24 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND 160J1-r

22-05-14

Page 3-109 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS AUDIO PANEL (cont) AV-850A IO BP (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function WARNING 5 AUDIO (H) WARNING 5 AUDIO (L) Connector Pin 160J2-A -a AURAL WARNING UNIT SHIELD GND Connects To

WARNING 1 AUDIO (L) -B (24)-T-S------------S-WARNING 1 AUDIO (H) -W (24)-T-S------------S-SHIELD GND MASK MIC (H) MASK/BOOM MIC (L) COMMON GND WARNING 2 AUDIO (L) WARNING 2 AUDIO (H) CABIN DISABLE (GND/OPEN) WARNING 3 AUDIO (L) WARNING 3 AUDIO (H) RESERVED

-E (24)------------------- FIG. 6-24 -C -D (24)------------------- FIG. 6-24 -G -X -H -J -m -K -L (24)------------------- 144J1-h, C144J1-h -M -N PA SYSTEM, FIG. 6-30 SHIELD GND

(O) (O)

MARKER BEAC 1 HI/LO SENS STERO MUTE (GND/OPEN) SPARE

(O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I)

MAINT PHONE AUDIO (L) -P (24)-T-S------------S-MAINT PHONE AUDIO (H) -f (24)-T-S------------S-SHIELD GND MAINT 2 MIC PTT AUXILIARY PTT AUXILIARY MIC LO AUXILIARY MIC HI -R -S -T 160J2-s

22-05-14

Page 3-110 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS AUDIO PANEL (cont) AV-850A Function (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) PA MIC LO PA MIC HI VOICE RECORDER HI VOICE RECORDER LO BOOM MIC HI SPARE GND WARNING 4 AUDIO LO WARNING 4 AUDIO HI MASK INTERCOM ENABLE INT XMIT SPARE MAINT 1 MIC (LO) MAINT 1 MIC (HI) MAINT 2 MIC H MAINT 2 MIC L RESERVED PA PTT MAINT 1 MIC PTT INTERPHONE PTT Connector Pin Connects To

160J2-U (24)-T-S-----------S-- PA SYSTEM, -i (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-30 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -V (24)-T-S-----------S-- COCKPIT VOICE -r (24)-T-S-----------S-- RECORDER SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -Y (24)------------------C -Z -t -b FIG. 6-24

-c (24)------------------ E160J1-c, C160J2-c -d -e (24)-T-S-----------S-- PA SYSTEM, -q (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-30 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -g -n -h -j (24)------------------k (24)-----------------160J2-p (24)-----------------PA SYSTEM, FIG. 6-30 PA SYSTEM, FIG. 6-30 FIG. 6-24

22-05-14

Page 3-111 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

OBSERVERS AUDIO PANEL AV-850A IO BP (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (P) (I) (I) (I) (P) (P) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To

HAND MIC PTT E160J1-A (24)------------------ FIG. 6-26 (GND/OPEN) EMERGENCY COM PTT -B (GND/OPEN) VHF 2 PTT (GND/OPEN) -C (24)------------------ VHF 2 MIC (H) -D (24)---S-----------S-- FIG. 6-28 VHF 2 MIC (L) -W (24)---S-----------S-- SHIELD GND SHIELD GND VHF 1 MIC (L) VHF 1 MIC (H) SHIELD GND VHF 1 PTT (GND/OPEN) EMER COM AUDIO (H) EMER COM/NAV AUDIO (L) EMER NAV AUDIO (H) EMER COM/NAV AUDIO (L) EMER COM MIC (L) EMER COM MIC (H) -E (24)---S-----------S-- -R (24)---S-----------S-- FIG. 6-27 SHIELD GND -F (24)------------------ -G -m -f -m -H -P

HAND MIC/MASK-BOOM MIC (L) -J (24)---S-----------S-- HAND MIC (H) -K (24)---S-----------S-- FIG. 6-26 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND CABIN/COCKPIT SPKR (L) COCKPIT SPKR (H) SHIELD GND CABIN/COCKPIT SPKR (L) CABIN SPKR (H) SHIELD GND +28 V DC POWER RETURN COMMON GND HF MIC (L) HF MIC (H) +28 V DC POWER +28 V DC POWER HF PTT -L (22)-T-S-----------S-- NO. 3 COCKPIT -Y (22)-T-S-----------S-- SPEAKER SHIELD GND -L (22)-T-S-----------S-- CABIN -e (22)-T-S-----------S-- SPEAKER SHIELD GND DC GND HF MIC SHIELD GND FIG. 6-1 FIG. 6-1 HF PTT

-M (22)------------------N -S (24)-T-S-----------S-- -T (24)-T-S-----------S-- -U (22)------------------ -V (22)------------------ E160J1-X (24)------------------

22-05-14

Page 3-112 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

OBSERVERS AUDIO PANEL (cont) AV-850A IO BP (I) (I) (I) (B) (B) (B) (B) (I) (P) (I) (I) (I/O) (I/O) (O) (O) (P) Function COM 3 MIC (L) COM 3 MIC (H) Connector Pin Connects To

E160J1-Z (24)-T-S-----------S-- COM 3 -a (24)-T-S-----------S-- MIC SHIELD GND (24)------------------ COM 3 PTT SW (24)-T-S-----------S-- (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-23 SHIELD GND

COM 3 PTT (GND/OPEN) -b DIG AUDIO BUS 2 (+) -c DIG AUDIO BUS 2 (-) -n SHIELD GND DIG AUDIO BUS 1 DIG AUDIO BUS 1 5 V LIGHTING GND 5 V LIGHTING MASK/BOOM PTT (GND/OPEN) MASK/BOOM MIC (H)

(+) -d (24)-T-S-----------S-- (-) -p (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-23 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -g (24)-T-S-----------S-- LIGHTING GND -q (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-7 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -h (24)------------------i 160J1-j, C160J1-j 160J1-s, C160J1-s SHIELD GND FIG. 6-26

INTERPHONE AUDIO (L) -j (24)-T-S-----------S-INTERPHONE AUDIO (H) -s (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND PHONE AUDIO (L) PHONE AUDIO (H) +28 V DC DIMMING

-k (24)---S-----------S-- -t (24)---S-----------S-- FIG. 6-26 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND E160J1-r

22-05-14

Page 3-113 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

OBSERVERS AUDIO PANEL (cont) AV-850A IO BP (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function WARNING 5 AUDIO (H) WARNING 5 AUDIO (L) Connector Pin E160J2-A -a AURAL WARNING UNIT SHIELD GND Connects To

WARNING 1 AUDIO (L) -B (24)-T-S------------S-WARNING 1 AUDIO (H) -W (24)-T-S------------S-SHIELD GND MASK MIC (H) MASK/BOOM MIC (L) COMMON GND WARNING 2 AUDIO (L) WARNING 2 AUDIO (H) CABIN DISABLE (GND/OPEN) WARNING 3 AUDIO (L) WARNING 3 AUDIO (H) RESERVED

-E (24)------------------- FIG. 6-26 -C -D (24)------------------- FIG. 6-26 -G -X -H -J -m -K -L -M -N -P -f -R (24)------------------- FIG. 6-30 -S E160J2-T

(O) (O)

MARKER BEAC 1 HI/LO SENS STERO MUTE (GND/OPEN) SPARE

(O) (O) (I) (I) (I)

MAINT PHONE AUDIO (L) MAINT PHONE AUDIO (H) MAINT 2 MIC PTT AUXILIARY PTT AUXILIARY MIC LO

22-05-14

Page 3-114 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

OBSERVERS AUDIO PANEL (cont) AV-850A Function (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) PA MIC LO PA MIC HI VOICE RECORDER HI VOICE RECORDER LO BOOM MIC HI SPARE GND WARNING 4 AUDIO LO WARNING 4 AUDIO HI MASK INTERCOM ENABLE INT XMIT SPARE MAINT 1 MIC (LO) MAINT 1 MIC (HI) MAINT 2 MIC H MAINT 2 MIC L RESERVED (I) (I) (I) PA PTT MAINT 1 MIC PTT INTERPHONE PTT Connector Pin Connects To

E160J2-U (24)-T-S-----------S-- PA SYSTEM, -i (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-30 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -V (24)-T-S-----------S-- COCKPIT VOICE -r (24)-T-S-----------S-- RECORDER SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -Y (24)------------------C -Z -t -b -c (24)------------------d -e -q 160J2-c, C160J1-c FIG. 6-26

-g (24)-T-S-----------S-- PA SYSTEM, -n (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-30 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -h -j (24)------------------k E160J2-p (24)-----------------PA SYSTEM, FIG. 6-30 FIG. 6-26

22-05-14

Page 3-115 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT RNZ-851 IO BP (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (O) (O) (P) (P) (O) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (O) (O) (O) (P) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) Function DME HOLD NOT (GND/OPEN) DME HOLD (GND/OPEN) DME 568 DATA (H) DME 568 DATA (L) ADF RS 422 DATA SHIELD AUX1 RCB TX1 AUX1 RCB TX2 ADF 26 V AC RETURN ADF 26 V AC RETURN ADF SYNCHRO Y OUT VOR/ILS ON/OFF (GND/OPEN) DME RS-422 SD2 (L) DME RS-422 SD2 (H) DME 568 CLK (L) DME 568 CLK (H) DME CH 1 AUDIO MLS RCB SHLD Connector Pin 164J1A-2 -3 -5 -15 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -14 -16 -54 -17 -19 -18 -20 Connects To

MLS 1 RCB XMTR (H) -21 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 164J1A-25 MLS 1 RCB XMTR (L) -34 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 164J1A-38 (PROVISION) SHIELD GND SHIELD GND ADF SYNCHRO X OUT ADF 26 V AC 400 HZ CHANGE INHIBIT (GND/OPEN) -22 -23 -24

MLS 1 RCB RCVR (H) -25 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 164J1A-21 MLS 1 RCB RCVR (L) -38 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 164J1A-34 (PROVISION) SHIELD GND SHIELD GND DME 568 SYNC (H) DME 568 SYNC (L) DME MUT SUP RTN ADF SYNCHRO Z OUT (GND) ADF AUDIO OUT SHIELD DME ON/OFF (OPEN/GND) -26 -45 -28 -33 -39

164J1A-40

22-05-14

Page 3-116 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT (cont) RNZ-851 IO BP (I) (I) Function AUX 1 AUDIO (H) AUX 1 AUDIO (L) Connector Pin 164J1A-41 -55 Connects To

(I/O) DME MUT SUP (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (P)

-42 (24)---S-----------S-- FIG. 6-31 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND -44 (24)-T-S-----------S-- RESERVED FOR -57 (24)-T-S-----------S-- OPTIONAL FMS SHIELD GND -46 -47 -50 -52 -58 -70 -59 (24)-T-S-----------S--60 -61 -64 -65 -66 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-32 -67 -68 -69 -72 -71 -73 -74 -75 -77 (24)------------------ 158J1-C -78 -79 -80 -81 164J1A-83 (22)------------------ DC POWER GND RESERVED FOR OPTIONAL FMS (SEE J1B-89)

DME RS-422 SD1 (L) DME RS-422 SD1 (H) SHIELD GROUND DME VALID (28 V/OPEN) ADF DC COS OUT ADF AUDIO HI OUT ADF AUDIO LO OUT NAV AUX DATA (L) NAV AUX DATA (H) VOR/ILS RS-422 SD1 (L) VOR/ILS MKR LAMP (M) (28 V/OPEN) ADF DC SIN/SIN(NOT) OUT AUX2 RCB TX1 AUX2 RCB TX2 ADF HF KEY AUX 2 AUDIO (H) AUX 2 AUDIO (L) NAV AUX CLK (H) NAV AUX CLK (L) DME 40 MV/MI VOR/ILS MKR LAMP (I) (28 V/OPEN) RESERVED AUX1 RCB RX1 ADF ANTENNA TEST AUX1 RCB RX2 ADF MOD SHIELD GND PS IN AUX GND DME 28 V DC RETURN

22-05-14

Page 3-117 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT (cont) RNZ-851 IO BP (O) (P) (P) (P) (B) (B) (O) (O) (I) (I) (P) (P) (I) (O) (P) (P) (P) (O) (I) (I) Function VOR/ILS RS-422 SD 2B VOR/ILS +28 V DC POWER DME +28 V DC POWER ADF +28 V DC POWER Connector Pin 164J1A-84 -85 -86 -87 Connects To

(24)----------------- 144J1-F (22)----------------- (22)----------------- FIG. 6-1 (22)-----------------

LEFT SEC RSB (H) -88 (24)-T-S----------S-- LEFT SEC RSB (L) -102 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND ADF COS MOD ADF SIN MOD AUX2 RCB RX1 AUX2 RCB RX2 ADF 28 V DC RETURN DME 28 V DC RETURN CLU SHLD GND DME CH 2 AUDIO (H) VOR/ILS +28 V DC POWER DME +28 V DC POWER ADF +28 V DC POWER ADF LOOP EN CLUSTER GND ADF MOD SHIELD -91 (24)-T-S----------S-- 158J1-B -104 (24)-T-S----------S-- 158J1-H SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 (22)----------------- -99 (22)----------------- FIG. 6-1 -100 (22)----------------- -101 (24)----------------- 158J1-K -103 (22)----------------- DC POWER GND 164J1A-105 (22)----------------- DC POWER GND (22)----------------- DC POWER GND

22-05-14

Page 3-118 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT (cont) RNZ-851 IO BP (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (P) (O) (O) (P) (P) (O) (O) (B) (B) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (P) (P) Function ADF +15 V DC Connector Pin 164J1B-1 Connects To

(24)------------------ 158J1-G

28 V DC FAN POWER SPARE STAT IN (DIG AUD) SPARE STAT IN (DIG AUD) RESERVED AUX +28 V DC RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED MLS MORSE ID RETURN RESERVED VOR/ILS RNAV VIDEO (H) VOR/ILS RNAV VIDEO (L) RESERVED ADF 28 V DC RETURN NAV STRAP GND ADF +15 V DC RETURN

-2 (24)------------------ COOLING FAN (RED) -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -20 -21 -22 -23 -25 (22)------------------ DC POWER GND -26 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-22 -27 (24)------------------ 158J1-J

DIG AUDIO BUS 1 (L) -29 -T-S---------------S-- DIG AUDIO BUS 1 (H) -42 -T-S---------------S-- FIG. 6-23 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND SPARE STAT IN (DIG AUD) AUD AUX SQUELCH MLS MORSE ID (H) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED -30 -31 -32 -33 -34 -35

VOR/ILS EMER AUDIO (H) -36 (24)-T-S-----------S-- VOR/ILS EMER AUDIO (L) -51 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-29 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND RESERVED VOR/ILS POWER RETURN VOR/ILS +28 V DC POWER -37 -38 (22)------------------ DC POWER GND 164J1B-39 (22)------------------ FIG. 6-1

22-05-14

Page 3-119 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT (cont) RNZ-851 IO BP (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (O) (P) (P) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (P) (B) (B) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) Function NAV STRAP +5 V DC Connector Pin 164J1B-40 -44 -45 -47 -48 -49 -50 -52 -56 -57 -58 -59 -84 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 -67 -68 (24)----------------- (24)----------------- FIG. 6-22 (24)----------------- (24)----------------- (22)----------------- DC POWER GND (22)----------------- FIG. 6-1 Connects To

(24)----------------- FIG. 6-22 (24)----------------- COOLING FAN (BLUE)

FAN 28 V DC POWER RETURN AUDIO AUX XMT RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED VOR/ILS POWER RETURN VOR/ILS +28 V DC POWER EFIS/MLS RIGHT NAV NAV NAV NAV STRAP STRAP STRAP STRAP SIDE SPARE DATA CLK WD LOAD

RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED ILS MODE RESERVED RESERVED DIG AUDIO BUS SHLD ADF 26 V AC 400 HZ

RSB PRIMARY (H) -71 -T-S--------------S-- RSB PRIMARY (L) -81 -T-S--------------S-- FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND ADF SYNTH CLOCK ADF RS 422 TXD B ADF RS 422 TXD A -72 -73 -100

VOR/ILS MKR LAMP (O) -74 (28 V/OPEN) RESERVED -75 RESERVED -76 RESERVED -78 RESERVED -79 NAV STRAP SIDE SELECT -80 SEC RSB BUS SHIELD 164J1B-85

(24)----------------- FIG. 6-22

22-05-14

Page 3-120 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT (cont) RNZ-851 IO BP (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) Function ADF ON/OFF NAV AUX SHIFT LD (L) NAV AUX SHIFT LD (H) VOR RS-422 SD 1 (H) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED PRIMARY RSB BUS SHIELD EFIS/MLS LEFT CLU GND ADF LOCK VOR/ILS RS-422 SD 2B RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED Connector Pin 164J1B-87 -88 -90 -89 -91 -92 -93 -95 -96 -98 (24)-T-S----------S-RESERVED FOR OPTIONAL FMS (SEE J1A-59) Connects To

(22)------------------ DC POWER GND

-99 -102 (24)------------------ 144J1-E -103 -104 164J1B-106

22-05-14

Page 3-121 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT (cont) RNZ-851 IO BP (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function ADF RF INPUT 1 ADF RF INPUT 2 VOR/LOC ANT GS ANT MKR BEAC ANT DME ANT Connector Pin 164J2-1 164J2-2 NC 164J3-1 164J3-2 164J4-1 164J4-2 164J5-1 164J5-2 164J6-1 164J6-2 Connects To

158J1-E -(TRIAX)-IS-OS--IS-OS- 158J1-F SHIELD GND ----S--------------S-- VOR/LOC 1 ANT SHIELD GND ----S--------------S-- GS 1 ANT SHIELD GND ----S--------------S-- MKR BEAC 1 ANT SHIELD GND ----S--------------S-- DME 1 ANT SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-122 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

CLEARANCE DELIVERY UNIT CD-850 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (P) (P) (P) (B) (B)

ON/OFF OUTPUT 165J1-A AUDIO INPUT HIGH -B WEIGHT ON WHEELS SENSE -C (24)-----------------(GND WHEN WOW=GND) 5 V AC/DC LIGHTING INPUT -D (24)-T-S-----------S-LIGHTING COMMON -Z (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND 28 V DC POWER INPUT -E (22)-----------------NAV AUX SHIFT/LOAD -F (24)-T-S-----------S-INPUT BUS (+) NAV AUX SHIFT/LOAD -G (24)-T-S-----------S-INPUT BUS (-) SHIELD GND

165J1-L, 165J1-q FIG. 6-7 DC GND SHIELD GND FIG. 6-1 C164J1B-90 C164J1B-88 SHIELD GND

(B) (B)

SPARE -I COM AUX OUTPUT BUS (+) -H (24)-T-S-----------S-- C143J1-33 COM AUX OUTPUT BUS (-) -J (24)-T-S-----------S-- C143J1-25 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND COM AUX OUTPUT BUS -p SHIELD GND PRIMARY RSB BUS (-) -R (24)-T-S-----------S--- PRIMARY RSB BUS (+) -g (24)-T-S-----------S--- FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND RSB SHLD GND -K WIDE BAND SELECT INPUT -L (24)------------------- 165J1-q, 165J1-C NAV AUX OUTPUT BUS (+) -M (24)-T-S-----------S-- C164J1A-70 NAV AUX OUTPUT BUS (-) -N (24)-T-S-----------S-- C164J1A-58 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND NAV AUX OUTPUT BUS -d SHIELD GND NAV AUX CLOCK INPUT BUS (-)-P (24)-T-S------------S-- C164J1A-72 NAV AUX CLOCK INPUT BUS (+)-f (24)-T-S------------S-- C164J1A-69 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND NAV AUX CLOCK BUS SHLD GND 165J1-r

(B) (B)

(I) (B) (B)

(B) (B)

22-05-14

Page 3-123 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

CLEARANCE DELIVERY UNIT (cont) CD-850 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (I) (I)

SPARE 165J1-Q NAV AUDIO INPUT LOW -S ROTOR MOD FILTER INPUT -T 0/300 DEG. ELECT INPUT -U VSMA 7.9 V/11.8 V MAX INPUT-V POST FAIL ANNUN OUTPUT -W CD/COM/NAV SELECT (+) -X WEIGHT ON WHEELS 165J1-Y (24)------------------- FIG. 6-2

22-05-14

Page 3-124 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

CLEARANCE DELIVERY UNIT (cont) CD-850 IO BP Function 28 V DC LIGHTING INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT HIGH Connector Pin 165J1-a -b -c -e Connects To

AUDIO OUTPUT LOW SYNCHRO/RSB COMPASS INPUT

(P)

(I) (O)

NAV AUDIO INPUT HIGH -h RMI REL/MAG BEARING INPUT -i POWER GROUND -j (22)-----------------AUDIO SHLD GND -k SPARE -l CD/COM/NAV SELECT -m SIDE SELECT -n SPARE -o JUMPER GND -q (24)-----------------NAV AUDIO SHLD GND -s AUDIO INPUT LOW -t SPARE -u SPARE -v SPARE -w SPARE -x SPARE -y SPARE 165J1-z

DC GND

165J1-C,165J1-L

22-05-14

Page 3-125 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER IC-600 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

ADI VIDEO + 190J1A-1 ADI VIDEO -2 SPARE -3 ADI COLOR 0 + -4 ADI COLOR 0 -5 SPARE -6 ADI COLOR 1 + -7 ADI COLOR 1 -8 SPARE -9 ADI COLOR 2 + -10 ADI COLOR 2 -11 SPARE -12 ADI COLOR 3 + -13 ADI COLOR 3 -14 SPARE -15 ADI FLYBACK + -16 ADI FLYBACK -17 SPARE -18 ADI PRIMARY TUBE VALID -19 ADI RASTER/STROKE + -20 ADI RASTER/STROKE -21 SPARE -22 ADI PRIMARY STROKE READY + -23 ADI PRIMARY STROKE READY -24 ADI SEC STROKE READY + -25 ADI SEC STROKE READY -26 ADI SEC TUBE VALID -27 HSI VIDEO + -28 HSI VIDEO -29 SPARE -30 HSI COLOR 0 + -31 HSI COLOR 0 -32 SPARE -33 HSI COLOR 1 + -34 HSI COLOR 1 -35 SPARE -36 HSI COLOR 2 + -37 HSI COLOR 2 -38 SPARE 190J1A-39

RESERVED

22-05-14

Page 3-126 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

HSI COLOR 3 + 190J1A-40 HSI COLOR 3 -41 SPARE -42 HSI FLYBACK + -43 HSI FLYBACK -44 SPARE -45 HSI PRIMARY TUBE VALID -46 HSI RASTER/STROKE + -47 HSI RASTER/STROKE -48 SPARE -49 HSI PRIMARY STROKE READY + -50 HSI PRIMARY STROKE READY -51 HSI SEC STROKE READY + HSI SEC STROKE READY HSI SEC TUBE VALID ADI X ADI X SPARE ADI Y ADI Y SPARE HSI X HSI X SPARE HSI Y HSI Y SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE DEFLECTION + DEFLECTION DEFLECTION + DEFLECTION DEFLECTION + DEFLECTION DEFLECTION + DEFLECTION -52 -53 -54 -55 -56 -57 -58 -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 -67 -68 -69 -70 -71 -72 -73 -74 190J1A-75

RESERVED

22-05-14

Page 3-127 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (I) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

MANUAL TRIM DN 190J1A-76 MANUAL TRIM UP -77 MANUAL TRIM ENABLE -78 SPARE DIS IN 28/OPEN P3 -79 RESERVED -80 RESERVED -81 AILERON POSITION POT 1(H) -82 AILERON POSITION POT 1(W) -83 AILERON POSITION REF -84 SHIELD GND ELEVATOR POSITION POT 1(H) ELEVATOR POSITION POT 1(W) ELEVATOR POSITION REF RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SIM COM RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED COS COM RESERVED RESERVED FOR PRI ADF BRG FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR PRI PRI PRI PRI PRI PRI ADF ADF ADF ADF ADF ADF BRG BRG BRG BRG BRG BRG SIN X Y COS Z -85 -86 -87 -88 -89 -90 -91 -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 -100 -101

(22)---------------- PLT ACFT TRIM SW, (22)---------------- FIG. 6-19

(22)-T-S--------S--AILERON POSN SENSOR (22)-T-S--------S--FIG. 6-20 (22)------------- SHIELD GND

-102 -103 -104 -105 190J1A-106

22-05-14

Page 3-128 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(I)

(I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

RESERVED FOR PRI DME 190J1B-1 DME CLK + RESERVED FOR PRIMARY -2 DME DATA + RESERVED FOR PRIMARY -3 DME COMMON RESERVED FOR PRIMARY -4 DME ENABLE RESERVED FOR PRIMARY DME HOLD -5 RESERVED FOR SEC DME CLK + -6 RESERVED FOR SEC DME DATA + -7 RESERVED FOR SEC DME COMMON -8 RESERVED FOR SEC DME ENABLE -9 RESERVED FOR SEC DME HOLD -10 RESERVED FOR PS + IN -11 RESERVED FOR PS = IN -12 RESERVED ANALOG IN -13 +28 VDC INPUT N2 OVERRIDE -14 (24)---------------RESERVED -15 RESERVED -16 RESERVED -17 RESERVED -18 RESERVED -19 RESERVED -20 LAMP TEST IN -21 (24)---------------HDG PB IN -22 (24)---------------NAV PB IN APPROACH PB IN ALT PB IN SPD PB IN FLC PB IN GA IN VS PB IN SPARE RESERVED FOR BARO SET INPUT (WIPER) -23 -24 (24)----------------25 (24)----------------26 (24)----------------27 (24)----------------28 (24)----------------29 (24)----------------30 (24)----------------31 190J1B-32

MAINT SWITCH

FIG. 6-8 11J1-11, C190J1B-22 11J1-13, C190J1B-24 11J1-14, C190J1B-25 11J1-15, C190J1B-26 11J1-16, C190J1B-27 11J1-17, C190J1B-28 FIG. 6-18 11J1-19, C190J1B-30

22-05-14

Page 3-129 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (O) (O) (O) (O) Function Connector Pin (24)---------------(24)---------------(24)---------------(24)---------------Connects To 144J1-w FIG. 6-33 11J1-33 11J1-32, C190J1B-37

SPARE 190J1B-33 EICAS DISPLAYED ON RMU -34 MASTER CAUTION LAMP OUTPUT -35 LMP DRVR OUT 3 FD1 ON -36 LMP DRVR OUT 4 FLC -37 RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SPARE DIS G/0 SPARE DIS IN 28/0 P7 SPARE AN DC SPARE AN DC MASTER WARNING INPUT FROM AWC

(I) (I)

-38 -39 -40 -41 -42 -43 -44 (24)----------------

(I)

SPARE DIS IN 28/0 P6 RESERVED FOR SEC SRN LATERAL DEV + RESERVED FOR SEC SRN LATERAL -47 DEV FD 1 ON PB -48 RESERVED FOR SPARE DIS IN -49 28/0 P9 RESERVED FOR SEC GS DEV + -50 RESERVED FOR SEC GS DEV -51 RESERVED FOR ROT/YAW RATE -52 5 V VALID RESERVED FOR ROT/YAW RATE + -53 RESERVED FOR ROT/YAW RATE -54 RESERVED FOR COMPASS SYNC + -55 RESERVED FOR COMPASS SYNC -56 RESERVED FOR INNER MARKER -57 BEC + RESERVED FOR INNER MARKER -58 BEC RESERVED FOR MIDDLE MARKER + -59 RESERVED FOR MIDDLE MARKER - -60 RESERVED FOR OUTER MARKER + -61 RESERVED FOR OUTER MARKER -62 RESERVED -63 RESERVED -64 TRIM POSN SENSOR 1 (H) -65 TRIM POSN SENSOR 1 (L) -66 SHIELD GND TRIM POSN SENSOR 2 (H) -67 TRIM POSN SENSOR 2 (L) -68 SHIELD GND RESERVED -69 RESERVED 190J1B-70

AURAL WARNING COMP, (FIG. 6-33) -45 (RESERVED FOR JOYSTICK INPUT - RIGHT) -46

(24)----------------

11J1-7

(24)-T-S---------S-(24)-T-S---------S- (24)-T-S---------S-(24)-T-S---------S-

HSCU LEFT SURFACE POSN SHIELD GND HSCU RIGHT SURFACE POSN SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-130 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (I) (I) (I)

RESERVED 190J1B-71 RESERVED -72 RESERVED -73 RESERVED -74 RESERVED -75 SPARE DIS IN 28/O P11 -76 SPARE DIS IN 28/O P1 -77 STALL WARNING 28 VDC DISCRETE -78 COMPUTER SPARE DIS IN 28/0 P5 -79 RESERVED FOR SEC AC REF + -80 RESERVED FOR SEC AC REF -81 RESERVED FOR SEC PITCH X RESERVED FOR SEC PITCH Y RESERVED FOR SEC PITCH Z RESERVED FOR SEC ROLL X RESERVED FOR SEC ROLL Y RESERVED FOR SEC ROLL Z RESERVED FOR SEC HDG X RESERVED FOR SEC HDG Y RESERVED FOR SEC HDG Z RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SPARE RESERVED SIN COM RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED COS COM RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED FOR SEC ADF BRG FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR SEC SEC SEC SEC SEC SEC ADF ADF ADF ADF ADF ADF BRG BRG BRG BRG BRG BRG SIN X Y COS Z -82 -83 -84 -85 -86 -87 -88 -89 -90 -91 -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 -100 -101

(RESERVED FOR JOYSTICK INPUT - UP) (RESERVED FOR JOYSTICK INPUT - DOWN) (24)---------------- STALL PROTECTION (RESERVED FOR JOYSTICK INPUT - LEFT)

-102 -103 -104 -105 190J1B-106

22-05-14

Page 3-131 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) Function DGC DGC DGC DGC DGC DGC PRI DGC DGC +28 V DC POWER +28 V DC POWER +28 V DC POWER DC POWER GND DC POWER GND DC POWER GND CPU LAMP RETURN SIGNAL GND SIGNAL GND Connector Pin 190J2A-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 (20)----------------(20)----------------(20)----------------(20)----------------(20)----------------(20)----------------(20)----------------(22)----------------(22)----------------Connects To FIG. 6-1 FIG. 6-1 FIG. 6-1 DC PWR GND DC PWR GND DC PWR GND DC PWR GND SIGNAL GND SIGNAL GND 115J1-55 115J1-53 115J1-54 SHIELD GND 115J1-34 115J1-35 SHIELD GND 59J1-m 59J1-n SHIELD GND FIG. 6-21 FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GND FMS (H), C190J2A-21 FMS (L), C190J2A-22 SHIELD GND MAINTENANCE COMPUTER SHIELD GND

-10 V REF OUT 10 V RTN (DH REFERENCE) +10 V REF OUT (DH REFERENCE) DECISION HEIGHT INPUT WIPER SHIELD GND SPARE PRIMARY DC-550 PRIMARY DC-550 + SHIELD GND

-11 -10 (24)-T-S---------S--12 (24)-T-S---------S--13 (24)-T-S---------S- -14 -15 (24)-T-S---------S--16 (24)-T-S---------S- -17 (24)-T-S---------S--18 (24)-T-S---------S- -19 (24)-T-S---------S--20 (24)-T-S---------S- -21 (24)-T-S---------S- -22 (24)-T-S---------S- -23 (24)-T-S---------S--24 (24)-T-S---------S-

(B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B)

WX CONTROL BUS (H) WX CONTROL BUS (L) SHIELD GND PRIMARY RSB (H) PRIMARY RSB (L) SHIELD GND ARINC 429 CH 0 IN ARINC 429 CH 0 IN (H) LRNA (L) LRNA SHIELD GND

(B) (B)

ARINC 429 CH 2 IN (H) ARINC 429 CH 2 IN (L) SHIELD GND RESERVED ARINC 429 CH 12 IN (L) SHIELD GND RESERVED RESERVED

(B)

-25 -26 (24)-T-S---------S-- RESERVED (TS WITH 190J2A-40) SHIELD GND

-27 190J2A-28

22-05-14

Page 3-132 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) Function ARINC 429 CH 4 IN (PRI AHRS) ARINC 429 CH 4 IN (PRI AHRS) (H) Connector Pin 190J2A-29 (24)-T-S---------S- (L) -30 (24)-T-S---------S-SHIELD GND -31 (24)-T-S---------S--32 (24)-T-S---------S- Connects To 1J1B-G7, FIG. 6-10 1J1B-G8 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-12 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-10 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-11 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-12 SHIELD GND FMS ARINC IN 1 (H) TS W\ 52 PROVISION (TS WITH 190J2A-26) FIG. 6-12 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-11 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND 20J1-Y,193RMP-2K, 193RBP-3C, C190J2A-49

ARINC 429 CH 6 IN (H) ARINC 429 CH 6 IN (L) (DAU 2 CH B) SHIELD GND

AP ARINC 429 CH 0 IN (H) (AHRS)-33 (24)-T-S---------S-AP ARINC 429 CH 0 IN (L) (AHRS)-34 (24)-T-S---------S-SHIELD GND AP ARINC 429 CH 1 IN (H) (MADC)-35 (24)-T-S---------S-AP ARINC 429 CH 1 IN (L) (MADC)-36 (24)-T-S---------S-SHIELD GND ARINC 429 OUTPUT TO DAU (H) ARINC 429 OUTPUT TO DAU (L) SHIELD GND 429 LRN OUT (HI) ARINC 429 CH 12 IN (H) ARINC 429 CH 8 IN (H) ARINC 429 CH 8 IN (L) (DAU 2 CH A) SHIELD GND ARINC 429 CH 10 IN (H) (SEC MADC) ARINC 429 CH 10 IN (L) (SEC MADC) SHIELD GND DU HDLC INPUT2 BUS (H) DU HDLC INPUT2 BUS (L) DU HDLC INPUT2 BUS (T) SHIELD GND RESERVED RADAR ALT 28 V VALID -37 (24)-T-S---------S--38 (24)-T-S---------S- -39 (24)-T-S------------40 (24)-T-S---------S--41 (24)-T-S---------S--42 (24)-T-S---------S- -43 (24)-T-S---------S- -44 (24)-T-S---------S- -45 (24)-T-S---------S--46 (24)-T-S---------S--47

(I)

-48 190J2A-49 (24)----------------

22-05-14

Page 3-133 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (I) (I) Function RADAR ALT + RADAR ALT Connector Pin 190J2A-51 (24)-T-S---------S--50 (24)-T-S---------S- SHIELD GND -52 (24)-T-S---------S- -53 -54 (24)----------------55 -56 -57 (24)-T-S---------S- -58 (24)-T-S---------S- -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 Connects To 20J1-W, C190J2A-51 20J1-N, 193RMP-2J, 193RBP-3B, C190J2A-50 SHIELD GND FMS ARINC IN 1 (L) TS W\ 39 SHIELD GND SIGNAL GND TEST CONNECTOR, C190J2A-57 TEST CONNECTOR, C190J2A-58, (FIG. 6-34) SHIELD GND

(B)

429 LRN OUT (LO) SHIELD GND RESERVED LEFT SIDE SELECT AP XMIT (H) AP XMIT (L) DGC-DGC/FTSU BUS (H) DGC-DGC/FTSU BUS (L) SHIELD GND SPARE DISC IN PB P3 SPARE FLAP SELECTION LANDING GEAR CMD DISCRETE SPEED BRAKES DEPLOYED CROSS-SIDE SG REV WEIGHT ON WHEELS (WOW) RESERVED SYS CONFIG IDENT 1 SYS CONFIG IDENT 2 SYS CONFIG IDENT 3 SYS CONFIG IDENT 4 SYS CONFIG IDENT 5 SYS CONFIG IDENT 6 A/C TYPE IDENT 1 A/C TYPE IDENT 2 A/C TYPE IDENT 3 A/C TYPE IDENT 4 A/C TYPE IDENT 5 BENCH TEST IDENT 1 BENCH TEST IDENT 2

(I) (O) (O) (B) (B)

(I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

(24)---------------(24)---------------(24)---------------(24)---------------(24)----------------

LANDING GEAR LOGIC SPEED BRAKE FIG. 6-9 FIG. 6-2 GND FOR DISPLAY IN METRIC UNITS GND IF FMS INSTALLED GND IF DUAL ADF INSTALLED GND FOR CROSSPOINTER FD CMD GND TO ENABLE CATII LOGIC SIGNAL GND SIGNAL GND

-67 -68 (24)----------------69 (24)----------------70 (24)----------------71 -72 -73 -74 -75 -76 -77 190J2A-78 (24)--------------(24)--------------(24)---------------

22-05-14

Page 3-134 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP Function BENCH TEST IDENT 3 BENCH TEST IDENT 4 (B) (B) (B) (B) Connector Pin 190J2A-79 -80 -81 (24)-T-S---------S--82 (24)-T-S---------S- FIG. 6-12 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-10 SHIELD GND Connects To

ARINC 429 CH 9 IN (H) ARINC 429 CH 9 IN (L) (DAU 1 CH A) SHIELD GND

(B) (B) (B) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O)

ARINC 429 CH 11 IN (H) -83 (24)-T-S---------S-ARINC 429 CH 11 IN (L) -84 (24)-T-S---------S-(SEC AHRS) SHIELD GND RESERVED -85 RESERVED -86 RESERVED -87 RESERVED -88 RESERVED -89 DIN GROUND OUTPUT -90 RS232 SERIAL DATA OUT -91 (24)---------------- RS232 SERIAL DATA IN -92 (24)---------------- RS232 SERIAL DATA GND -93 (24)---------------- ALT ALERT HORN OUT -94 (24)---------------DECISION HEIGHT WARN OUT -95 (24)---------------MASTER COMP MON OUT (RESERVED)-96 TEST OUT (RAD ALT) -97 (24)---------------BANK ANNUNC OUT -98 (24)---------------COUPLE ANNUNC OUT RESERVED ANNUNC OUT VS MODE ANNUNC OUT IAS MODE ANNUNC OUT ALT MODE ANNUNC OUT APR MODE ANNUNC OUT NAV MODE ANNUNC OUT HDG MODE ANNUNC OUT -99 (24)----------------100 -101 (24)---------------102 (24)---------------103 (24)---------------104 (24)---------------105 (24)--------------190J2A-106 (24)---------------

FIG. 6-34 AUDIO WARNING SYS AUDIO WARNING SYS 20J1-T,C190J2A-97 11J1-27, C190J2A-98 11J1-25 11J1-34, C190J2A-101 11J1-31, C190J2A-102 11J1-30, C190J2A-103 11J1-29, C190J2A-104 11J1-28, C190J2A-105 11J1-26, C190J2A-106

22-05-14

Page 3-135 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (B) Function SERVO + 28 V POWER SERVO + 28 V POWER SERVO + 28 V POWER SERVO + 28 V POWER RESERVED SERVO DC POWER GND SERVO DC POWER GND SERVO DC POWER GND SERVO DC POWER GND HDLC OUT + (DU) SHIELD GND (B) Connector Pin 190J2B-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 Connects To

(20)----------------- (20)----------------- FIG. 6-1 (20)----------------- (20)----------------- (20)----------------(20)----------------(20)----------------(20)----------------DC DC DC DC PWR PWR PWR PWR GND GND GND GND

-10 (24)-T-S---------S--11 (24)-T-S---------S-

FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND WINDSHEAR COMPUTER, C190J2B-13 (TS WITH 190J2B-26) FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND AURAL WARNING COMP, FIG. 6-33 AURAL WARNING COMP, FIG. 6-33 FIG. 6-33

RESERVED ARINC 429 OUTPUT (H) -12 ARINC 429 CH 13 IN (H) -13 (24)-T-S---------S-(WINDSHEAR) HDLC IN #1 (H) HDLC IN #1 (L) SHIELD GND HDLC IN #3 (H) HDLC IN #3 (L) SHIELD GND MASTER CAUTION TO AWC MASTER WARNING TO AWC MASTER WARNING LAMP RESERVED RESERVED ARINC 429 CH 3 IN (H) (PRI MADC) ARINC 429 CH 3 IN (L) (PRI MADC) SHIELD GND -14 (24)-T-S---------S--15 (24)-T-S---------S- -16 (24)-T-S---------S--17 (24)-T-S---------S- -18 (24)----------------19 (24)----------------

(B) (B) (B) (B) (O) (O) (O) (B) (B)

-20 (24)----------------21 -22 -23 (24)-T-S---------S-- 9J1-60, FIG. 6-11 -24 (24)-T-S---------S-- 9J1-61, SHIELD GND

(B)

RESERVED ARINC 429 OUTPUT (L) -25 ARINC 429 CH 13 IN (L) 190J2B-26 (24)-T-S---------S-(WINDSHEAR) SHIELD GND

WINDSHEAR COMPUTER, C190J2B-26 (TS WITH 190J2B-13) SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-136 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) Function Connector Pin Connects To FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND 193RMP-7C 193RMP-7D, SHIELD GND FIG. 6-12 SHIELD GND

ARINC 429 CH 15 IN (H) 190J2B-27 (24)-T-S---------S-(PFD) ARINC 429 CH 15 IN (L) (PFD) -28 (24)-T-S---------S-SHIELD GND ARINC 429 CH 5 IN (H) (TCAS) ARINC 429 CH 5 IN (L) (TCAS) SHIELD GND ARINC 429 CH 7 IN (H) ARINC 429 CH 7 IN (L) (DAU 1 CH B) SHIELD GND RESERVED ARINC 429 OUT (H) RESERVED ARINC 429 OUT (L) -29 (24)-T-S---------S--30 (24)-T-S---------S- -31 (24)-T-S---------S--32 (24)-T-S---------S- -33 -34 -35 -36 -37 -38 -39 -40 -41 -42 -43 -44 -45 (24)----------------46 -47 -48 (24)----------------49 (24)----------------50 190J2B-51 (22)----------------

(I) (I)

ALT ALERT ANNUNC OUT PRIMARY AC REF + PRIMARY AC REF RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SECONDARY TRIM UP

SECONDARY TRIM UP SWITCH FIG. 6-9 SECONDARY TRIM DOWN SWITCH DC PWR GND

(I)

SG 1 REVERSION SECONDARY TRIM DN RESERVED AP LAMP RETURN

(I)

22-05-14

Page 3-137 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (B) (B) (I) (I) Function RESERVED SECONDARY RSB (H) SECONDARY RSB (L) COUPLE PB INPUT BANK PB INPUT SPARE DISC IN PB P1 SPARE DISC IN PB P2 +15 V EXTERNAL OUT Connector Pin 190J2B-52 -53 (24)-T-S---------S--54 (24)-T-S---------S-SHIELD GND -55 (24)----------------56 (24)----------------57 -58 -59 (24)--------------Connects To FIG. 6-21 FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GND 11J1-10, C190J2B-55 11J1-12, C190J2B-56 129J1-C, 11J1-21, FIG. 6-20 129J1-A, FIG. 6-20 FIG. 6-20

(O) (O)

(I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O)

-15 V EXTERNAL OUT -60 (24)--------------15 V RETURN -61 (24)--------------RESERVED FOR LAT ACCEL INPUT -62 RESERVED FOR LAT ACCEL TEST -63 OUT RESERVED FOR NORMAL ACCEL -64 INPUT RESERVED FOR LONGT ACCEL INPUT-65 MAN TRIM UP -66 (24)---------------MAN TRIM DN -67 (24)---------------PITCH WHEEL IN + -68 (24)-T-S---------S-PITCH WHEEL IN -69 (24)-T-S---------S-SHIELD GND TCS 28 V INPUT RESERVED SPARE TURN KNOB INPUT SPARE TURN KNOB OUT OF DETENT AP DISCONNECT 28 V IN MOMENTARY HORN DISABLE YD OFF ANNUNC OUT LIGHT AND HORN DISABLE TRIM WARN ANNUNC OUT TRIM UP ANNUNC OUT IN/HPA OUT YD ENGAGE SELECT PB IN YD ENGAGE ANNUNC OUT AP ENGAGE SEL PB IN AP ENGAGE ANNUNC OUT 28 V YD CLUTCH -70 (24)----------------71 -72 -73 (24)----------------74 -75 (24)----------------76 -77 -78 -79 -80 -81 -82 -83 -84 -85 -86 190J2B-87 (22)---------------(22)---------------(22)---------------(22)---------------------NC (22)---------------(22)---------------(22)---------------(22)---------------(22)---------------(22)----------------

CPLT ACFT TRIM SW, FIG. 6-19 129J1-U 129J1-V SHIELD GND FIG. 6-17 129J1-B 129J1-H, C190J2B-75 FIG. 6-16 115J1-44 FIG. 6-15 115J1-42, 115J1-43 9J1-16 11J1-9 11J1-24 11J1-8 11J1-23 14J1-F

(I) (O) (I) (O) (O)

22-05-14

Page 3-138 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (O) (O) (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) (I) (O) (O) Function 28 V AP CLUTCH 28 V AP CLUTCH Connector Pin 190J2B-88 (22)----------------89 (22)---------------Connects To 12J1-F 115J1-27, 13J1-F, HSCU FIG. 6-16 AURAL WARNING COMP, FIG. 6-33 HSCU RETRACT HSCU EXTEND SHIELD GND 14J1-N 14J1-L SHIELD GND 14J1-B 14J1-A SHIELD GND 12J1-L 12J1-N SHIELD GND 12J1-A 12J1-B SHIELD GND 13J1-L 13J1-N SHIELD GND 13J1-A 13J1-B SHIELD GND

AP DISCONNECT 28 VIN -90 (20)---------------MASTER CAUTION INPUT FROM AWC -91 (24)---------------PITCH TRIM OUT + PITCH TRIM OUT -92 (22)-T-S---------S--93 (22)-T-S---------S-SHIELD GND RIGHT SIDE SELECT IN -94 RUDDER SERVO TACH FB IN + -95 (24)-T-S---------S-RUDDER SERVO TACH FB IN -96 (24)-T-S---------S-SHIELD GND RUDDER SERVO OUT (H) RUDDER SERVO OUT (L) SHIELD GND -97 (18)-T-S---------S--98 (18)-T-S---------S-

AILERON SERVO TACH FB IN + -99 (24)-T-S--------S-AILERON SERVO TACH FB IN -100 (24)-T-S--------S-SHIELD GND AILERON SERVO OUT (H) -101 (18)-T-S--------S-AILERON SERVO OUT (L) -102 (18)-T-S--------S-SHIELD GND ELEVATOR SERVO TACH FB IN + -103 (24)-T-S--------S-ELEVATOR SERVO TACH FB IN -104 (24)-T-S--------S-SHIELD GND ELEVATOR SERVO OUT (H) -105 (18)-T-S--------S-ELEVATOR SERVO OUT (L) 190J2B-106 (18)-T-S--------S-SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-139 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

TCAS COMPUTER RT-910 IO BP Function SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE TA ENABLE CORRECT AURAL ADVISE SPARE SPARE CLIMB INHIB 1 PREVENT AURAL ADVISE TRAFFIC AURAL ADVISE SPARE SPARE ADVISORY COMMON SPARE 8 OHM AUDIO H L ANALOG RAD ALT 1 H L Connector Pin Connects To

(O)

(O) (O)

193RMP-1A -1B -1C -1D -1E -1F (24)---------------- TO AUDIO SYS -1G -1H -1J 193RMP-1K (24)---------------- TO AUDIO SYS 193RMP-2A -2B -2C -2D -2E -2F -2G -2H -2J (24)---------------- TO AUDIO SYS

(O) (O) (I) (I)

(24)----------------(24)----------------(24)--T-S---------S-(24)--T-S---------S- SHIELD GND

TO TCAS SPEAKER 20J1-X, 193RBP-3A 20J1-N, 193RBP-3B, 190J2A-50, C190J2A-50 SHIELD GND

(I)

ANALOG RAD ALT 1 VALID CORRECT VISUAL ADVISE PREVENT VISUAL ADVISE TRAFFIC VISUAL ADVISE ADVISORY ANN CANCEL SPARE 600 OHM AUDIO H L SPARE SPARE SPARE PITCH ATTITUDE ATTUTUDE SHIELDS ROLL ATTITUDE X Y Z X Y

193RMP-2K (24)----------------- 20J1-Y, 193RBP-3C, 190J2A-49, C190J2A-49 193RMP-3A -3B -3C -3D -3E -3F (24)--T-S---------S-- AURAL WARNING -3G (24)--T-S---------S-- UNIT SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -3H -3J 193RMP-3K 193RMP-4A -4B -4C -4D -4E 193RMP-4F

22-05-14

Page 3-140 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

TCAS COMPUTER (CONT) RT-910 IO BP Function 26 VAC ATT REF ATTITUDE VALID MAG HDG SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE 26 VAC VAC REF (I) (B) (B) AIR GROUND FMS 429 BUS (LO SPD) MAG HDG VALID FMS PERFORM LIMIT MAX ALT LIM PRG A B X Y Z Z H L Connector Pin 193RMP-4G -4H -4J 193RMP-4K 193RMP-5A -5B -5C -5D -5E -5F -5G -5H -5J 193RMP-5K (24)------------------ TO WOW SWITCH, FIG. 6-2 193RMP-6A -6B -6C -6D -6E -6F -6G -6H -6J 193RMP-6K Connects To

H L

#1 #2 #3 #4 #5

PRG COMMON PITCH ATT 429 BUS (B) TA/RA DISP 1 429

A 193RMP-7A B -7B A -7C (24)-T-S-----------S-- 190J2B-29, B -7D (24)-T-S-----------S-- 190J2B-30, SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -7E (24)------------------ SIGNAL GND -7F -7G (24)-T-S-----------S-- C190J2B-29 -7H (24)-T-S-----------S-- C190J2B-30 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -7J (24)------------------ SIGNAL GND 193RMP-7K

(I)

TA DISP 1 STATUS SPARE TA/RA DISP 2 429

A B

(I)

TA DISP 2 STATUS SPARE

22-05-14

Page 3-141 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

TCAS COMPUTER (CONT) RT-910 IO BP Function DATA LOAD XMIT 429 BUS SPARE 429 IN BUS SPARE 429 IN BUS SPARE 429 IN BUS SPARE 429 IN BUS DATA LOAD RCVR 429 BUS SPARE 429 OUT BUS SPARE 429 OUT BUS SPARE 429 OUT BUS SPARE 429 OUT BUS SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B Connector Pin 193RMP-8A -8B -8C -8D -8E -8F -8G -8H -8J 193RMP-8K 193RMP-9A -9B -9C -9D -9E -9F -9G -9H -9J 193RMP-9K 193RMP-10A -10B -10C -10D -10E -10F -10G -10H -10J 193RMP-10K 193RMP-11A -11B -11C -11D -11E -11F 193RMP-11G Connects To

22-05-14

Page 3-142 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

TCAS COMPUTER (CONT) RT-910 IO BP Function SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE ANALOG RAD ALT SELECT TA/RA BLK XFER PRG SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE RA DISP 1 429 OUT BUS RA DISP 2 429 OUT BUS (I) (I) RA DISP 2 STATUS LAND GEAR UP/DN CLIMB INHIB 2 RAD ALT 1 429 BUS (O) (B) (B) (I) (B) (B) (B) (B) TCAS VAILD TX COORD 2 429 BUS A B A B A B Connector Pin 193RMP-11H -11J 193RMP-11K 193RMP-12A -12B -12C (24)----------------- SIGNAL GND -12D -12E -12F -12G -12H -12J 193RMP-12K 193RMP-13A -13B -13C -13D -13E (24)----------------- SIGNAL GND -13F (24)----------------- LANDING GEAR SYS (GND=GEAR DN) -13G -13H -13J -13K Connects To

A 193RMP-14A (24)-T-S----------S-- C143J1-90 B -14B (24)-T-S----------S-- C143J1-104 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -14C (24)----------------- SIGNAL GND -14D -14E -14F (24)-T-S----------S-- 143J1-55 -14G (24)-T-S----------S-- 143J1-87 SHIELD GND

RA DISP 1 STATUS SPARE 429 IN BUS

A B XT COORD 1 429 BUS A B SHIELD GND XT COORD 2 429 BUS

A -14H (24)-T-S----------S-- C143J1-55 B -14J (24)-T-S----------S-- C143J1-87 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND 193RMP-14K

SPARE

22-05-14

Page 3-143 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

TCAS COMPUTER (CONT) RT-910 IO BP Function SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE TX COORD 1 429 BUS Connector Pin Connects To

(B) (B)

193RMP-15A -15B -15C -15D -15E -15F -15G -15H A -15J (24)-T-S----------S-- 143J1-90 B 193RMP-15K (24)-T-S----------S-- 143J1-104 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

(O) (O) (O)

SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE FLIGHT RECORDER

193RBP-1A -1B -1C -1D -1E -1F -1G #1 BIT 18 -1H #2 BIT 19 -1J #3 BIT 20 193RBP-1J 193RBP-2A -2B -2C -2D -2E -2F -2G #4 BIT 21 -2H #5 BIT 22 -2J #6 BIT 23 193RBP-2J H L 193RBP-3A (24)-T-S----------S-- 20J1-X, 193RMP-2H -3B (24)-T-S----------S-- 20J1-N, 193RMP-2J, 190J2A-50, C190J2A-50 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

(O) (O) (O) (I) (I)

SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE FLIGHT RECORDER

ANALOG RAD ALT 2

(I)

ANALOG RAD ALT 2 VALID 193RBP-3C (24)----------------- 20J1-Y, 193RMP-2K, 190J2A-49, C190J2A-49

22-05-14

Page 3-144 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

TCAS COMPUTER (CONT) RT-910 IO BP Function RADIO ALTIMETER #2 429 H L Connector Pin Connects To

(O) (O) (O)

193RBP-3D -3E SPARE -3F SPARE -3G FLIGHT RECORDER #7 BIT 24 -3H #8 BIT 25 -3J #9 BIT 26 193RBP-3J SPARE 193RBP-4A SPARE -4B SPARE -4C SPARE -4D SPARE -4E SPARE -4F RA SELF TEST INH -4G (24)----------------- SIGNAL GND FLIGHT RECORDER #10 BIT 24 -4H #11 BIT 25 -4J #12 BIT 26 193RBP-4K ADVISORY INH #1 #2 #3 #4 INCREASE CLIMB INH #1 #2 #3 #4 CLIMB INHIB 3 CLIMB INHIB 4 DATA LOADER LINK A-B LATA LOADER #2 SPARE DATA LOADER #4 CMC/CFDIU 429 OUT A B CMC/CFDIU 429 IN A B SPARE SPARE 193RBP-5A -5B -5C -5D -5E -5F -5G -5H -5J 193RBP-5K 193RBP-6A -6B -6C -6D -6E -6F -6G -6H -6J 193RBP-6K

(O) (O) (O)

22-05-14

Page 3-145 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

TCAS COMPUTER (CONT) RT-910 IO BP Function AUDIO OUTPUT LEVEL Connector Pin Connects To TBD BY EMBRAER DURING INSTALLATION DESIGN

#1 193RBP-7A #2 -7B #3 -7C AUDIO TONE ENABLE -7D GND DISPLAY PROG -7E DISPLAY ALL TRAFFIC -7F ANTENNA CABLE DELAY #1 -7G #2 -7H #3 -7J PROGRAM COMMON 193RBP-7K SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE FUNC TEST INH TA/RASYM LIM PROG 193RBP-8A -8B -8C -8D -8E -8F -8G -8H -8J 193RBP-8K 193RBP-9A -9B -9C -9D -9E -9F -9G -9H -9J 193RBP-9K 193RBP-10A RECRD RECRD RECRD RECRD RECRD RECRD RECRD RECRD -10B -10C -10D -10E -10F -10G -10H -10J 193RBP-10K

#1 #2 #3 #4 #5

FACTORY FACTORY FACTORY FACTORY FACTORY FACTORY FACTORY FACTORY FACTORY ALS FLT RECRD ALS FLT RECRD ALS FLT ALS FLT ALS FLT ALS FLT ALS FLT ALS FLT ALS FLT ALS FLT FACTORY

TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST DATA TEST DATA TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA

22-05-14

Page 3-146 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

TCAS COMPUTER (CONT) RT-910 IO BP (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function TOP TOP TOP TOP BOT BOT BOT BOT ANTENNA ANTENNA ANTENNA ANTENNA ANTENNA ANTENNA ANTENNA ANTENNA Connector Pin 0 DEG 193LTP270 DEG 180 DEG 90 DEG93LTP 0 DEG 193LMP90 DEG 180 DEG 270 DEG193LMP H L H L 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 (COAX)--------------(COAX)--------------(COAX)--------------(COAX)--------------(COAX)--------------(COAX)--------------(COAX)--------------(COAX)--------------Connects To 194J1 194J2 194J3 194J4 195J1 195J2 195J3 195J4

115 VAC 400 HZ PWR SPARE 28 VDC SPARE

193LBP- 1 (20)----------------- 115 VAC PWR - 7 (12)----------------- 115 VAC PWR - 2 -10 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 9 - 6 - 8 -11 -12 193LBP-13 (22)----------------- TO COOLING FAN (22)----------------- TO COOLING FAN (12)----------------- SIGNAL GND (22)----------------- CHASSIS GND (24)----------------- FIG. 6-31

(O) (O) (O) (O) (I)

FAN POWER OUTPUT H (115 VAC) L SPARE SIGNAL GND CHASSIS GND MUTUAL SUPP PULSE IN MUTUAL SUPP PULSE OUT

22-05-14

Page 3-147 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE UNIT NO. 2 AH-800 IO BP (B) (B) (I) (I) (I) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) Function ASCB ONSIDE DATA (H) ASCB ONSIDE DATA (L) SHOP MAINTENANCE RESERVED RESERVED ASCB SIDE DATA (H) ASCB SIDE DATA (L) MEM MEM MEM MEM ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS DATA (TX) DATA (RX) COM MODE SEL Connector Pin C1J1A-C10 -C13 -E1 -E2 -E3 -F10 -F13 -H3 -H4 -H7 -H10 -K3 C1J1A-K5 --------------------- --------------------- FIG. 6-34 --------------------- (24)----------------- Connects To

ASCB BU DATA (H) ASCB BU DATA (L)

22-05-14

Page 3-148 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE UNIT NO. 2 AH-800 (cont) IO BP (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function PROGRAM PIN COMMON LAMP TEST (RESERVED) RESERVED RESERVED TEST COMMAND (RESERVED) SERIAL DATA OUT (H) SERIAL DATA OUT (L) SERIAL DATA IN (H) SERIAL DATA IN (L) AHRS FAIL ANNUNCIATOR -D2 BASIC MODE ANNUNCIATOR (RSVD) DISCRETE COMMON OVERTEMP WARN ANNUNCIATOR (RSVD) SLAVING FAIL ANNUNCIATOR (RSVD) DG MODE ANNUNCIATOR (RSVD) -D3 -D7 -E1 -E2 -E3 Connector Pin C1J1B-A1 -A7 -A8 -A9 -A10 (24)------------------- TEST SWITCH, FIG. 6-3 -B6 -B7 -B10 -B11 Connects To

ARINC 429 OUT #2 (H) -E5 (24)-T-S------------S-- FIG. ARINC 429 OUT #2 (L) -E6 (24)-T-S------------S-- 6-10 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND MAG HDG SYNCHRO (X) (RSVD) MAG HDG SYNCHRO (Y) (RSVD) MAG HDG SYNCHRO (Z) (RSVD) ALIGN ANNUNCIATOR (RSVD) MEMORY MEMORY MEMORY MEMORY MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE INHIBIT POWER RETURN CLOCK -E10 -E11 -E12 -F3 -F6 -F7 -F8 C1J1B-F9 (24)-----------------(24)-----------------(24)-----------------(24)-----------------MEM MEM MEM MEM MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE (ORN) (RED) (BLK) (YEL)

22-05-14

Page 3-149 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE UNIT NO. 2 AH-800 (cont) IO BP (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) Function Connector Pin Connects To

MEMORY MODULE DATA C1J1B-F11 (24)------------------ MEM MODULE (BRN) MAG HDG 26 V 400 HZ REF (RSVD) -F13 ARINC 429 OUT 4 (H) ARINC 429 OUT 4 (L) AHRS VALID (RSVD) MAG HDG VALID (RSVD) -F14 -F15 -G1 -G2

ARINC 429 OUT 1 (H) -G7 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. ARINC 429 OUT 1 (L) -G8 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-10 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND 26 V 400 HZ RET (RSVD) HEADING HEADING HEADING HEADING HEADING SLEW SLEW SLEW SLEW SLEW COM 0 1 2 3 -G13 -H1 -H2 -H3 -H4 -H5 -H6 (24)----------------- (24)----------------- FIG. 6-4 (24)-----------------

DG MODE SELECT FLUX FLUX FLUX FLUX VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE INPUT A INPUT B INPUT C COMMON F

(24)----------------- INSTRUMENT PANEL, FIG. 6-4 C4J1-A C4J1-B C4J1-C C4J1-F NC

-H8 (22)-T-S----------S--H9 (22)-T-S----------S--H10 (22)-T-S----------S--H11 (22)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND

FLUX VALVE EXCITATION D -H12 (22)-T-S-----------S-- C4J1-D FLUX VALVE EXCITATION E -H13 (22)-T-S-----------S-- C4J1-E SHIELD GND NC ARINC 429 IN #2 (H) ARINC 429 IN #2 (L) AUX POWER ANNUNCIATOR (RSVD) -J10 -J11 C1J1B-J15

22-05-14

Page 3-150 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE UNIT NO. 2 AH-800 (cont) IO BP (I) (I) (0) (0) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To

ARINC 429 #1 IN (H) C1J1B-K4 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. ARINC 429 #1 IN (L) -K5 (24)-T-S----------S-- 6-11 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND ARINC 429 #3 OUT (H) -K12 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. ARINC 429 #3 OUT (L) -K13 (24)-T-S----------S-- 6-10 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND WOW C1J1B-K15 (24)-----------------FIG. 6-2

22-05-14

Page 3-151 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE UNIT NO. 2 AH-800 (cont) IO BP (I) (O) (I) (O) (I) Function 28 V DC AUXILIARY CONTROLLER 28 V DC PWR 28 V DC PRIMARY 28 V DC RETURN CHASSIS GND Connector Pin C1J1C-2 -6 -7 -8 C1J1C-11 (22)------------------ FIG. 6-1 (22)------------------ DC PWR GND Connects To

(22)------------------ FIG. 6-1

22-05-14

Page 3-152 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

FLUX VALVE NO. 2 FX-600 IO BP (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) Function STATOR STATOR STATOR STATOR A B C COMMON F Connector Pin C4J1-A (22)-T-S-----------S--B (22)-T-S-----------S--C (22)-T-S-----------S--F (22)-T-S-----------S-NC Connects To C1J1B-H8 C1J1B-H9 C1J1B-H10 C1J1B-H11 SHIELD GND

EXCITATION D EXCITATION E

-D (22)-T-S-----------S-- C1J1B-H12 -E (22)-T-S-----------S-- C1J1B-H13 NC SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-153 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS MADC AZ-850 IO BP Function UNIT ID 1 UNIT ID 2 UNIT ID 3 UNIT ID 4 UNIT ID 5 UNIT ID 6 UNIT ID 7 SDI 1 SDI 2 SDI 3 SPARE WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS SIGNAL GROUND SPARE TAT PROBE HEAT DISCRETE Connector Pin C9J1-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 Connects To

(I) (I)

(24)------------------ SIGNAL GROUND (24)------------------ SIGNAL GROUND

(I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (P) (P)

(24)------------------ SIGNAL GROUND (24)------------------ FIG. 6-2 (24)------------------ SIGNAL GROUND

-14 -15 (24)------------------ TAT PROBE HEAT SIGNAL BARO SET DISCRETE (IN/HPA) -16 (24)------------------ C190J2B-82 SPARE IN #3 GND -17 SPARE IN #4 GND -18 SPARE IN #1 +28 V -19 ---------------------- RESERVED FOR ALT. VMO SIGNAL SPARE IN #2 +28 V -20 DISCRETE OUT #1(170 KTS) -21 (24)------------------ RUDDER TRIM SYSTEM DISCRETE OUT #2(205 KTS) -22 (24)------------------ SPOILER COMMAND DISCRETE OUT #3(24,500 FT) -23 (24)------------------ SYSTEM DISCRETE OUT #4(TBD KTS) -24 ALTITUDE TRIP POINT(TBD FT)-25 +28 V DC HI -26 (22)------------------ FIG. 6-1 +28 V DC LO -27 (22)------------------ DC GROUND OVERSPEED WARNING DISC -28 (24)------------------ CREW ALERTING SYSTEM MADC VALID DISC -29 ASCB ON SIDE PRIMARY HI -30

(I) (I)

TEMP PROBE HI TEMP PROBE LO

-31 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 500 OHM TEMP PROBE -32 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 500 OHM TEMP PROBE SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -33 C9J1-34

SPARE ASCB ON SIDE PRIMARY LO

22-05-14

Page 3-154 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS MADC (cont) AZ-850 IO BP Function AOA HI AOA ARM AOA LO CALIBRATION ENABLE SPARE SPARE SPARE ATC ENABLE DISC ATC A1 ATC A2 ATC A4 ATC B1 ATC B2 ATC B4 ATC C1 ATC C2 ATC C4 ATC D4 SPARE SPARE RS-232 RX IN HI RS-232 LO RS-232 TX OUT HI Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O)

C9J1-35 -36 -37 -38 ---------------------- SHOP USE ONLY -39 -40 -41 -42 -43 -44 -45 -46 -47 -48 -49 -50 -51 -52 -53 -54

(B) (B) (B)

-55 (24)-T-S-----------S-- -56 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-34 -57 (24)-T-S-----------S-- SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

(B) (B) (B) (B)

VMO SELECT -58 ASCB ON SIDE BACKUP HI -59 ARINC 429 BUS 1 HI -60 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. ARINC 429 BUS 1 LO -61 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-11 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND ARINC 429 BUS 2 HI -63 (24)-T-S-----------S- FIG. ARINC 429 BUS 2 LO C9J1-64 (24)-T-S-----------S- 6-11 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-155 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS MADC (cont) AZ-850 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(B) (B) (B) (B) (I) (I) (I) (I)

ASCB CROSS SIDE C9J1-65 PRIMARY HI ARINC 429 BUS 3 HI -66 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. ARINC 429 BUS 3 LO -67 (24)-T-S----------S-- 6-11 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND ARINC 429 BUS 4 HI -68 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. ARINC 429 BUS 4 LO -69 (24)-T-S----------S-- 6-11 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND FUNCTIONAL TEST DISC BARO SELECT DISC (STD) SSEC DISABLE(GND=DISABLE) SPARE BARO-CORRECTION A (H) BARO-CORRECTION B (L) SPARE ASCB CROSS SIDE PRIMARY LO SPARE SPARE -70 -71 -72 -73 -74 -75 -76 -77 (24)----------------- FIG. 6-3 (24)----------------- C130J1-46 --------------------- SHOP USE ONLY (24)----------------- C130J1-21 (24)----------------- C130J1-25

-78 C9J1-79

22-05-14

Page 3-156 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS DISPLAY CONTROLLER DC-550 IO BP (I) (P) (P) (P) (P) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To SIGNAL GND FIG. 6-7 LIGHTING GND FIG. 6-1 DC PWR GND C131J1-46 C131J1-47 11J1-56 11J1-57 11J1-58 SHIELD GND 11J1-47,115J1-12 11J1-48,115J1-13 11J1-49,115J1-14 SHIELD GND 11J1-50,115J1-15 11J1-51,115J1-16 11J1-52,115J1-17 SHIELD GND 11J1-53,115J1-18 11J1-54,115J1-19 11J1-55,115J1-20 SHIELD GND C131J1-21 C131J1-25 C131J1-63 SHIELD GND 115J1-24, 132J1-21 115J1-25, 132J1-25 115J1-26, 132J1-63 SHIELD GND

SIGNAL GND C115J1-1 (22)------------------LGHTG 28 V (H) -2 LGHTG 5 V (H) -3 (22)------------------LGNTG COM -4 (22)------------------+28 V DC POWER -5 (22)------------------DC POWER GND -6 (22)------------------#8 PUSH BUTN (DU4 BZ PB1) -7 (24)------------------#9 PUSH BUTN (DU4 BZ PB2) -8 (24)------------------#1 SET KNOB 1 -9 (24)--T-S-----------S-#1 SET KNOB 2 CRS2 -10 (24)-T-S-----------S-#1 SET KNOB COM -11 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND #2 SET KNOB 1 #2 SET KNOB 2 #2 SET KNOB COM #3 SET KNOB 1 #3 SET KNOB 2 #3 SET KNOB COM #4 SET KNOB 1 #4 SET KNOB 2 #4 SET KNOB 2 COM #5 SET KNOB 1 #5 SET KNOB 2 #5 SET KNOB COM #6 SET KNOB 1 #6 SET KNOB 2 #6 SET KNOB COM RESERVED SPARE -12 (24)-T-S-----------S--13 (24)-T-S-----------S--14 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND HDG -15 (24)-T-S-----------S--16 (24)-T-S-----------S--17 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND ALT -18 -----T-S-----------S- SPD -19 -----T-S-----------S- -20 -----T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND -21 -----T-S-----------S--22 -----T-S-----------S--23 -----T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND MFD -24 -----T-S-----------S--25 -----T-S-----------S--26 -----T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND EICAS -27 C115J1-28

22-05-14

Page 3-157 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS DISPLAY CONTROLLER (cont) DC-550 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (I) (B) (B)

AUTOPILOT OFF LIGHT C115J1-29 AUTOPILOT OFF HORN -30 SPARE -31 TCS -32 ---------------------28V AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT -33 ---------------------DC/SG BUS (H) -34 (24)-T-S-----------S-DC/SG BUS (L) -35 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND DC/MG BUS (H) DC/MG BUS (L) PFD #2 DIM (H) PFD #2 DIM (L) MFD #2 DIM (H) MFD #2 DIM (L) -36 -37 -38 -39 -40 -41 -42 (22)------------------43 (22)-----------------(22)-----------------(22)-----------------(24)-----------------(24)-----------------(24)------------------

FIG. 6-17 FIG. 6-16 C190J2A-15 C190J2A-16 SHIELD GND

(I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

LIGHT + HORN DISABLE MOMENTARY LIGHT DISABLE MOMENTARY HORN CHASSIS GND LAMP TEST GND #10 PUSH BUTTN #11 PUSH BUTTN #12 PUSH BUTTN PFD DIM (H) PFD DIM (W) PFD DIM (L) DH SET DH SET DH SET (H) (W) (L) DISABLE

-44 -45 -46 (DU4 BZ PB3) -47 (DU4 BZ PB4) -48 (DU4 BZ PB5) -49 -50 -51 -52

C115J1-43, C190J2B-79 C115J1-42, C190J2B-79 C190J2B-77 CHASSIS GND C131J1-50 C131J1-51 C131J1-60

(I) (O) (I) (I)

(I) (I)

-53 -54 -55 SHIELD GND #13 PUSH BUTTN (DU4 BZ PB6) -56 #14 PUSH BUTTN -57 #15 PUSH BUTTN -58 ADI ON GND -59 MASTER CAUTION PUSH BUTTON -60 MASTER WARNING PUSH BUTTON -61 #18 PUSH BUTTN -62 HSI ON GND C115J1-63

(24)-T-S-----------S-(24)-T-S-----------S-(24)-T-S-----------S- (24)------------------

C190J2A-12 C190J2A-13 C190J2A-10 SHIELD GND C131J1-62

(24)-----------------(24)------------------

FIG. 6-33 FIG. 6-33

22-05-14

Page 3-158 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOT DISPLAY CONTROLLER (cont) DC-550 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

#19 PUSH BUTTN C115J1-64 #20 PUSH BUTTN -65 #21 PUSH BUTTN (IN/HPA) -66 WX ON GND -67 #22 PUSH BUTTN (SPD IAS -68 MACH SEL) #23 PUSH BUTTN (RESERVED) -69 #24 PUSH BUTTN (PUSH SYNC -70 CRS 2) #25 PUSH BUTTN (PUSH SYNC -71 HDG) #1 SWITCH (DU # 2 MFD -72 SELECT) #2 SWITCH (AHRS REVERSION) -73 #3 SWITCH (MADC REVERSION) -74 #4 SWITCH (DAU CH A -75 (REVERSION) #5 SWITCH (DAU CH B -76 (REVERSION) #6 SWITCH (DU #4 PFD SELECT)-77 #7 SWITCH (DU #4 EICAS -78 SELECT) #8 SWITCH (DU #2 C115J1-79 EICAS SEL)

(24)------------------ C130J1-47 (24)------------------ 11J1-65, 115J1-68 (24)------------------ 11J1-66 (24)------------------ 11J1-63, 115J1-71 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-9 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-10 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-11 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-12 (24)------------------ (24)------------------ (24)------------------FIG. 6-9 (24)------------------

22-05-14

Page 3-159 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS PFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 5 DU-870 IO BP (I) BRIGHTNESS POT (I) Function (H) (W) (L) (H) (W) (L) Connector Pin C130J1-1 (22)-T-S-----------S-- -14 (22)-T-S-----------S-- -13 (22)-T-S-----------S-- NC Connects To AIRCRAFT DIMMING CONTROL SHIELD GND

(O) (I) (P) (P) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I)

-2 -15 -3 RESERVED -4 RESERVED -5 RESERVED -6 RESERVED -7 SPARE -8 RESERVED -9 RESERVED -10 RESERVED -11 RESERVED -12 RESERVED -16 RESERVED -17 RESERVED -18 (H) -19 BUS 3 (L) -20 SET KNOB (BARO) (A) -21 (24)-----------------DU PWR DN* -22 (24)-----------------5 V LIGHTING (H) -23 (22)-----------------5 V LIGHTING COMMON -24 (22)-----------------SET KNOB (BARO) (B) -25 (24)-----------------REMOTE LT SENSOR (H) -26 REMOTE LT SENSOR (L) -27 (H) -28 (24)-T-S-----------S-DLS OUT (L) -41 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND WX DIMMING ALS RESERVED HDLC OUT + HDLC OUT (H) (L) -29 (24)-T-S-----------S--42 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND -30 -31 C130J1-32

C9J1-74 FIG. 6-9 FIG. 6-7 LIGHTING COMMON C9J1-75 C131J1-29 C131J1-42 SHIELD GND C131J1-28 C131J1-41 SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-160 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS PFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 5 (cont) DU-870 IO BP Function BUS 3 TERM RESERVED BUS 2 BUS 2 (L) (H) (L) Connector Pin Connects To

(B) (B)

C130J1-33 -34 -35 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. -36 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-13 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -37 -38 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. -39 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-13 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -40 -53 -54 -43 -44 -45 -46 (24)------------------47 (24)------------------48 -49 -50 -51 -52 -55 C130J1-56 (H) (L)

(B) (B)

DU VALID (GND/OPEN) BUS 1 (H) BUS 1 (L)

REMOTE LT SENSOR GND REMOTE LT SENSOR PWR RESERVED RESERVED BUS 4 TRM (L) PB STANDARD DISCRETE PB IN/HPA RESERVED BUS 2 TERM (L) PB PB BUS 1 TERM (L) RESERVED RESERVED

(O)

C9J1-71 C115J1-66

22-05-14

Page 3-161 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS PFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 5 (cont) DU-870 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(O)

(B) (B)

RESERVED C130J1-57 BUS 4 (H) -58 BUS 4 (L) -59 PB -60 WX BUS 2 TERM (L) -61 DH (H) -62 DH (COM) -63 (22)-----------------WX BUS 1 TERM (L) -64 (24)-T-S-----------S-WX BUS 1 (H) -77 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND

SIGNAL GND FIG. 6-6 SHIELD GND

(B) (B)

DU OVERTEMP (GND/OPEN) -65 DU WRAPAROUND (H) -66 (24)-T-S-----------S-- (ARINC 429) FIG. 6-13 DU WRAPAROUND (L) -79 (24)-T-S-----------S-- (ARINC 429) SHIELD GND SHIELD GND DH (L) RESERVED WX BUS 3 (H) WX BUS 3 (L) RESERVED SPARE SPARE WX BUS 2 (H) WX BUS 2 (L) SPARE WX BUS 1 (L) SIGNAL GROUND RESERVED RESERVED WX BUS 3 TERM RESERVED SPARE SPARE PORT SEL 3 -67 -68 -69 -70 -71 -72 -73 -74 -75 -76 -78 (24)------------------80 (24)------------------81 -82 (L) -83 -84 -85 -86 C130J1-87 (24)------------------

(I)

FIG. 6-6 SIGNAL GND

(I)

FIG. 6-9

22-05-14

Page 3-162 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS PFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 5 (cont) DU-870 IO BP Function PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 I.D. #3 I.D. #2 I.D. #1 RESERVED CHASSIS GND RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SOFTWARE ENABLE* SOFTWARE ENABLE* 28 V DC 28 V DC 28 V DC 28 V DC RTN 28 V DC RTN 28 V DC RTN Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (I)

C130J1-88 -89 -90 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-9 -91 -92 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-9 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 -100 -101 (22)----------------- -102 (22)----------------- FIG. 6-1 -103 (22)----------------- -104 (22)----------------- -105 (22)----------------- A/C 28 V DC C130J1-106 (22)----------------- PWR RETURN

(P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P)

* FLIGHT TEST ONLY

22-05-14

Page 3-163 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS MFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 4 DU-870 IO BP (I) BRIGHTNESS POT (I) Function (H) (W) (L) (H) (W) (L) Connector Pin C131J1-1 (22)-T-S-----------S-- -14 (22)-T-S-----------S-- -13 (22)-T-S-----------S-- NC -2 -15 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -16 -17 -18 -19 -20 -21 (24)-----------------23 (22)-----------------24 (22)-----------------25 (24)-----------------26 Connects To AIRCRAFT DIMMING CONTROL SHIELD GND

WX DIMMING RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SPARE RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED (O) (P) (P) (O)

(H) BUS 3 (L) SET KNOB #5 (MFD) (H) DU PWR DN* 28 V LIGHTING (H) 28 V LIGHTING COMMON SET KNOB #5 (MFD) (L) REMOTE LT SENSOR (H) REMOTE LT SENSOR (H) DLS OUT (L) (H) (L) (L)

C115J1-21 FIG. 6-8 LIGHTING COMMON C115J1-22

(O) (O) (I) (I)

-27 -28 (24)-T-S-----------S-- C130J1-29 -41 (24)-T-S-----------S-- C130J1-42 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -29 (24)-T-S-----------S-- C130J1-28 C131J1 -42 (24)-T-S-----------S-- C130J1-41 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

ALS

22-05-14

Page 3-164 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS MFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 4 (cont) DU-870 IO BP (B) (B) Function RESERVED HDLC OUT + HDLC OUT BUS 3 TERM RESERVED (B) (B) BUS 2 BUS 2 (L) (H) (L) Connector Pin Connects To

C131J1-30 -31 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. -32 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-13 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -33 -34 -35 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. -36 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-13 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -37

DU VALID (GND/OPEN) (B) (B) BUS 1 BUS 1 (H) (L)

-38 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. -39 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-13 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -40 -53 -54 -43 -44 -45 -46 (24)------------------47 (24)-----------------C131J1-48 (H) (L)

REMOTE LT SENSOR GND REMOTE LT SENSOR PWR RESERVED RESERVED BUS 4 TRM PB PB RESERVED

(L)

(O) (O)

C115J1-7 C115J1-8

22-05-14

Page 3-165 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS MFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 4 (cont) DU-870 IO BP (O) (O) Function Connector Pin Connects To

(O) (O)

BUS 2 TERM (L) C131J1-49 PB -50 PB 2 -51 BUS 1 TERM (L) -52 RESERVED -55 RESERVED -56 RESERVED -57 BUS 4 (H) -58 BUS 4 (L) -59 PB -60 WX BUS 2 TERM (L) -61 PB -62 MFD BEZEL/SET KNOB #5 COMMON-63 WX BUS 1 TERM (L) -64 DU OVERTEMP (GND/OPEN) -65 DU WRAPAROUND (H) -66 (ARINC 429) DU WRAPAROUND (L) -79 (ARINC 429) RESERVED RESERVED WX BUS 3 (H) WX BUS 3 (L) RESERVED SPARE SPARE WX BUS 2 (H) WX BUS 2 (L) SPARE WX BUS RIGHT (H) WX BUS RIGHT (L) SIGNAL GROUND RESERVED RESERVED WX BUS 3 TERM PB6

(24)------------------ C115J1-47 (24)------------------ C115J1-48

(24)------------------ C115J1-49 (24)------------------ C115J1-56 (24)------------------ C115J1-23

(B) (B) (I)

-67 -68 -69 -70 -71 -72 -73 -74 -75 -76 -77 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. -78 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-6 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -80 (24)------------------ SIGNAL GND -81 -82 -83 -84

(L)

(O)

22-05-14

Page 3-166 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS MFD DISPLAY UNIT NO. 4 (cont) DU-870 IO BP Function SPARE SPARE PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 I.D. #3 I.D. #2 I.D. #1 RESERVED CHASSIS GND RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SOFTWARE ENABLE* SOFTWARE ENABLE* 28 V DC 28 V DC 28 V DC 28 V DC RTN 28 V DC RTN 28 V DC RTN Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (I) (I)

(P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P)

C131J1-85 -86 -87 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-9 -88 -89 -90 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-9 -91 -92 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-9 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 -100 -101 (22)----------------- -102 (22)----------------- FIG. 6-1 -103 (22)----------------- -104 (22)----------------- -105 (22)----------------- A/C 28 V DC C131J1-106 (22)----------------- PWR RETURN

*FLIGHT TEST ONLY

22-05-14

Page 3-167 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS COMMUNICATIONS UNIT NO. 2 RCZ-851G/851E IO BP Function RESERVED (O) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (B) (B) (B) (B) (GND/OPEN) +28 V DC FAN POWER +28 V DC COMM 2 POWER +28 V DC COMM 2 POWER +28 V DC COMM 2 POWER +28 V XPDR 2 POWER RETURN +28 V DC XPDR 2 POWER +28 V DC XPDR 2 POWER RSB PRIMARY (H) RSB PRIMARY (L) SELCAL/ACARS (L) SELCAL/ACARS (H) RESERVED (O) (B) (B) (O) (P) (P) (P) (P) (I) (I/O) (I/O) COM +28V ACH PWR RCB RCVR (#1) (L) RCB RCVR (#1) (H) COMM STRAP +5 V DC +28 +28 +28 +28 V V V V DC DC DC DC COMM COMM COMM XPDR POWER POWER POWER POWER RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN Connector Pin C143J1-1 -2 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 (24)------------------ COOLING FAN - RED (22)------------------ (22)------------------FIG. 6-1 (22)------------------ (22)------------------ DC POWER GND (22)------------------FIG. 6-1 (22)------------------ Connects To

-10 -T-S---------------S-- -11 -T-S---------------S-- FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -12 -22 -13 -14 -15 -28 -16 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-22 -17 -18 -19 -20 (22)------------------ (22)------------------DC POWER GND (22)------------------ (22)------------------

VHF 2 PTT (GND/OPEN) SIMULCOM RET SIMULCOM

-21 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-28

-24 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 143J1-24 C143J1-35 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 143J1-35 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-168 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS COMMUNICATIONS UNIT NO. 2 (cont) RCZ-851G/851E IO BP (B) (B) Function COM ACH DATA (L) COM ACH DATA (H) RESERVED RESERVED (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) EMER AUDIO (L) EMER AUDIO (H) Connector Pin Connects To

C143J1-25 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 165J1-J -33 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 165J1-H SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -26 -27 -29 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. -31 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-29 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -30 -34 -62 -36 -37 (24)------------------ HF PTT -38 -49 -39 -40 -41 -42 -43 (24)-----------------COMM 2 STRAP CAA FIG. 6-22

REC PHONE AUDIO (H) AUX AUD 4 (L) AUX AUD 4 (H) AUDIO STATUS 3 (GND/OPEN) HF COM XMIT (GND/OPEN) AUX AUD 2 (H) AUX AUD 2 (L) HF COM DISABLE (GND/OPEN) GND (AUDIO SHIELDS) COM +28V ACH RTN AUDIO BUS SHIELD (GND) COM STRAP +5 V DC RETURN GND GND GND AUDIO STATUS 3 (GND/OPEN) HF1 COM AUD (L) HF1 COM AUD (H) AUX AUD 3 (L) AUX AUD 3 (H)

-44 (24)------------------ -45 (24)------------------ BOBBIN -46 (24)------------------ -48

-50 (24)-T-S-----------S-- HF -66 (24)-T-S-----------S-- AUDIO SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -51 C143J1-52

22-05-14

Page 3-169 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS COMMUNICATIONS UNIT NO. 2 (cont) RCZ-851G/851E IO BP (B) (B) (O) (B) (B) (B) (B) (O) (I) (O) (I) (B) (B) (I) Function RCB RCVR (#2) (L) RCB RCVR (#2) (H) Connector Pin C143J1-53 -68 Connects To

+28 V DC FAN POWER RETURN -54 (24)------------------ COOLING FAN-BLUE XPDR TO TCAS 429A -55 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 193RMP-14H XPDR TO TCAS 429B -87 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 193RMP-14J SHIELD GND SHIELD GND AUDIO BUS #2 (H) AUDIO BUS #2 (L) -56 -T-S---------------S-- -70 -T-S---------------S-- FIG. 6-23 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -57 -58 (24)------------------ BOBBIN -59 -60 (24)------------------ BOBBIN -61 -T-S---------------S-- -74 -T-S---------------S-- FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -67 (24)------------------ BOBBIN -71 -72 -76 -80 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-11 -81 -95 -82 -96 C143J1-83 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-2

SIDETONE PHONE AUDIO (H) GND AGC ANALOG TP GND LEFT SEC RSB (L) LEFT SEC RSB (H) CHASSIS GND RESERVED RESERVED

(I) (I) (B) (B) (B) (B) (I)

AUDIO STATUS 1 (GND/OPEN) ALT SRC SEL 2 (NO) RCB XMTR (#1) (H) RCB XMTR (#1) (L) RCB XMTR (#2) (H) RCB XMTR (#2) (L) WOW (GND/OPEN)

22-05-14

Page 3-170 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS COMMUNICATIONS UNIT NO. 2 (cont) RCZ-850/851E IO BP Function RESERVED RESERVED (O) (O) (B) (B) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I/O) COM STRAP CLK COM STRAP SIDE A0 TCAS TO XPDR 429A TCAS TO XPDR 429B XPDR ACTIVE (NO) VHF 2 MIC (H) VHF 2 MIC (L) Connector Pin C143J1-84 -85 -88 (24)------------------ COMM 2 STRAP CCA -89 (24)------------------ FIG. 6-22 -90 (24)-T-S----------S--104 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND 193RMP-14A 193RMP-14B SHIELD GND Connects To

-91 (24)------------------ TO AIRCFT ANT. RELAY -92 (24)-T-S----------S-- -106 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. 6-28 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -93

COMM OFF (GND/OPEN) MUT SUP RESERVED RESERVED

-94 (24)---S----------S-- FIG. 6-31 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -97 -98 -99 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. -86 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-11 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -100 (24)-T-S----------S-- FIG. -69 (24)-T-S----------S-- 6-11 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -101 (24)----------------- COMM 2 STRAP CCA -102 (24)----------------- FIG. 6-22 -103 (24)----------------- -104 C143J1-105

(B) (B) (B) (B) (I) (O) (O)

ADC 1 TO XPDR 429A ADC 2 TO XPDR 429B ADC 2 TO XPDR 429A ADC 2 TO XPDR 429B COM STRAP DATA COM STRAP LOAD COM STRAP SIDE A1 RESERVED RESERVED

22-05-14

Page 3-171 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS COMMUNICATIONS UNIT RCZ-851G/851E IO BP (I) (I) (I) Function TRANSPONDER ANTENNA (BOTTOM) COM ANTENNA TRANSPONDER ANTENNA (TOP) Connector Pin Connects To

C143J2-1 ---(RG-214/U)-S-------- BOTTOM XPDR ANT C143J2-2 (SEE NOTE BELOW) C143J3-1 ---(RG-142B/U)-S------C143J3-2 COM ANT #2

C143J6-1 ---(RG-214/U)-S-------- TOP XPDR ANT C143J6-2 (SEE NOTE BELOW)

22-05-14

Page 3-172 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS RADIO MANAGEMENT UNIT RM-855 IO BP (P) (P) (P) (P) (B) (B) (P) (P) (P) (P) (I) (B) (B) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (B) (B) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To

28 V DC LIGHTING C144J1-A 28 V DC LIGHTING RET -B +28 V DC POWER -C (22)-----------------+28 V DC POWER RETURN -D (22)-----------------NAV BACKUP BUS (+) -E (24)-T-S-----------S-NAV BACKUP BUS (-) -F (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND 5 V DC LIGHTING -G (24)-T-S-----------S-5 V DC LIGHTING RETURN -H (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD GND

FIG. 6-1 DC GND C164J1B-102 C164J1A-84 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-7 LIGHTING GND SHIELD GND

0-5 V AC LIGHTING -J 0-5 V AC LIGHTING RET -K CHASSIS GROUND -L (24)------------------ CHASSIS GND RIGHT SEC RSB (H) -M -T-S---------------S-- RIGHT SEC RSB (L) -N -T-S---------------S-- FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND WOW (GND/OPEN) WOW POLARITY (GND/OPEN) ATC IDENT (GND/OPEN) DISCRETE 1 INPUT 4 CHASSIS GROUND -P (24)------------------R (24)------------------S (24)------------------T -U (24)-----------------CHASSIS GND FIG. 6-2 SIG. GND (GND FOR WOW=GND) TO ID SWITCHES, 144J1-S

PRIMARY RSB (H) -V -T-S---------------S-- PRIMARY RSB (L) -W -T-S---------------S-- FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND DISCRETE 1 INPUT 3 ON/OFF PAGE DISABLE (GND/OPEN) DISCRETE 1 INPUT 1 DISCRETE 1 INPUT 0 -X -Y (24)------------------Z -a SIG. GND SIG. GND

SIDE SEL B0 (GND/OPEN) -b SIDE SEL B1 (GND/OPEN) -c (24)-----------------SIDE SEL EV PARITY C144J1-d (GND/OPEN)

22-05-14

Page 3-173 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS RADIO MANAGEMENT UNIT (cont) RM-855 IO BP (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (B) (B) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To

TEST ENABLE C144J1-e (GND/OPEN) COM FREQ XF (GND/OPEN) -f COM MEM SEL (GND/OPEN) -g MKR SENSE LEFT -h MKR SENSE RIGHT -i COM POWER OFF (GND/OPEN) -j ATC POWER OFF (GND/OPEN) -k VOR POWER OFF (GND/OPEN) -m DME POWER OFF (GND/OPEN) -n ADF POWER OFF (GND/OPEN) -p MLS POWER OFF (GND/OPEN) -q DISCRETE OUTPUT 1 -r DISCRETE OUTPUT 0 -s FMS BUS (-) -t ENG BACKUP FUNCTION ENABLE -u NAV BACKUP FUNCTION ENABLE -v ENG DISPLAY ENABLE #1 -w ENG DISPLAY ENABLE #2 -x ENG DAU FMS IAC DISPLAY ENABLE #3 CONFIGURATION (2 DAUS) BUS (+) CONFIGURATION 2

(24)------------------ 160J2-L, 144J1-h (24)------------------ C160J2-L, 144J1-i

(24)------------------ 121J1B-30, 144J1-t

(24)------------------ SIGNAL GND

-y -z -AA (24)----------------- 121J1B-31,144J1-AA -BB

ONSIDE DAU #1 (+) ONSIDE DAU #1 (-) CHASSIS GROUND

-CC (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. -DD (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-14 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND C144J1-EE

NOTE:

THE REMOTE ON/OFF FUNCTION MUST NOT BE CONNECTED ON THE EMERGENCY RADIO SIDE.

22-05-14

Page 3-174 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS RADIO MANAGEMENT UNIT (cont) RM-855 IO BP (B) (B) (I) (B) (B) (P) (P) (I) (I) Function DAU #2 (+) DAU #2 (-) SPARE ARINC ARINC +28 V +28 V SPARE SPARE Connector Pin Connects To

C144J1-FF (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. -GG (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-14 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -HH -JJ -KK -LL (22)------------------ FIG. 6-1 -MM (22)------------------ DC GND -NN C144J1-PP

DAU 3 (H) DAU 3 (L) DC PRIMARY POWER DC PRIMARY POWER RTN

NOTE:

THE REMOTE ON/OFF FUNCTION MUST NOT BE CONNECTED ON THE EMERGENCY RADIO SIDE.

22-05-14

Page 3-175 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

#2 ADF ANTENNA (OPTION) IO BP (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (P) (P) (I) NOTE: Function ADF MOD SHLD ADF COS MOD ADF SIN MOD ADF ANT TEST ADF OUTER SHLD ADF INNER SHLD ADF RF INPUT ADF +15 VDC ADF +15 VDC RETURN ADF LOOP EN Connector Pin C158J1-A -B -H -C -D -E -F -G -J C158J1-K (24)-T-S---------------(24)-T-S--------------- (24)------------------ -(TRIAX)-IS-OS---------C164J1A-91 C164J1A-104 C164J1A-77 SEE NOTE BELOW C164J2-1 Connects To

(24)-------------------- C164J1B-1 (24)-------------------- C164J1B-27 (24)-------------------- C164J1A-101

RECOMMENDED ADF ANTENNA TRIAXIAL CABLE IS TROMPETER PN TRC-50-2 OR EQUIVALENT. THE TRIAXIAL CABLE OUTER SHIELD IS GROUNDED AT THE ADF ANTENNA END ONLY, TO THE AIRFRAME AND TO THE ADF MODULATION SHIELD. THE GROUND WIRE SHALL BE 20 AWG OR LARGER AND THE LENGTH SHALL NOT EXCEED 10 INCHES.

22-05-14

Page 3-176 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS AUDIO PANEL AV-850A IO BP (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (P) Function HAND MIC PTT (GND/OPEN) EMERGENCY COM PTT (GND/OPEN) Connector Pin Connects To

C160J1-A (24)------------------ FIG. 6-25 -B (24)------------------ FIG. 6-28 -C (24)------------------ -D (24)---S-----------S-- FIG. 6-28 -W (24)---S-----------S-- SHIELD GND -E (24)---S-----------S-- -R (24)---S-----------S-- FIG. 6-27 SHIELD GND -F (24)------------------ FIG. 6-29 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-29 SHIELD GND

VHF 2 PTT (GND/OPEN) VHF 2 MIC (H) VHF 2 MIC (L) SHIELD GROUND VHF 1 MIC (L) VHF 1 MIC (H) SHIELD GROUND VHF 1 PTT (GND/OPEN)

EMER COM AUDIO (H) -G (24)-T-S-----------S-- EMER COM/NAV AUDIO (L) -m (24)-T-S-----------S-- SHIELD GROUND EMER NAV AUDIO (H) -f (24)-T-S-----------S-- EMER COM/NAV AUDIO (L) -m (24)-T-S-----------S-- SHIELD GROUND

EMER COM MIC (L) -H (24)-T-S-----------S-- EMER COM MIC (H) -P (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-28 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND HAND MIC/MASK-BOOM MIC (L) -J (24)-T-S-----------S-- HAND MIC (H) -K (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-25 SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND CABIN/COCKPIT SPKR (L) -L (22)-T-S-----------S-- NO. 2 COCKPIT COCKPIT SPKR (H) -Y (22)-T-S-----------S-- SPEAKER SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND CABIN/COCKPIT SPKR (L) -L (22)-T-S-----------S-- CABIN CABIN SPKR (H) -e (22)-T-S-----------S-- SPEAKER SHIELD GROUND SHIELD GND +28 V DC PWR RTN C160J1-M (22)------------------ DC GND

22-05-14

Page 3-177 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS AUDIO PANEL AV-850A (cont) IO BP (I) (I) (I) (P) (P) (I) (I) (I) (I) (B) (B) (B) (B) (I) (P) (I) (I) (I/O) (I/O) (O) (O) (P) Function COMMON GND HF MIC HF MIC (L) (H) Connector Pin C160J1-N -S (24)-T-S-----------S-- HF -T (24)-T-S-----------S-- MIC SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -U (22)------------------ FIG. 6-1 -V (22)------------------ -X (24)-----------------(L) (H) HF PTT Connects To

+28 V DC POWER +28 V DC POWER HF PTT COM 3 MIC COM 3 MIC

-Z (24)-T-S-----------S-- COM 3 -a (24)-T-S-----------S-- MIC SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -b (24)-----------------COM 3 PTT

COM 3 PTT (GND/OPEN) DIG AUDIO BUS 2 DIG AUDIO BUS 2 DIG AUDIO BUS 1 DIG AUDIO BUS 1 5 V LIGHTING GND 5 V LIGHTING MASK/BOOM PTT (GND/OPEN) MASK/BOOM MIC

(+) -c (24)-T-S-----------S-- (-) -n (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-23 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND (+) -d (24)-T-S-----------S-- (-) -p (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-23 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -g (24)-T-S-----------S-- LIGHTING GND -q (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-7 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -h (24)------------------ FIG. 6-25 (H) -i

INTERPHONE AUDIO (L) -j (24)-T-S-----------S-- 160J1-j, E160J1-j INTERPHONE AUDIO (H) -s (24)-T-S-----------S-- 160J1-s, E160J1-s SHIELD GND SHIELD GND PHONE AUDIO (L) PHONE AUDIO (H) +28 V DC DIMMING -k (24)-T-S-----------S-- -t (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. 6-25 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND C160J1-r

22-05-14

Page 3-178 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS AUDIO PANEL AV-850A (cont) IO BP (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function WARNING 5 AUDIO (H) WARNING 5 AUDIO (L) Connector Pin C160J2-A -a Connects To

WARNING 1 AUDIO (L) -B (24)-T-S-----------S-- AURAL WARNING WARNING 1 AUDIO (H) -W (24)-T-S-----------S-- UNIT SHIELD GND SHIELD GND MASK MIC (H) MASK/BOOM MIC (L) COMMON GND WARNING 2 AUDIO (L) WARNING 2 AUDIO (H) CABIN DISABLE (GND/OPEN) WARNING 3 AUDIO (L) WARNING 3 AUDIO (H) SPARE RESERVED MARKER BEAC 1 HI/LO SENS STERO MUTE (GND/OPEN) SPARE MAINT PHONE AUDIO (L) MAINT PHONE AUDIO (H) MAINT MIC 2 PTT AUXILIARY PTT AUXILIARY MIC LO AUXILIARY MIC HI -E (24)------------------ FIG. 6-25 -C -D (24)------------------ FIG. 6-25 -G -X -H -J -m -N -K -L (24)------------------ 144J1-i, C144J1-i -M -N -P -f -R -S -T C160J2-s

22-05-14

Page 3-179 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS AUDIO PANEL AV-850A (cont) Function (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) PA MIC LO PA MIC HI VOICE RECORDER HI VOICE RECORDER LO BOOM MIC HI SPARE GND WARNING 4 AUDIO LO WARNING 4 AUDIO HI MASK INTERCOM ENABLE INT XMIT SPARE MAINT 1 MIC (LO) MAINT 1 MIC (HI) MAINT 2 MIC H MAINT 2 MIC L RESERVED PA PTT MAINT 1 MIC PTT INTERPHONE PTT Connector Pin Connects To

C160J2-U (24)-T-S-------------S-- PA SYSTEM, -i (24)-T-S-------------S-- FIG. 6-30 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -V (24)-T-S-------------S-- COCKPIT VOICE -r (24)-T-S-------------S-- RECORDER SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -Y (24)--------------------C -Z -t -b -c (24)-------------------- 160J2-c, E160J2-c -d -e -q -g -n -h -j (24)--------------------k C160J2-p (24)-------------------FIG. 6-25 PA SYSTEM, FIG. 6-30 FIG. 6-25

22-05-14

Page 3-180 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT RNZ-851C IO BP (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (O) (O) (P) (P) (O) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (O) (O) (O) (P) (I) (I) (I) Function DME HOLD NOT (GND/OPEN) DME HOLD (GND/OPEN) DME 568 DATA (H) DME 568 DATA (L) RESERVED AUX1 RCB TX1 AUX1 RCB TX2 RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED Connector Pin C164J1A-2 -3 -5 -15 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -14 -16 -54 -17 -19 -18 -20 -21 (24)-T-S-----------S-- C164J1A-25 -34 (24)-T-S-----------S-- C164J1A-38 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -22 -23 -24 Connects To

VOR/ILS ON/OFF (GND/OPEN) DME RS-422 SD2 (L) DME RS-422 SD2 (H) DME 568 CLK (L) DME 568 CLK (H) DME CH 1 AUDIO MLS RCB SHLD MLS 1 RCB XMTR (H) MLS 1 RCB XMTR (L) (PROVISION)

RESERVED RESERVED CHANGE INHIBIT (GND/OPEN) MLS 1 RCB RCVR (H) MLS 1 RCB RCVR (L) (PROVISION) DME 568 SYNC (H) DME 568 SYNC (L) DME MUT SUP RTN RESERVED RESERVED DME ON/OFF (OPEN/GND)

-25 (24)-T-S-----------S-- C164J1A-21 -38 (24)-T-S-----------S-- C164J1A-34 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -26 -45 -28 -33 -39 C164J1A-40

(O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I)

22-05-14

Page 3-181 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT RNZ-851C (cont) IO BP (I) (I) Function AUX 1 AUDIO (H) AUX 1 AUDIO (L) Connector Pin C164J1A-41 -55 -42 (24)---S----------S-- FIG. 6-31 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -44 (24)-T-S----------S-- RESERVED FOR -57 (24)-T-S----------S-- OPTIONAL FMS SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -46 -47 -50 -52 Connects To

(I/O) DME MUT SUP (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) DME RS-422 SD1 (L) DME RS-422 SD1 (H)

DME VALID (28 V/OPEN) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED NAV AUX DATA (L) NAV AUX DATA (H)

-58 (24)-T-S----------S-- 165J1-N -70 (24)-T-S----------S-- 165J1-M SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -59 (24)-T-S----------S-- RESERVED FOR -60 OPTIONAL FMS (SEE J1B-89) -61 -64 -65 -66 -67 -68 -69 (24)-T-S----------S-- 165J1-f -72 (24)-T-S----------S-- 165J1-P SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -71 -73 -74 -75 -77 (24)------------------ C158J1-C (IF 2ND ADF IS INSTALLED) -78 C164J1A-79

(O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O)

VOR/ILS RS-422 SD1 (L) VOR/ILS MKR LAMP (M) (28 V/OPEN) RESERVED AUX2 RCB TX1 AUX2 RCB TX2 RESERVED AUX 2 AUDIO (H) AUX 2 AUDIO (L) NAV AUX CLK (H) NAV AUX CLK (L)

DME 40 MV/MI VOR/ILS MKR LAMP (I) (28 V/OPEN) (O) RESERVED (I) AUX1 RCB RX1 (O) ADF ANTENNA TEST (RNZ-851) (I) (I) AUX1 RCB RX2 RESERVED

22-05-14

Page 3-182 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT RNZ-851C (cont) IO BP (I) (I) (P) Function GND PS IN AUX GND DME 28 V DC RETURN RS-422 SD2 (P) (P) (P) (B) (B) (O) (O) VOR/ILS +28 V DC POWER DME +28 V DC POWER ADF +28 V DC POWER (RNZ-851) RIGHT SEC RSB (H) RIGHT SEC RSB (L) ADF COS MOD ADF SIN MOD (RNZ-851) Connector Pin C164J1A-80 -81 -83 -84 -85 -86 -87 (22)---------------- DC PWR GND (24)---------------- C144J1-F (22)---------------- FIG. 6-1 (22)---------------- (22)---------------- IF 2ND ADF IS INSTALLED Connects To

-88 (24)-T-S---------S-- -102 (24)-T-S---------S-- FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -91 (24)-T-S---------S-- C158J1-B -104 (24)-T-S---------S-- C158J1-H (IF 2ND ADF IS INSTALLED) SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 (22)---------------- FIG. -99 (22)---------------- 6-1 -100 (22)---------------- IF 2ND ADF IS INSTALLED -101 (24)---------------- C158J1-K (IF 2ND ADF IS INSTALLED) -103 (22)---------------- DC POWER GND C164J1A-105 (22)---------------- DC POWER GND (22)---------------- DC POWER GND

(I) (I) (P) (P) (I) (O) (P) (P) (P) (O) (I) (I)

AUX2 RCB RX1 AUX2 RCB RX2 ADF 28 V DC RETURN DME 28 V DC RETURN CLU SHLD GND DME CH 2 AUDIO (H) VOR/ILS +28 V DC POWER DME +28 V DC POWER ADF +28 V DC POWER (RNZ-851) ADF LOOP EN (RNZ-851) CLUSTER GND RESERVED

22-05-14

Page 3-183 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT RNZ-851C (cont) IO BP (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (P) (O) (O) (P) (O) (O) (O) (P) Function ADF +15 V DC (RNZ-851) 28 V DC FAN POWER SPARE STAT IN (DIG AUD) SPARE STAT IN (DIG AUD) RESERVED AUX +28 V DC RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED MLS MORSE ID RETURN RESERVED VOR/ILS RNAV VIDEO (H) VOR/ILS RNAV VIDEO (L) RESERVED VOR/LOC AUDIO CT HI LO Connector Pin C164J1B-1 -2 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -20 -21 -22 -23 -24 -36 -51 -25 (22)----------------- DC POWER GND (IF 2ND ADF IS INSTALLED) -26 (24)----------------- FIG. 6-22 -27 (24)----------------- C158J1-J (IF 2ND ADF IS INSTALLED) Connects To

(24)----------------- C158J1-G (IF 2ND ADF IS INSTALLED) (24)----------------- COOLING FAN (RED)

ADF 28 V DC RETURN (RNZ-851) NAV STRAP GND ADF +15 V DC RETURN (RNZ-851)

(O) (O) (B) (B) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

DIG AUDIO BUS 1 (L) -29 -T-S--------------S-- DIG AUDIO BUS 1 (H) -42 -T-S--------------S-- FIG. 6-23 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND SPARE STAT IN (DIG AUD) -30 AUD AUX SQUELCH -31 MLS MORSE ID (H) -32 RESERVED -33 RESERVED -34 RESERVED C164J1B-35

22-05-14

Page 3-184 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT RNZ-851C (cont) IO BP (O) (O) (O) (P) (P) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (O) (P) (P) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (P) (B) (B) Function Connector Pin Connects To

VOR/ILS EMER AUDIO (H)C164J1B-36 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FIG. VOR/ILS EMER AUDIO (L) -51 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 6-29 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND RESERVED VOR/ILS POWER RETURN VOR/ILS +28 V DC POWER NAV STRAP +5 V DC FAN 28 V DC POWER RETURN -37 -38 (22)----------------- DC POWER GND -39 (22)----------------- FIG. 6-1 -40 -44 (24)---------------- FIG. 6-22 (24)---------------- COOLING FAN (BLUE)

AUDIO AUX XMT -45 RESERVED -47 RESERVED -48 RESERVED -49 VOR/ILS POWER RETURN -50 (22)---------------- DC POWER GND VOR/ILS +28 V DC POWER -52 (22)---------------- FIG. 6-1 EFIS/MLS RIGHT -56 NAV STRAP SIDE SPARE -57 (24)---------------- NAV STRAP DATA -58 (24)---------------- FIG. 6-22 NAV STRAP CLK -59 (24)---------------- NAV STRAP WD LOAD -84 (24)---------------- RESERVED -60 RESERVED -61 RESERVED -62 RESERVED -63 ILS MODE -64 RESERVED -65 RESERVED -66 DIG AUDIO BUS SHLD -67 RESERVED -68 RSB PRIMARY (H) -71 -T-S-------------S-- RSB PRIMARY (L) C164J1B-81 -T-S-------------S-- FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-185 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT RNZ-851C (cont) IO BP (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) Function RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED VOR/ILS MKR LAMP (O) (28 V/OPEN) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED NAV STRAP SIDE SELECT SEC RSB BUS SHIELD RESERVED Connector Pin C164J1B-72 -73 -100 -74 -75 -76 -77 -78 -79 -80 -85 -87 (24)---------------- FIG. 6-22 Connects To

NAV AUX SHIFT LD (L) -88 (24)-T-S---------S-- 165J1-G NAV AUX SHIFT LD (H) -90 (24)-T-S---------S-- 165J1-F SHIELD GND SHIELD GND VOR RS-422 SD 1 (H) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED PRIMARY RSB BUS SHIELD EFIS/MLS LEFT CLU GND -89 -91 -92 -93 -95 -96 -98 (24)-T-S---------S-- RESERVED FOR OPTIONAL FMS (SEE J1A-59)

(22)---------------- DC POWER GND

RESERVED -99 VOR/ILS RS-422 SD 2 (H) -102 (24)---------------- C144J1-E RESERVED -103 RESERVED -104 RESERVED C164J1B-106

22-05-14

Page 3-186 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS NAVIGATION UNIT (cont) RNZ-851C IO BP (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) Function Connector Pin Connects To

C158J1-E ADF RF INPUT 1 C164J2-1 -(TRIAX)-IS-OS--IS-OS-- C158J1-F ADF RF INPUT 2 C164J2-2 SHIELD GND (IF 2ND ADF IS INSTALLED - RNZ-851) VOR/LOC ANT GS ANT MKR BEAC ANT DME ANT (RNZ-851) C164J3-1 C164J3-2 C164J4-1 C164J4-2 C164J5-1 C164J5-2 C164J6-1 C164J6-2 ----S------------S---- ----S------------S---- ----S------------S---- ----S------------S---- VOR/LOC 2 ANT SHIELD GND GS 2 ANT SHIELD GND MKR BEAC 2 ANT SHIELD GND DME 2 ANT SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-187 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER IC-600 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

ADI VIDEO + C190J1A-1 ADI VIDEO -2 SPARE -3 ADI COLOR 0 + -4 ADI COLOR 0 -5 SPARE -6 ADI COLOR 1 + -7 ADI COLOR 1 -8 SPARE -9 ADI COLOR 2 + -10 ADI COLOR 2 -11 SPARE -12 ADI COLOR 3 + -13 ADI COLOR 3 -14 SPARE -15 ADI FLYBACK + -16 ADI FLYBACK -17 SPARE -18 ADI PRIMARY TUBE VALID -19 ADI RASTER/STROKE + -20 ADI RASTER/STROKE -21 SPARE -22 ADI PRIMARY STROKE READY + -23 ADI PRIMARY STROKE READY -24 ADI SEC STROKE READY + -25 ADI SEC STROKE READY -26 ADI SEC TUBE VALID -27 HSI VIDEO + -28 HSI VIDEO -29 SPARE -30 HSI COLOR 0 + -31 HSI COLOR 0 -32 SPARE -33 HSI COLOR 1 + -34 HSI COLOR 1 -35 SPARE -36 HSI COLOR 2 + -37 HSI COLOR 2 -38 SPARE C190J1A-39

RESERVED

22-05-14

Page 3-188 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

HSI COLOR 3 + C190J1A-40 HSI COLOR 3 -41 SPARE -42 HSI FLYBACK + -43 HSI FLYBACK -44 SPARE -45 HSI PRIMARY TUBE VALID -46 HSI RASTER/STROKE + -47 HSI RASTER/STROKE -48 SPARE -49 HSI PRIMARY STROKE READY + -50 HSI PRIMARY STROKE READY -51 HSI SEC STROKE READY + HSI SEC STROKE READY HSI SEC TUBE VALID ADI X ADI X SPARE ADI Y ADI Y SPARE HSI X HSI X SPARE HSI Y HSI Y SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE DEFLECTION + DEFLECTION DEFLECTION + DEFLECTION DEFLECTION + DEFLECTION DEFLECTION + DEFLECTION -52 -53 -54 -55 -56 -57 -58 -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 -67 -68 -69 -70 -71 -72 -73 -74 C190J1A-75

RESERVED

22-05-14

Page 3-189 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (I) (I) Function MANUAL TRIM DN MANUAL TRIM UP MANUAL TRIM ENABLE SPARE DIS 2810 P RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED FOR PRIMARY RESERVED FOR PRIMARY RESERVED FOR PRIMARY RESERVED FOR PRIMARY RESERVED FOR PRIMARY RESERVED FOR PRIMARY RESERVED FOR PRIMARY RESERVED FOR PRIMARY RESERVED FOR PRIMARY RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED COM RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED COM RESERVED RESERVED FOR PRI ADF BRG SIN FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR PRI PRI PRI PRI PRI PRI ADF ADF ADF ADF ADF ADF BRG BRG BRG BRG BRG BRG SIN X Y COS Z COS Connector Pin C190J1A-76 -77 -78 -79 -80 -81 PITCH X -82 PITCH Y -83 PITCH Z -84 ROLL X -85 ROLL Y -86 ROLL Z -87 HDG X -88 HDG Y -89 HDG Z -90 -91 -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 -100 -101 Connects To

-102 -103 -104 -105 C190J1A-106

22-05-14

Page 3-190 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(I)

(I) (I)

RESERVED FOR PRI DME C190J1B-1 CLK + RESERVED FOR PRI DME DATA + -2 RESERVED FOR PRI DME COMMON -3 RESERVED FOR PRI DME ENABLE -4 RESERVED FOR PRI DME HOLD -5 RESERVED FOR SEC DME CLK + -6 RESERVED FOR SEC DME DATA + -7 RESERVED FOR SEC DME COMMON -8 RESERVED FOR SEC DME ENABLE -9 RESERVED FOR SEC DME HOLD -10 RESERVED FOR PS + IN -11 RESERVED FOR PS = IN -12 AIRSPEED PRESSURE IN -13 28 VDC DISCRETE N2 OVERRIDE -14 (24)---------------RESERVED -15 RESERVED -16 RESERVED -17 RESERVED -18 RESERVED -19 RESERVED -20 LAMP TEST IN -21 (24)---------------HDG PB IN -22 (24)---------------RESERVED PB IN -23 -24 (24)----------------25 (24)----------------26 (24)----------------27 (24)----------------28 (24)----------------29 (24)----------------30 (24)---------------C190J1B-31

MAINT SWITCH

FIG. 6-8 11J1-11, 190J1B-22 11J1-13, 190J1B-24 11J1-14, 190J1B-25 11J1-15, 190J1B-26 11J1-16, 190J1B-27 11J1-17, 190J1B-28 FIG. 6-18 11J1-19, 190J1B-30

(I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

NAV PB IN APR PB IN ALT PB IN SPD PB IN FLC PB IN GA IN VS PB IN SPARE

22-05-14

Page 3-191 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(O) (O) (O) (O)

RESERVED BARO SET IN C190J1B-32 (WIPER) SPARE -33 EICAS DISPLAYED ON RMU -34 MASTER CAUTION LAMP OUTPUT -35 LAMP DRIVER FD2 ON -36 LAMP DRIVER FLC -37 RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED FAST/SLOW 28 V VALID RESERVED FAST/SLOW DCVAR INPUT + RESERVED FAST/SLOW DCVAR INPUT MASTER WARNING INPUT FROM AWC -38 -39 -40 -41 -42 -43

(24)---------------(24)---------------(24)---------------(24)----------------

144J1-x FIG. 6-33 11J1-22 11J1-32, 190J1B-37

(I) (I) (I)

RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED FD 2 ON RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED VALID RESERVED ROT/YAW RATE + -53 RESERVED ROT/YAW RATE -54 RESERVED COMPASS SYNC + -55 RESERVED COMPASS SYNC -56 RESERVED INNER MARKER BEC + -57 RESERVED INNER MARKER BEC -58 RESERVED MIDDLE MARKER + -59 RESERVED MIDDLE MARKER -60 RESERVED OUTER MARKER + -61 RESERVED OUTER MARKER -62 RESERVED -63 RESERVED -64 TRIM POSN SENSOR 2 (H) -65 (24)-T-S----------S-TRIM POSN SENSOR 2 (L) -66 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND TRIM POSN SENSOR 1 (H) -67 (24)-T-S----------S-TRIM POSN SENSOR 1 (L) -68 (24)-T-S----------S-SHIELD GND RESERVED -69 RESERVED C190J1B-70

AURAL WARNING COMP (FIG. 6-33) SEC NAV 28 V VALID -45 (RESERVED FOR JOYSTICK INPUT - RIGHT) SEC SRN LATERAL DEV +-46 SEC SRN LATERAL DEV --47 -48 (24)---------------- 11J1-20 SEC GS 28 V VALID -49 SEC GS DEV + -50 SEC GS DEV -51 ROT/YAW RATE 5 V -52

-44 (24)----------------

HSCU RIGHT SURFACE POSN SHIELD GND HSCU LEFT SURFACE POSN SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-192 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(I) (I) (I) (I)

RESERVED C190J1B-71 RESERVED -72 RESERVED -73 RESERVED -74 RESERVED -75 RESERVED SEC ATT 28 V VLD -76 (RESERVED FOR JOYSTICK INPUT - UP) RESERVED SEC HDG 28 V VLD -77 (RESERVED FOR JOYSTICK INPUT - DOWN) STALL WARNING 28 VDC DISCRETE -78 (24)----------------- STALL PROTECTION COMPUTER SPARE DIS 28/0 GP -79 (RESERVED FOR JOYSTICK INPUT - LEFT) RESERVED FOR SEC AC REF + -80 RESERVED FOR SEC AC REF -81 RESERVED FOR SEC PITCH X RESERVED FOR SEC PITCH Y RESERVED FOR SEC PITCH Z RESERVED FOR SEC ROLL X RESERVED FOR SEC ROLL Y RESERVED FOR SEC ROLL Z RESERVED FOR SEC HDG X RESERVED FOR SEC HDG Y RESERVED FOR SEC HDG Z RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED SPARE RESERVED COM RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED COM RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED FOR SEC ADF BRG SIN FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR FOR SEC SEC SEC SEC SEC SEC ADF ADF ADF ADF ADF ADF BRG BRG BRG BRG BRG BRG SIN X Y COS Z COS -82 -83 -84 -85 -86 -87 -88 -89 -90 -91 -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 -100 -101

-102 -103 -104 -105 C190J1B-106

22-05-14

Page 3-193 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) Function DGC DGC DGC DGC DGC DGC PRI DGC DGC +28 V DC POWER +28 V DC POWER +28 V DC POWER DC POWER GND DC POWER GND DC POWER GND CPU LAMP RETURN SIGNAL GND SIGNAL GND Connector Pin C190J2A-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -12 -13 SHIELD GND -11 -14 -15 -16 SHIELD GND (20)----------------(20)----------------(20)----------------(20)----------------(20)----------------(20)----------------(20)----------------(22)----------------(22)----------------(24)-T-S---------S-(24)-T-S---------S-(24)-T-S---------S- (24)-T-S---------S-(24)-T-S---------S- Connects To FIG. 6-1 FIG. 6-1 FIG. 6-1 DC PWR GND DC PWR GND DC PWR GND DC PWR GND SIGNAL GND SIGNAL GND C115J1-55 C115J1-53 C115J1-54 SHIELD GND C115J1-34 C115J1-35 SHIELD GND 59J1-e 59J1-f SHIELD GND FIG. 6-21 FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GND

DH SET (L) DH SET (H) DH SET (W) -10V REF OUT SPARE PRIMARY DC-550 PRIMARY DC-550 WX CONTROL WX CONTROL PRIMARY RSB (H) PRIMARY RSB (L)

(B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B)

+ -

-17 (24)-T-S---------S--18 (24)-T-S---------S-SHIELD GND -19 (24)-T-S---------S--20 (24)-T-S---------S-

SHIELD GND ARINC 429 CH 0 IN (H) LRNA

(B)

-21 (24)-T-S---------S-- FMS (H), 190J2A-21 ARINC 429 CH 0 IN (L) LRNA -22 (24)-T-S---------S-- FMS (L), 190J2A-22 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND RESERVED -23 RESERVED -24 RESERVED -25 ARINC 429 CH 12 IN (L) -26 (24)-T-S---------S-- RESERVED (TS WITH C190J2A-40) SHIELD GND SHIELD GND RESERVED -27 RESERVED -28 ARINC 429 CH 4 IN (H) -29 (24)-T-S---------S-(PRI AHRS) ARINC 429 CH 4 IN (L) C190J2A-30 (24)-T-S---------S-(PRI AHRS) SHIELD GND

(B) (B)

C1J1B-G7, FIG. 6-10 C1J1B-G8 SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-194 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (B) (B) Function Connector Pin Connects To FIG. 6-12 SHIELD GND

ARINC 429 CH 6 IN (H) C190J2A-31 (24)-T-S---------S-ARINC 429 CH 6 IN (L) -32 (24)-T-S---------S-(DAU 2 CH B) SHIELD GND AP AP AP AP ARINC ARINC ARINC ARINC 429 429 429 429 CH CH CH CH 0 0 1 1 (H) (L) (H) (L) -33 -34 -35 -36 -37 (24)-T-S---------S--38 (24)-T-S---------S- -39 (24)-T-S---------S--40 (24)-T-S---------S--41 (24)-T-S---------S--42 (24)-T-S---------S- -43 (24)-T-S----------S- -44 (24)-T-S----------S- -45 (24)-T-S----------S--46 (24)-T-S----------S- -47 -48 -49 (24)-----------------

(B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B)

ARINC 429 OUTPUT TO DAU (H) ARINC 429 OUTPUT TO DAU (L) SHIELD GND 429 LRN OUT (HI) ARINC 429 CH 12 IN (H) ARINC 429 CH 8 IN (H) ARINC 429 CH 8 IN (L) (DAU 2 CH A) SHIELD GND ARINC 429 CH 10 IN (H) (SEC MADC) ARINC 429 CH 10 IN (L) (SEC MADC) SHIELD GND

FIG. 6-12 SHIELD GND FMS ARINC IN 2 (H) TS W\ 52 RESERVED (TS WITH) C190J2A-26) FIG. 6-12 SHIELD GND 9J1-60, 190J2B-23 FIG. 6-11 9J1-61, 190J2B-24 FIG. 6-11 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND

(B) (B)

HDLC IN #2 (H) HDLC IN #2 (L) SHIELD GND HDLC IN #2 (T) RESERVED RADAR ALT 28 V VALID

(I)

20J1-Y,193RMP-2K, 193RBP-3C, 190J2A-49 20J1-W,190J2A-51 20J1-N,190J2A-50, 193RMP-2J, 193RBP-3B SHIELD GND FMS ARINC IN 2 (L) TS W\ 39 SHIELD GND

(I) (I)

RADAR ALT + RADAR ALT -

-51 (24)-T-S----------S--50 (24)-T-S----------S- SIGNAL GND C190J2A-52 (24)-T-S----------S- SHIELD GND

(B)

429 LRN OUT (LO)

22-05-14

Page 3-195 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP Function RESERVED LEFT SIDE SELECT RESERVED RESERVED DGC-DGC/FTSU BUS (H) DGC-DGC/FTSU BUS (L) Connector Pin C190J2A-53 -54 -55 -56 -57 (24)-T-S---------S--58 (24)-T-S---------S-SIGNAL GND -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 Connects To

(O) (O) (B) (B)

TEST CONNECTOR, FIG. 6-34 SHIELD GND

(I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

RESERVED RESERVED FOR FLAP INPUT LANDING GEAR CMD DISCRETE SPEED BRAKES DEPLOYED RESERVED FOR FLAP INPUT WEIGHT ON WHEELS (WOW) RESERVED SYS CONFIG IDENT 1 SYS CONFIG IDENT 2 SYS CONFIG IDENT 3 SYS CONFIG IDENT 4 SYS CONFIG IDENT 5 SYS CONFIG IDENT 6 A/C TYPE IDENT A/C TYPE IDENT A/C TYPE IDENT A/C TYPE IDENT A/C TYPE IDENT TEST IDENT 1 TEST IDENT 2 TEST IDENT 3 TEST IDENT 4 ARINC 429 CH 9 ARINC 429 CH 9 (DAU 1 CH A) 1 2 3 4 5

(24)---------------(24)---------------(24)---------------(24)----------------

LANDING GEAR LOGIC SPEED BRAKE FIG. 6-2 GND FOR DISPLAY IN METRIC UNITS GROUND IF FMS INSTALLED GROUND IF DUAL ADF INSTALLED GROUND FOR CROSS POINTER FD CMD GROUND TO ENABLE CAT II LOGIC

-67 -68 (24)----------------69 (24)----------------70 (24)----------------71 (24)----------------

(B) (B)

-72 (24)---------------- SIGNAL GND -73 -74 (24)---------------- SIGNAL GND -75 -76 -77 -78 -79 -80 IN (H) -81 (24)-T-S---------S-- FIG. IN (L) C190J2A-82 (24)-T-S---------S-- 6-12 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-196 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (B) (B) Function Connector Pin Connects To

ARINC 429 CH 11 IN (H) C190J2A-83 (24)-T-S---------S-- FIG. ARINC 429 CH 11 IN (L) -84 (24)-T-S---------S-- 6-10 (SEC AHRS) SHIELD GND SHIELD GND RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED DIN GROUND -85 -86 -87 -88 -89 -90 -91 -92 -93 -94 -95 -96 (24)---------------- (24)---------------- FIG. 6-34 (24)---------------- (24)---------------- AUDIO WARNING SYS (24)---------------- AUDIO WARNING SYS

(B) (B) (B) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O) (O)

RS232 SERIAL DATA OUT RS232 SERIAL DATA IN RS232 SERIAL DATA GND ALT ALERT HORN OUT DECISION HEIGHT WARN OUT MASTER COMP MON OUT RAD ALT TEST OUT BANK ANNUNC OUT COUPLE ANNUNC OUT RESERVED ANNUNC OUT VS MODE ANNUNC OUT IAS MODE ANNUNC OUT ALT MODE ANNUNC OUT APR MODE ANNUNC OUT NAV MODE ANNUNC OUT HDG MODE ANNUNC OUT

-97 (24)---------------- 20J1-T, 190J2A,97 -98 (24)---------------- 11J1-27, 190J2A-98 -99 (24)---------------- 11J1-36 -100 -101 -102 -103 -104 -105 C190J2A-106 (24)--------------(24)--------------(24)--------------(24)--------------(24)--------------(24)--------------11J1-34, 11J1-31, 11J1-30, 11J1-29, 11J1-28, 11J1-26, 190J2A-101 190J2A-102 190J2A-103 190J2A-104 190J2A-105 190J2A-106

22-05-14

Page 3-197 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP Function SERVO + 28 SERVO + 28 SERVO + 28 SERVO + 28 RESERVED SERVO SERVO SERVO SERVO (B) (B) DC DC DC DC V V V V POWER POWER POWER POWER GND GND GND GND Connector Pin C190J2B-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 (24)-T-S---------S--11 (24)-T-S---------S- FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND WINDSHEAR SYS, 190J2B-13 (TS W/C190J2B-26) FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND FIG. 6-13 SHIELD GND AURAL WARNING COMP, FIG. 6-33 AURAL WARNING COMP, FIG. 6-33 FIG. 6-33 Connects To

POWER POWER POWER POWER

HDLC OUT + (DU) HDLC OUT - (DU) SHIELD GND

(B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (O) (O) (O)

RESERVED ARINC 429 OUTPUT (H) -12 ARINC 429 CH 13 IN (H) -13 (24)-T-S---------S-HDLC IN #1 (H) HDLC IN #1 (L) SHIELD GND HDLC IN #3 (H) HDLC IN #3 (L) SHIELD GND MASTER CAUTION TO AWC MASTER WARNING TO AWC MASTER WARNING LAMP OUTPUT RESERVED RESERVED -14 (24)-T-S---------S--15 (24)-T-S---------S- -16 (24)-T-S---------S--17 (24)-T-S---------S- -18 (24)----------------19 (24)----------------20 (24)----------------21 -22

(B) (B)

ARINC 429 CH 3 IN (H) -23 (24)-T-S---------S-(PRI MADC) ARINC 429 CH 3 IN (L) C190J2B-24 (24)-T-S---------S-SHIELD GND

C9J1-60, FIG. 6-11 C9J1-61, SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-198 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP Function Connector Pin Connects To

(B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B)

RESERVED ARINC 429 OUT C190J2B-25 (L) ARINC 429 CH 13 IN (L) -26 (24)-T-S---------S-ARINC 429 CH 15 IN (H) (PFD) ARINC 429 CH 15 IN (L) (PFD) SHIELD GND ARINC 429 CH 5 IN (H) (TCAS) ARINC 429 CH 5 IN (L) SHIELD GND ARINC 429 CH 7 IN (H) ARINC 429 CH 7 IN (L) (DAU 1 CH B) SHIELD GND RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED

WINDSHEAR SYS, 190J2B-26 (TS W/C190J2B-13) -27 (24)-T-S---------S-- FIG. -28 (24)-T-S---------S-- 6-13 SHIELD GND -29 (24)-T-S---------S-- 193 RMP-7G -30 (24)-T-S---------S-- 193 RMP-7H, SHIELD GND

-31 (24)-T-S---------S-- FIG. -32 (24)-T-S---------S-- 6-12 SHIELD GND

ARINC 429 OUTPUT (H) -33 ARINC 429 OUTPUT (L) -34 ALT ALERT ANNUNC OUT -35 PRIMARY AC REF + -36 PRIMARY AC REF -37 -38 -39 -40 -41 -42 -43 -44 -45 -46 -47 -48 (24)----------------49 C190J2B-50 FIG. 6-9

(I)

SG 2 REVERSION RESERVED RESERVED

22-05-14

Page 3-199 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP (I) (B) (B) (I) (I) Function AP LAMP RETURN RESERVED SECONDARY RSB (H) SECONDARY RSB (L) COUPLE PB INPUT BANK PB INPUT Connector Pin Connects To

C190J2B-51 (22)--------------- DC PWR GND -52 -53 (24)-T-S-------S--- FIG. 6-21 -54 (24)-T-S-------S--- FIG. 6-21 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -55 (24)---------------56 (24)--------------11J1-10, 190J2B-55 11J1-12, 190J2B-56

(I) (I)

RESERVED -57 RESERVED -58 +15 V EXTERNAL OUT -59 -15 V EXTERNAL OUT -60 15 V RETURN -61 RESERVED LATERAL ACCEL INPUT -62 RESERVED LAT ACCEL TEST OUTPUT-63 RESERVED NORMAL ACCEL INPUT -64 RESERVED LONGT ACCEL INPUT -65 MAN TRIM IN (UP) -66 MAN TRIM IN (DN) -67 RESERVED PITCH WHEEL IN + -68 RESERVED PITCH WHEEL IN -69 TCS 28 V INPUT RESERVED SPARE TURN KNOB INPUT SPARE TURN KNOB OUT OF DETNT AP DISCONNECT 28 V IN MOMENTARY HORN DISABLE RESERVED YD OFF ANNUNC OUT LIGHT AND HORN DISABLE RESERVED RESERVED IN/HPA RESERVED RESERVED OUT -70 (24)---------------71 -72 -73 -74 -75 (24)---------------76 (24)---------------77 (22)---------------78 -79 (22)--------------FIG. 6-17

(I)

(I) (I) (O) (O)

129J1-H, 190J2B-75 FIG. 6-16 C115J1-44 C115J1-42, C115J1-43 C9J1-76

TRIM WARN ANNUNC OUT -80 TRIM UP ANNUNC OUT -81 -82 (22)--------------YD ENG SELECT PB IN -83 YD ENG ANNUNC C190J2B-84

22-05-14

Page 3-200 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COPILOTS INTEGRATED AVIONICS COMPUTER (cont) IC-600 IO BP Function AP ENGAGE SEL PB IN AP ENGAGE ANNUNC OUT RESERVED 28 V AP CLUTCH 28 V AP CLUTCH (I) (I) (O) (O) (I) Connector Pin C190J2B-85 -86 -87 -88 -89 FIG. 6-16 AURAL WARNING COMP, FIG. 6-33 SIGNAL GND Connects To

AP DISCONNECT 28 VIN -90 (20)---------------MASTER CAUTION INPUT FROM AWC -91 (24)---------------PITCH TRIM OUT + PITCH TRIM OUT RIGHT SIDE SELECT IN RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED -92 -93 -94 (24)----------------95 -96 -97 -98 -99 -100 -101 -102 -103 -104 -105 C190J2B-106

22-05-14

Page 3-201 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

6.0

SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING INFORMATION (FIGURES)

22-05-14

Page 3-202 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

AVIONICS MASTER RELAY

7.5

FCS 1

AM DC BUS 1A

10

PFD 1

130J1-101, -102, -103

BTC1

EIC

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

10

MFD 2

131J1-101, -102, -103

DME 1

164J1A-86, -99

AM ESS DC BUS 1

RAD ALT 1 20J1-c

ADC 1 9J1-26 1641A-85, -98 164J1B-39, -52

VOR/ILS/MB 1

7.5

VHF 3 59J1-A, B 61J1-D 143J1-8, 9 143J5-8, 9 121J1B-10, -11, -12, -52

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ADF 1 164J1A-87, -100

7.5

WX

AM DC BUS 1B

TDR 1

DC BUS 1

FMS

AVIONICS MASTER RELAY

5 SBC1

FMS DL

123J1-C

SHED DC BUS 1

28 V dc Power Figure 6-1A

FMS CDU

120J1-B, F, v 5 PLT AUDIO 1 160J1-U, 160J1-V

EMBRAER 145

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RMU 1 144J1-C

ESS DC BUS 1

INVERTER

ESS DC BUS 1

22-05-14
Page 3-203/204 Nov 1/1996

136J2A-103, DAU 1B 136J2A-104 CMC

SWS - SHAKER 1

DC BUS 1

GPWS

TCAS

SWS - CHANNEL 1

PITCH TRIM 1

AWS 1

FDR 136J1A-103 136J1A-104 132J1-101, -102, -103

DAU 1A

10

EICAS DU

AHRS 1 1J1C-7

BC 1

ELT

EBC1

10

VHF 1

143J1-4, -5, -6

10 HOT BUS TO FIG 6-1B

ICI

190J2A-1, -2, -3

CENTRAL DC BUS

DISPLAY CONTROL 1

115J1-5

BACKUP ESS DC BUS 1

BACKUP HOT BUS

AHRS 1 AUX 1J1C02

BACKUP BATT

10

EICAS DU

132J1-101, -102, -103

DAU 1/2

10 BACKUP DC BUS 2

IC 1

10

MFD 1

10

PFD 2

AHRS 2 AUX

IC 2 BACKUP DC BUS 1

10

MFD 2

10

PFD 1

AD-50089@

CENTER DC BUS BATT 2

TO FIG 6-1A CVR

BTC2

AM DC BUS 2A

DC BUS 2

AM DC BUS 2B

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

BC 2

ESS DC BUS 2

CPLT AUDIO 2 C160J1-U, C160J1-V

ESS DC BUS 2

ESS DC BUS 2

RMU 2 C144J1-C

EBC2

PITCH TRIM 2

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

AWS 2

DAU 2A

137J1A-103, 137J1A-104

SWS - CHANNEL 2

STBY ATT

28 V dc Power Figure 6-1B

SWS - PUSHER

STBY ALT

DC BUS 2

SWS - SHAKER 2

EMBRAER 145

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL

10

IC 2

C190J2A-1, -2, -3

SBC2

10

PFD 2

C131J1-101, -102, -103 131J1-101, -102, -103

10

MFD 1

DME 2 C164J1A-86, -99

CDH 165J1-E

RAD ALT 2 C20J1-c

ADC 2 C9J1-26

10

VHF 2 C143J1-4, -5, -6

DISPLAY CONTROL 2 C115J1-5

HF

VOR/ILS/MB 2

C164J1A-85, -98 C164J1B-39, -52

TDR 2

C143J1-8, -9 C143J5-8, -9

AVIONICS MASTER RELAY

ADF 2 C164J1A-87, -100

OMEGA

GPS 149J1-34

SHED DC BUS 2

22-05-14
Page 3-205/206 Nov 1/1996

OBSERVER AUDIO E160J1-U,V

DAU 2B

137J2A-103, 137J2A-104

AHRS 2 C1J1C-7

AD-50090@

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

IN AIR

1J1B-K15 9J1-12 WOW SWITCH 136J2A-80 190J2A-64 137J2A-80 C1J1B-K15 C9J1-12 C190J2A-64 61J1-P C143J1-83 144J1-P C144J1-P 165J1-Y 143J1-83 193RMP-5K
AD-50091@

Weight On Wheels Figure 6-2

22-05-14

Page 3-207 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

TEST

1J1B-A10 C1J1B-A10 MASTER TEST SWITCH 9J1-70 C9J1-70

190J2A-97 20J1-T C190J2A-97 AD-39924@

Functional Test Figure 6-3

22-05-14

Page 3-208 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOT'S

COPILOT'S

+ 360/MIN 1J1B-H2 1J1B-H1 1J1B-H4 - 360/MIN HEADING SLEW 1J1B-H3 C1J1B-H1 C1J1B-H4

+ 360/MIN C1J1B-H2

C1J1B-H3 - 360/MIN

DG MODE SELECT

DG MODE SELECT

1J1B-HI

1J1B-H6

C1J1B-HI

C1J1B-H6

DG MODE

AD-39925@

AHRS Remote Switches Figure 6-4

22-05-14

Page 3-209 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

WU-650/870
LEFT PICTURE BUS H L

59J1 g h

131J1 77 78 1

DU 2
H L WX PORT 1

23" MIN 130J1 77 1 10" MAX STUB NOTES: USE HPN 3718911-1 CABLE (70 10%). TOTAL LENGTH MUST BE < 50 FT (REF. SECTION 4.6) FOR THE WU-660/WU-880, PICTURE BUS PINS ARE J1-1 (H) AND J1-2(L) 78

DU 1
H L WX PORT 1

64

TERM

AD-50092@

Left WX/DU Picture Bus Figure 6-5

22-05-14

Page 3-210 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

WU-650/870
RIGHT PICTURE BUS H L

59J1 k s

C131J1 77 78 1

DU 4
H L WX PORT 1

23" MIN C130J1 77 1 10" MAX STUB NOTES: USE HPN 3718911-1 CABLE (70 10%). TOTAL LENGTH MUST BE < 50 FT (REF. PARAGRAPH 4.6) FOR THE WU-660/WU-880, PICTURE BUS PINS ARE J1-5 (H) AND J1-6(L) 78

DU 5
H L WX PORT 1

64

TERM

AD-50093@

Right WX/DU Picture Bus Figure 6-6

22-05-14

Page 3-211 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

0 -5 V DC EDGE LIGHTING

11J1-3 61J1-H 115J1-3 C115J1-3 129J1-g 130J1-23 131J1-23 132J1-23

GC-550 WC-650 P DC-550 C PDC-550 PC-400 DU#1 DU#2 DU#3

C130J1-23 DU#5 C131J1-23 DU#4 165J1-D 160J1-q C160J1-q E160J1-q 144J1-G P CD-850 P AV-850A CP AV-850A OB AV-850A P RM-855

C144J1-G CP RM-855 AD-39927@

Edge Lighting Figure 6-7

22-05-14

Page 3-212 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

C190J1B-21
LAMP TEST GND

190J1B-21
AD-39928@

Lamp Test Figure 6-8

22-05-14

Page 3-213 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page 3-214 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

190J2B 48

IC-600 NO. 1

190J2A
DC/IC BUS IN

115J1 DC-550 NO. 1 34 H DC/IC OS MFD=PFD 35 L BUS OUT OS MFD=EICAS CS MFD=PFD CS MFD=EICAS

115J1 77 78 72 79

130J1 DU NO. 1 - PFD 1 22 87 88 89 90 91 92 DU POWER DN PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 ID NO. 3 ID NO. 2 ID NO. 1

H 15 SG REV L 16 CROSS-SIDE SG REV 63

NRM PFD EICAS

PILOTS IC-600 REVERSION SWITCH

ANNUNCIATOR POWER

COPILOTS IC-600 REVERSION SWITCH

131J1 DU NO. 2 - MFD 1 22 87 88 89 DU POWER DN PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 ID NO. 3 ID NO. 2 ID NO. 1

LATCHING SWITCHES

MFD1 REV SW

90 91 92

LIGHTING GND

LIGHTING GND

132J1 DU NO. 3 - EICAS 22 87 88 89 K2 K1 28 V DC BUS 2 K3 28 V DC BUS 1 90 91 92 DU POWER DN PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 ID NO. 3 ID NO. 2 ID NO. 1

C131J1 22 NRM PFD EICAS 87 88 89 90 91 92

DU NO. 4 - MFD 2
DU POWER DN PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 ID NO. 3 ID NO. 2 ID NO. 1

C130J1 DU NO. 5 - PFD 2 C190J2A


DC/IC BUS IN H 15 L 16

C190J2B 48

IC-600 NO. 2
SG REV

C115J1

DC-550 NO. 2

C115J1 77 78 72 79

22 87 88 89 90 91 92

DU POWER DN PORT SEL 3 PORT SEL 2 PORT SEL 1 ID NO. 3 ID NO. 2 ID NO. 1

OS MFD=PFD 34 H DC/IC OS MFD=EICAS 35 L BUS OUT CS MFD=PFD CS MFD=EICAS

MFD2 REV SW

AD-39748-R2@

Display/SG Reversionary Figure 6-9

22-05-14

Page 3-215/216 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOT'S DC-550
AHRS 2 SEL IC SERIAL BUS

115J1 73 34 35

AHRS REVERSION SWITCH

C115J1 COPILOT'S DC-550 73 34 35 AHRS 1 SEL IC SERIAL BUS

PILOT'S IC-600
429 CH 4 IN

190J2A 29 30 16 15

C190J2A COPILOT'S IC-600 29 30 16 15 83 84 429 CH 4 IN

BUS SELECT SWITCHING LOGIC

BUS SELECT SWITCHING LOGIC

429 CH 11 IN

429 CH 11 IN

83 84

AUTOPILOT
190J2A

PILOT'S AH-800
429 OUT 1 429 OUT 2 429 OUT 3 429 OUT 4

1J1B G8 G7 E5 E6 K12 K13 F14 F15 SPS, GPWS FMS

33 34

429 CH 0 IN

C1J1B COPILOT'S AH-800 G8 G7 E5 E6 K12 K13 SPS, GPWS FMS F14 F15 429 OUT 1 429 OUT 2 429 OUT 3 429 OUT 4

DAU2 DA-800
429 IN 2

137J1B 43 42

59J1-K WEATHER 59J1-L RADAR

AD-50095@

AHRS Reversion Switching Figure 6-10

22-05-14

Page 3-217 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page 3-218 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOT'S DC-550
MADC REV

115J1 74

PILOT'S MADC REV SWITCH

NORM REV

COPILOT'S MADC REV SWITCH

C115J1 COPILOT'S DC-550 74 MADC REV

PILOT'S MADC AZ-850

190J2B

PILOT'S IC-600

190J2A 43 44 35 36

COPILOT'S MADC AZ-850

429 CH 10 IN 23 429 CH 3 IN 24 AP429 CH 1 IN

COPILOT'S IC-600
TO FADEC 1A TO FADEC 1A 429 BUS OUT TO HORIZONTAL STABILIZER CONTROL UNIT 9J1 63 64 RESERVED 429 BUS OUT 1J1B K4 K5 429 CH 1 IN 9J1 60 61 C190J2A 43 44 429 CH 3 IN 429 CH 10 IN

C190J2B 23 24

C9J1 60 61 TO FADEC 1B 429 BUS OUT TO FADEC 1B TO HORIZONTAL STABILIZER CONTROL UNIT

C9J1

PILOT'S AH-800

429 BUS OUT

63 64 RESERVED

TO FADEC 2A TO FADEC 2A

TO FADEC 2B

COPILOT'S AH-800
429 CH 1 IN

C1J1B K4 K5

TO FADEC 2B

OPTIONAL P-870 WX RADAR

59J1 t r TO STALL PROTECTION CH3 COMPUTER 429 BUS OUT C9J1 429 BUS OUT 68 69 TO PRESSURE DIGITAL CONTROLLER TO OPTIONAL GPS TO WINDSHEAR COMPUTER TO OPTIONAL FMS

TO STALL PROTECTION COMPUTER TO PRESSURE DIGITAL CONTROLLER TO OPTIONAL FMS/GPS TO GROUND PROX WARNING SYSTEM 9J1 9J1 68 69 429 BUS OUT 429 BUS OUT 66 67

143J1 PILOT'S RCZ-851E 80 99 86 143J1 100 429 CH 2 IN 69 429 CH 1 IN C9J1 66 67

COPILOT'S RCZ-851E
C143J1 429 CH 1 IN 100 429 CH 2 IN 69

C143J1 99 86 80

AD-50096@

MADC Reversion Figure 6-11

22-05-14

Page 3-219/220 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS DAU REVERSION SWITCH

COPILOTS DAU REVERSION SWITCH

115 PILOT'S DC-550


DAU B SEL
J1

J1
76
75

NORM REV

C115
J1 COPILOT'S DC-550
76
75

DAU B SEL
J1 DAU A SEL

35 34

DAU A SEL

35 34

190 PILOT'S IC-600


429 CH 9 IN
429 CH 8 IN J2A 15 16

C190
J2A
81 82

J2A
81 82

COPILOT'S IC-600
429 CH 9 IN
429 CH 8 IN J2A

41 42

41 42

BUS SELECT SWITCHING LOGIC


429 CH 7 IN 429 OUTPUT
429 CH 6 IN

J2B 31 32 J2A

BUS SELECT SWITCHING LOGIC


J2B 31 32 J2A 429 CH 7 IN

15 16

J2A

37 38

31 32

31 32

429 CH 6 IN

136
J1B PILOT'S DAU CH A 43 42

J1B

137
429 CH1 IN
429 CH2 OUT 50 51 429 CH2 OUT

J1B COPILOT'S DAU CH A J1B

40 41
FIG 6-14

50 51

429 INPUT 429 CH2 OUT 429 CH1 OUT

40 41
FIG 6-14

136 PILOT'S DAU CH B

J2B

137
429 CH2 OUT

50 51

J2B COPILOT'S DAU CH B

50 51

429 CH2 OUT

AD-50097@

DAU Reversion Figure 6-12

22-05-14

Page 3-221 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)


127W

IC-600 NO. 1
DU HDLC OUT

190J2B + 10 - 11 + 27 - 28 + 16 - 17 + 14 - 15
10" MAX STUB

23" MIN

130J1 DU NO. 1 - PFD 1


10" MAX STUB

38 + 39 35 + 36 49 66 + 79 -

HDLC #1 IN

ARINC 429 CH 15 IN DU HDLC #3 IN (UNTERMINATED) DU HDLC #1 IN (TERMINATED)

10" MAX STUB

HDLC #2 IN HDLC #2 TERM ARINC 429 OUT

23" MIN

190J2A DU HDLC #2 IN + 45 - 46
10" MAX STUB

131J1 DU NO. 2 - MFD 1


10" MAX STUB

OPT HDLC #2 TERM 47

38 + 39 35 + 36 -

HDLC #1 IN

10" MAX STUB

HDLC #2 IN

23" MIN

31 + 32 -

HDLC OUT

132J1 DU NO. 3 - EICAS


10" MAX STUB

38 + 39 35 + 36 -

HDLC #1 IN

10" MAX STUB

HDLC #2 IN

23" MIN

31 + 32 -

HDLC OUT

C131J1 DU NO. 4 - MFD 2


10" MAX STUB

38 + 39 35 + 36 -

HDLC #1 IN

10" MAX STUB

HDLC #2 IN

IC-600 NO. 2
DU HDLC OUT DU HDLC #1 IN (TERMINATED) DU HDLC #3 IN (UNTERMINATED) ARINC 429 CH 15 IN

C190J2B + 10 - 11 + 14 - 15 + 16 - 17 + 27 - 28 C190J2A
23" MIN

23" MIN

31 + 32 -

HDLC OUT

10" MAX STUB

C130J1 DU NO. 5 - PFD 2


10" MAX STUB

38 + 39 35 + 36 49 66 + 79 -

HDLC #1 IN

10" MAX STUB

HDLC #2 IN HDLC #2 TERM ARINC 429 OUT

DU HDLC #2 IN

+ 45 - 46

23" MIN

OPT HDLC #2 TERM 47 23" MIN 127 W

AD-39750@

Display Wrap Around Figure 6-13

22-05-14

Page 3-222 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOT'S RMU
INPUT BUS #1

144J1

C144J1

COPILOT'S RMU
INPUT BUS #1

+ CC - DD

CC + DD -

INPUT BUS #2

+ FF - GG

FF + GG -

INPUT BUS #2

PILOT'S DAU
OUTPUT BUS #1
CHANNEL A

136J1B + 40 - 41

137J1B COPILOT'S DAU 40 + OUTPUT BUS #1 41 CHANNEL A


AD-50098@

RMU Engine Backup Display Interface Figure 6-14

22-05-14

Page 3-223 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

R MAIN AVIONICS BUS

PILOT'S DC-550
AP OFF LAMP OUT

115J1 29
30

AP OFF LAMP (PROVISION)

YD OFF LAMP (PROVISION)

AP OFF AUDIO WARNING

AP OFF HORN OUT

PILOT'S IC-600
190J2B YD OFF LAMP OUT

78

AD-39751@

AP/YD Off Warn Figure 6-15

22-05-14

Page 3-224 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PLT SERVO POWER

PILOT'S COPILOT'S WHEEL WHEEL MASTER SW MASTER SW 190J2B PILOT'S IC-600 FIGURE 6-1A 76 90 AP DISCONNECT

115J1 PILOT'S DC-550 33 AP DISCONNECT

C190J2B COPILOT'S IC-600 FIGURE 6-1A 76 90 AP DISCONNECT

C115J1 COPILOT'S DC-550 33 AP DISCONNECT

AD-36375-R2@

AP Disconnect Interface Figure 6-16

22-05-14

Page 3-225 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOT'S TCS AUTOPILOT SERVO POWER

190J2B PILOT'S IC-600 70 TCS INPUT

115J1 PILOT'S DC-550 32 TCS INPUT

COPILOT'S TCS

C190J2B COPILOT'S IC-600 70 TCS INPUT

C115J1 COPILOT'S DC-550 32 TCS INPUT

AD-39931-R1@

Touch Control Steering (TCS) Figure 6-17

22-05-14

Page 3-226 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOT'S

190J2B PILOT'S IC-600 71 GO AROUND

SIGNAL GND C190J2B COPILOT'S IC-600 71 GO AROUND

COPILOT'S

SIGNAL GND

AD-36378-R1@

Go-Around Interface Figure 6-18

22-05-14

Page 3-227 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOT'S ELEC. TRIM SWITCH SERVO POWER UP DN

190J1A 77 76

PILOT'S IC-600
MAN TRIM UP MAN TRIM DN

COPILOT'S ELEC. TRIM SWITCH SERVO POWER UP DN SECONDARY PITCH TRIM SWITCHES

190J2B 66 67 45 49 MAN TRIM UP MAN TRIM DN SEC TRIM UP SEC TRIM DN

AD-50099@

Elevator Trim Interface Figure 6-19

22-05-14

Page 3-228 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

AILERON POSITION SENSOR 190

PILOT'S IC-600
AILERON POSITION POT 1 (H) AILERON POSITION POT 1 (W) AILERON POSITION POT 1 (L)

J1A 82 83 84 85 86 87 J2B +15V OUT -15V OUT 15V RTN 59 60 61


AD-50100@

Surface Position Sensors Figure 6-20

22-05-14

Page 3-229 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

120W

120 W

120 W

120 W

RMU NO. 1

144J1

C144J1

RMU NO. 2
C144J1 H M L N

H V PRI RSB 144J1 L W M H LEFT SEC RSB N L

V H PRI RSB W L RIGHT SEC RSB

IC-600 NO. 1
190J2B PRI RSB 53 H 54 L LEFT SEC RSB

190J2A H 19 L 20

C190J2A

IC-600 NO. 2
C190J2B H 53 L 54

19 H 20 L PRI RSB RIGHT SEC RSB

COM NO. 1
PRI RSB 143J1 74 H 61 L LEFT SEC RSB

143J1 H 10 L 11

C143J1

COM NO. 2
C143J1 H 74 L 61

10 H 11 L PRI RSB RIGHT SEC RSB

NAV NO. 1
164J1A PRI RSB

164J1B H 71 L 81

C164J1B

NAV NO. 2
C164J1A H 88 L 102

71 H PRI RSB 81 L RIGHT SEC RSB

CL DEL UNIT
PRI RSB

165J1 H g L R

NOTE 2 NOTE 2 TEST CONN NO. 2 (FIG 6-34) TEST CONN NO. 1 (FIG 6-34) NOTE 2 TEST CONN NO. 1 (FIG 6-34) 120 W NOTE: 1. RSB WIRING REQUIREMENTS ARE DEFINED IN PARAGRAPH 4.7 2. THE MAX LENGTH OF THE STUB WIRING TO THE AIRCRAFT TEST CONNECTORS IS 18 INCHES 3. FOR SIMPLICITY THIS DIAGRAM DOES NOT SHOW THE SHIELD GROUNDING POINTS. ALL RSB SHIELDS SHALL BE MULTI POINT GROUNDED AS DEFINED IN PARAGRAPH 4.2.2

120 W

AD-39934@

RSB Interface Figure 6-21

22-05-14

Page 3-230 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

RIGHT SEC BUS

88 H LEFT SEC RSB 102 L

LEFT SEC BUS

PRI BUS

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COM NO. 1
(H) (L)

143J1 5 V DC OUTPUT 16 43

300 P17 3A 4A

300 J17 E3 E4 (RED) (BLK)

CLK SPARE DATA

88 89 101

5A 1A 6A

E6 E1 E7

(BLU) (GRN) (WHT)

COM NO. 1 STRAPPING CIRCUIT CARD

WD LOAD SPARE

102 103

2A 1B

E2 E8

(ORG) (YEL)

NAV NO. 1
(H) (L)

164J1B 5 V DC OUTPUT 40 26

300 P17 4B 5B

300 J17 E3 E4 (RED) (BLK)

SPARE DATA CLK

57 58 59

2B 1C 6B

E1 E7 E6

(GRN) (WHT) (BLU)

NAV NO. 1 STRAPPING CIRCUIT CARD

SPARE WD LOAD

80 84

2C 3B

E8 E2

(YEL) (ORG)

NOTE: 1. ALL WIRE IS 24 AWG.

AD-30340-R4@

COM/NAV Strapping Figure 6-22

22-05-14

Page 3-231 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

120 W

120 W

120 W

120 W

143J1 56 H DIGITAL 70 L AUDIO NO. 1

COM NO. 1

AUDIO PNL NO. 3

C143J1 DIGITAL H 56 AUDIO NO. 2 L 70

COM NO. 2

164J1B 42 H DIGITAL 29 L AUDIO NO. 1

NAV NO. 1

160AJ1 d H DIGITAL p L AUDIO NO. 1 160AJ1 DIGITAL H c AUDIO NO. 2 L n

C164J1B DIGITAL H 42 AUDIO NO. 2 L 29

NAV NO. 2

AUDIO PNL NO. 1

AUDIO PNL NO. 2 C160J1 d H DIGITAL p L AUDIO NO. 1 C160J1 DIGITAL H c AUDIO NO. 2 L n

160J1 d H DIGITAL p L AUDIO NO. 1 160J1 DIGITAL H c AUDIO NO. 2 L n

NOTE: USE ASCB CABLE AND INSTALL AS DEFINED IN PARAGRAPH 4.8

AD-39935@

Digital Audio Bus Figure 6-23

22-05-14

Page 3-232 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

OPTIONAL INTERPHONE PTT

AUDIO PANEL NO. 1


INTERPHONE PTT COMMON GND MASK MIC HI BOOM MIC HI

160J2 P D E Y 160J1

OFF XMIT

YOKE SWITCH

MASK MIC

MASK/BOOM PTT

h BOOM MIC

HAND MIC PTT HAND MIC HI HAND/MASK/BOOM MIC LO PHONE AUDIO HI PHONE AUDIO LO

A K J t k NC

HAND MIC

PHONE

AD-39752-R1@

Pilots Primary MIC/Phone Figure 6-24

22-05-14

Page 3-233 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

OPTIONAL INTERPHONE PTT

AUDIO PANEL NO. 2


INTERPHONE PTT COMMON GND MASK MIC HI BOOM MIC HI

C160J2 P D E Y C160J1

OFF XMIT

YOKE SWITCH

MASK MIC

MASK/BOOM PTT

h BOOM MIC

HAND MIC PTT HAND MIC HI HAND/MASK/BOOM MIC LO PHONE AUDIO HI PHONE AUDIO LO

A K J t k NC

HAND MIC

PHONE

AD-39753-R2@

Copilots Primary MIC/Phone Figure 6-25

22-05-14

Page 3-234 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

OPTIONAL INTERPHONE PTT

AUDIO PANEL NO. 3


INTERPHONE PTT COMMON GND MASK MIC HI BOOM MIC HI

E160J2 P D E Y E160J1

OFF XMIT

YOKE SWITCH

MASK MIC

MASK/BOOM PTT

h BOOM MIC

HAND MIC PTT HAND MIC HI HAND/MASK/BOOM MIC LO PHONE AUDIO HI PHONE AUDIO LO

A K J t k NC

HAND MIC

PHONE

AD-39754-R1@

Observers Primary MIC/Phone Figure 6-26

22-05-14

Page 3-235 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

AUDIO PNL NO. 1


EMER COM (H) MIC OUTPUT (L)

160J1 P H NC

NC

143J1 COM NO. 1 VHF 1 (H) MIC OUTPUT (L) EMER COM PTT VHF 1 COM PTT R E B F 136J1A PILOTS DAU PLT RADIO XMIT KEYING 92 (H) MIC INPUT 106 (L) 21 PTT INPUT

41

AUDIO PNL NO. 2


VHF 1 COM PTT VHF 1 (H) MIC OUTPUT (L)

C160J1 F R E

C160AJ1 AUDIO PNL NO. 3 F R E VHF 1 COM PTT (H) VHF 1 (L) MIC OUTPUT

NOTE: ALL WIRES ARE 24 AWG.

AD-39755-R2@

No. 1 VHF COM/MIC PTT Figure 6-27

22-05-14

Page 3-236 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

AUDIO PNL NO. 1


160J1 (H) VHF 2 MIC OUTPUT (L) D W NC C143J1 92 106

VHF COM NO. 2


(H) MIC INPUT (L)

VHF 2 COM PTT

21

PTT INPUT

AUDIO PNL NO. 2


C160J1 (L) VHF 2 MIC OUTPUT (H) W D C NC 136J2A 37

PILOTS DAU
COPILOT RADIO XMTR KEYING

VHF 2 COM PTT

(L) EMER COM MIC OUTPUT (H)

P H B NC

EMER COM PTT

AUDIO PNL NO. 3


E160J1 (L) VHF 2 MIC OUTPUT (H) W D NC VHF 2 COM PTT C

NOTES: ALL WIRES ARE 24 AWG.

AD-50101@

No. 2 VHF COM/MIC PTT Figure 6-28

22-05-14

Page 3-237 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

C164J1B NAV UNIT NO. 2 36 (H) 51 (L) EMER NAV AUDIO OUTPUT

AUDIO PANEL NO. 1


(H) EMER NAV AUDIO (L) EMER NAV/ COM AUDIO (H) EMER COM AUDIO

160J1 f m

(NOTE 2) 2.2K 1/4W

(NOTE 2) C160J1 2.2K 1/4W f m NC NC G

AUDIO PANEL NO. 2


(H) EMER NAV AUDIO (L) EMER NAV/ COM AUDIO (H) EMER COM AUDIO

C143J1B COM UNIT NO. 2 31 (H) NOTES: 1. ALL WIRE IS TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR 24 AWG. 2. 2.2K RESISTOR IS USED TO REDUCE EMERGENCY AUDIO LEVEL THIS IS A TYPICAL VALUE. ANY VALUE BETWEEN ZERO AND 10K MAY BE USED OR A 10K POT MAY BE INSTALLD. 29 (L) EMER COM AUDIO OUTPUT

AD-50102@

Emergency NAV/COM Audio Figure 6-29

22-05-14

Page 3-238 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

AUDIO PANEL NO. 1


(H) MAINT PHONE AUDIO (L) (H) MAINT MIC 1 (L) MAINT MIC 1 PTT STEREO MUTE (H) PA MIC (L) PA PTT (H) WARNING NO. 3 (L)

160J2 f P q e k M i U j m J

AUDIO PANEL NO. 2


(H) WARNING NO. 3 (L) STEREO MUTE (H) PA MIC (L) PA PTT

C160J2 m J M i U j

PASSENGER ADDRESS SYSTEM

AUDIO PANEL NO. 3


MAINT MIC 2 PTT (H) MAINT MIC 2 (L) (H) WARNING NO. 3 (L) STEREO MUTE (H) PA MIC (L) PA PTT

E160J2 R g n m J M i U j

AD-39757@

Passenger Address Interface Figure 6-30

22-05-14

Page 3-239 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

COM NO. 1
MUT SUPP INPUT/OUTPUT

143J1 94

164J1A 42

NAV NO. 1
MUT SUPP INPUT/OUTPUT

COM NO. 2
MUT SUPP INPUT/OUTPUT

C143J1 94

C164J1A 42

NAV NO. 2
MUT SUPP INPUT/OUTPUT

TCAS COMPUTER
MUT SUPP INPUT/OUTPUT

193LBP 12

NOTES: 1. USE 24 AWG SINGLE SHIELDED WIRE 2. GROUND SHIELD ENDS AT NAV AND COM UNIT BOBBINS.

AD-50103@

DME/XPDR Mutual Suppression Figure 6-31

22-05-14

Page 3-240 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

HF SYSTEM
HF PTT

AUDIO PNL NO. 1 160J1


HF 1 PTT b

143J1 VHF COM NO. 1 HF COM XMIT 37 (GND/OPEN)

AUDIO PNL NO. 2 C160J1


HF 1 PTT b

164J1A NAV NO. 1 66 HF KEY (ADF)

AUDIO PNL NO. 3 E160J1


HF 1 PTT b

C164J1 NAV NO. 2 66 HF KEY (ADF)

NOTES: 1. ALL WIRE IS 24 AWG.

AD-39938@

HF Considerations Figure 6-32

22-05-14

Page 3-241 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOT'S MASTER WARNING ANNUNC/SWITCH

COPILOT'S MASTER WARNING ANNUNC/SWITCH

+28 VDC

+28 VDC

PILOT'S MASTER CAUTION ANNUNC/SWITCH

COPILOT'S MASTER CAUTION ANNUNC/SWITCH

+28 VDC

+28 VDC

PILOT'S IC-600
MASTER CAUTION LAMP OUTPUT MASTER WARNING INPUT FROM AWC

190J1B 35 44

C190J1B COPILOT'S IC-600 35 44 MASTER CAUTION LAMP OUTPUT MASTER WARNING INPUT FROM AWC

190J2B MASTER CAUTION OUTPUT TO AWC MASTER WARNING OUTPUT TO AWC MASTER WARNING LAMP OUTPUT MASTER CAUTION INPUT FROM AWC 18 19 20 91 AURAL WARNING 115J1 COMPUTER 60 61

C190J2B 18 19 20 91 MASTER CAUTION OUTPUT TO AWC MASTER WARNING OUTPUT TO AWC MASTER WARNING LAMP OUTPUT MASTER CAUTION INPUT FROM AWC

PILOT'S DC-550
MASTER CAUTION GND = ACTIVE MASTER WARNING GND = ACTIVE

AURAL WARNING COMPUTER C115J1 COPILOT'S DC-550 60 61 MASTER CAUTION GND = ACTIVE MASTER WARNING GND = ACTIVE

AD-39939-R1@

Master Caution/Warning Figure 6-33

22-05-14

Page 3-242 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

9 10 11 18 27 28 29 36 47 48 49

TX RX COM MODE SEL TX RX COM MODE SEL TX RX COM IC-600 1 RS-232 AHRU 2 RS-232 AHRU 1 RS-232

12 13 14

TX RX COM DAU 1A RS-232

37 - PIN D - CONNECTOR (M24308/4-4F)

15 16 17

TX RX COM DAU 1B RS-232

18 19 20

TX RX COM DAU 2A RS-232

50 - PIN D - CONNECTOR (M24308/4-5F)

30 31 32

TX RX COM IC-600 2 RS-232

21 22 23

TX RX COM DAU 2B RS-232

2 IC-600 ICB 1

3 4 5

TX RX COM AZ-850 1 RS-232

21 22 23

TX RX COM AZ-850 2 RS-232

24 33 41

TX RX COM
AD-50104@

NZ-2000 RS-232

Maintenance Panel Connections Figure 6-34

22-05-14

Page 3-243 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

APPENDIX A ARINC 429 INTERFACES

22-05-14

Page 3-244 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

IC-600 ARINC 429 PORT ALLOCATIONS IC-600 INPUT PORT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 AP 0 AP 1

PINS J2A-21,22 RESERVED J2A-23,24 J2B-23,24 J2A-29,30 J2B-29,30 J2A-31,32 J2B-31,32 J2A-41,42 J2A-81,82 J2A-43,44 J2A-83,84 J2A-40,26 J2B-13,26 J2A-27,28 J2B-27,28 J2A-33,34 J2A-35,36

DESCRIPTION LRN RESERVED MAINTENANCE COMPUTER (PLT ONLY) PRI MADC PRI AHRS TCAS SEC R DAU SEC L DAU PRI R DAU PRI L DAU SEC MADC SEC AHRS RESERVED WINDSHEAR RESERVED OS PFD AHRS AHRS

IC-600 OUTPUT PORT 0 1

PINS J2A-39,52 J2A-37,38

DESCRIPTION LRN DAU (IC-600 NO. 1 TO DAU NO. 1)

22-05-14

Page 3-245 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

AH-800 ARINC 429 PORT ALLOCATIONS AH-800 INPUT PORT 1 2 AH-800 OUTPUT PORT 1 2 3 4

PINS J1B-K4,K5 J1B-J10,J11

DESCRIPTION SEC MADC PRI MADC

PINS J1B-G7,G8 J1B-E5,E6 J1B-K12,K13 J1B-F14,F15

DESCRIPTION PRI IC-600 SEC IC-600, AP IC-600 WEATHER RADAR OPTIONAL LRN, DAU NO. 2

AZ-850 ARINC 429 PORT ALLOCATIONS AZ-850 OUTPUT PORT 1 2 3 4

PINS J1-60,61 J1-63,64 J1-66,67 J1-68,69

DESCRIPTION PRI IC-600, SEC IC-600 OS FADEC, CS FADEC, HSCU PRI COM, SEC COM, AHRS, WXR STALL PROTECTION SYSTEM, ECS, GPWS

22-05-14

Page 3-246 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

DA-800 ARINC 429 PORT ALLOCATIONS (for each channel) DA-800 INPUT PORT 1 2 3 4 5 6 DA-800 OUTPUT PORT 1A 1B 2A 2B

PINS J1B-42,43 J1B-44,45 J1B-46,47 J1B-48,49 J2B-42,43 J2B-44,45

DESCRIPTION OS IC-600 (TO NO. 1 DAU), AHRU (TO NO. 2 DAU) SHIPS CLOCK (TO NO. 1 DAU) CABIN PRESSURE (TO NO. 2 DAU) OS FADEC CH. A FUEL COMPUTER STALL WARNING SYSTEM OS FADEC CH. B

PINS J1B-40,41 J2B-40,41 J1B-50,51 J2B-50,51

DESCRIPTION RMU CMC IC-600 IC-600

22-05-14

Page 3-247 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

APPENDIX B OPTIONAL FMS

22-05-14

Page 3-248 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

FMS NAVIGATION COMPUTER NZ-2000 IO BP ( ) ( ) (B) (B) ( ) (I) (I) ( ) ( ) ( ) (O) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (B) (B) ( ) (B) (B) (I) (I) (I) (I) (O) ( ) ( ) (I) (O) (O)

Function RESERVED FOR GROWTH RESERVED FOR GROWTH ASCB PORT A ONSIDE (H) ASCB PORT A ONSIDE (L)

Connector Pin 121J1A-1 -2 -4 -30 -5 -6 -7 -8

Connects To

IT BATTERY CURRENT SENSE TAG SYNC IN CDU SYNC IN BUFFERED POWER VALID (TEST)

TESTIN2 -10 TESTIN1 -11 VERT TRACK AURAL ALRT (G/O) -12 RESERVED FOR GROWTH -13 RESERVED FOR GROWTH -14 RESERVED FOR GROWTH -15 RESERVED FOR GROWTH -16 RS-232 FMS CPU DM REC RS-232 FMS CPU DM XMT ADC VMO CONTROL OUT ASCB PORT B OFFSIDE (H) ASCB PORT B OFFSIDE (L) -17 -3 -18 -20 -9

(24)----------------- TEST CONNECTOR (24)----------------- TEST CONNECTOR

(24)----------------- TEST CONNECTOR (24)----------------- TEST CONNECTOR

TESTIN4 -21 SPARE DISC IN #17 -22 SPARE DISC IN #23 -23 SPARE FMS DISC IN #3 -24 SPARE FMS DISC OUT #3 -25 RESERVED FOR GROWTH -26 RESERVED FOR GROWTH -27 CDU VALID IN -28 INDEPENDENT OPERATION OUT -29 SPARE DISC OUT #15 121J1A-31

(24)----------------- TEST CONNECTOR

(22)----------------- 120J1-i

22-05-14

Page 3-249 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

NAVIGATION COMPUTER NZ-2000 (cont) IO BP (B) (B) (I) (B) Function A-429 RCVR #20 (H) A-429 RCVR #20 (L) Connector Pin 121J1A-32 -19 -33 -34 (24)----------------- TEST CONNECTOR (24)----------------- TEST CONNECTOR Connects To

FLASH PROGRAM ENABLE IN RS-232 IOP CPU DM XMT (SEE J1B-69 FOR RCV PIN) TESTIN5 TESTIN3 SPARE FMS DISC OUT #4 ONSIDE AUTO TUNING OUT POWER SUPPLY TEST SIGNAL INITIATED XFER-RECEIVE IN SPARE DISC IN #15 RESERVED FOR GROWTH RESERVED FOR GROWTH

(I) (I) (O) (O) ( ) (I) (I) ( ) ( ) (B) (B) (I) (B) (B) (O) (O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (B) (B)

-35 -37 -38 -39 -40 -41 -42 -43 -44

(24)----------------- TEST CONNECTOR (24)----------------- TEST CONNECTOR

ASCB PortA ONSIDE Ver B (H) -46 ASCB PortA ONSIDE Ver B (L) -58 SDI #1 IN (IDENT3) -47 (24)----------------- SIGNAL GROUND

ASCB PortB OFFSIDE Ver B (H)-48 ASCB PortB OFFSIDE Ver B (L)-36 TAG SYNC OUT CDU SYNC OUT SPARE DISC OUT #16 CDU MESSAGE OUT Analog In #1 (H) Analog In #1 (L) TRUE REFERENCE SELECTED IN A-429 RCVR #19 (H) A-429 RCVR #19 (L) -50 -51 -53 -54 -56 -55 -57

-59 121J1A-45

22-05-14

Page 3-250 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

NAVIGATION COMPUTER NZ-2000 (cont) IO BP (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) Function A-429 RCVR #21 (H) A-429 RCVR #21 (L) Connector Pin 121J1A-60 -74 -61 (24)----------------- 199J1-3 -62 (24)-T-S-----------S- 149J1-18 -49 (24)-T-S-----------S- 149J1-37 SHIELD GND -63 -77 -64 -65 -66 -79 -67 -68 -69 -70 -71 -84 -73 (24)-T-S-----------S- C190J2A-39 -72 (24)-T-S-----------S- C190J2A-52 SHIELD GND -78 -80 -81 -94 -82 -83 -85 121J1A-86 Connects To

RS-232 CONFIG MOD RCVR ARINC-429 GB#1 XMT (H) ARINC-429 GB#1 XMT (L) SHIELD GND A-429 RCVR #16 (H) A-429 RCVR #16 (L) SPARE FMS DISC IN #5 SPARE FMS DISC IN #6 A-429 XMTR #6 (H) A-429 XMTR #6 (L) SPARE DISC IN #18 SPARE DISC IN #24 DEGRADED ACCURACY OUT SPARE DISC IN #19 Analog In #2 (H) Analog In #2 (L) A-429 RCVR #18 (H) A-429 RCVR #18 (L) SHIELD GND REMOTE TUNING OUT SPARE DISC IN #13 Analog In #3 (H) Analog In #3 (L) ILS*/MLS SELECT IN SPARE DISC IN #16 SPARE DISC IN #12 SPARE DISC IN #21

(B) (B) (I) (I) (B) (B) (I) (I) (O) (I) (I) (I) (B) (B)

(O) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I) (I)

22-05-14

Page 3-251 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

NAVIGATION COMPUTER NZ-2000 (cont) IO BP (B) (B) (B) (B) Function A-429 RCVR #11 (H) A-429 RCVR #11 (L) Connector Pin 121J1A-88 -101 -89 (24)-T-S-----------S- 190J2A-39 -75 (24)-T-S-----------S- 190J2A-52 SHIELD GND -90 (24)-T-S-----------S- C9J1-68 MADC -76 (24)-T-S-----------S- C9J1-69 #2 SHIELD GND -92 (22)-T-S-----------S- 120J1-P -52 (22)-T-S-----------S- 120J1-R SHIELD GND -93 -95 -96 -97 -98 -99 -100 Connects To

A-429 RCVR #17 (H) A-429 RCVR #17 (L) SHIELD GND A-429 RCVR #13 (H) A-429 RCVR #13 (L) SHIELD GND RS422 CDU CNTL REC (H) RS422 CDU CNTL REC (L) SHIELD GND SPARE FMS DISC IN #4 SPARE DISC IN #14 APPROACH SENSITIVITY OUT SPARE DISC IN #22 NAV COMPUTER VALID OUT SPARE DISC IN #20 OFFSIDE AUTO TUNING OUT

(B) (B)

(B) (B)

(I) (I) (O) (I) (O) (I) (O) (B) (B) (B) (B)

ASCB PortA ONSIDE Clock (H) -102 ASCB PortA ONSIDE Clock (L) -87 RS422 CDU CNTL XMT (H) RS422 CDU CNTL XMT (L) SHIELD GND A-429 RCVR #15 (H) A-429 RCVR #15 (L) SHIELD GND RS-232 SPARE XMT IOP -103 (22)-T-S-----------S- 120J1-U -104 (22)-T-S-----------S- 120J1-V SHIELD GND -105 (24)-T-S-----------S- RESERVED -91 (24)-T-S-----------S- FOR AFIS SHIELD GND

(B) (B)

(B)

121J1A-106

22-05-14

Page 3-252 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

NAVIGATION COMPUTER NZ-2000 (cont) IO BP (B) (B) Function Connector Pin Connects To

RS422 CDU DAT REC (H) 121J1B-1 (22)-T-S-----------S-- 120J1-M RS422 CDU DATA REC (L) -14 (22)-T-S-----------S-- 120J1-N SHIELD GND SHIELD GND SPARE FMS DISC IN #7 ARINC-429 GB#2 XMT (H) ARINC-429 GB#2 XMT (L) SHIELD GND A-429 XMTR #3 (H) A-429 XMTR #3 (L) SHIELD GND OFFSET ALERT OUT SPARE DISC OUT #12 SPARE DISC OUT #14 CONFIG MODULE POWER +5V TEST SIGNAL +14V Power +28V Power +28v Power +28V RS422 CDU DATA XMT (H) RS422 CDU DATA XMT (L) SHIELD GND A-429 RCVR #1 (H) A-429 RCVR #1 (L) SHIELD GND A-429 RCVR #2 (H) A-429 RCVR #2 (L) SHIELD GND TEST SIGNAL -14V Power Return Power Return Power Return -2 -3 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 193RMP-6A -15 (24)-T-S-----------S-- 193RMP-6B SHIELD GND -4 (24)-T-S-----------S-- RESERVED -16 (24)-T-S-----------S-- FOR AFIS SHIELD GND -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12

(I) (B) (B)

(B) (B)

(O) (O) (O) (P) ( ) (P) (P) (P) (B) (B)

(22)----------------- 199J1-1 (22)----------------- 5A CKT BRKR (22)----------------- 121J1B-52 (22)-----------------

-13 (24)-T-S-----------S- 120J1-S -26 (24)-T-S-----------S- 120J1-T SHIELD GND -17 (24)-T-S-----------S- 149J1-38 -18 (24)-T-S-----------S- 149J1-39 SHIELD GND -19 (24)-T-S-----------S- OMEGA -20 (24)-T-S-----------S- SENSOR SHIELD GND -22

(B) (B)

(B) (B)

( ) (P) (P) (P)

-23 -24 121J1B-25

(22)----------------- (22)----------------- DC GROUND (22)-----------------

22-05-14

Page 3-253 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

NAVIGATION COMPUTER NZ-2000 (cont) IO BP (B) (B) (B) (B) Function A-429 RCVR #14 (H) A-429 RCVR #14 (L) Connector Pin 121J1B-27 -54 Connects To

RS422 DATA LDR CLK XMT (H) -29 (22)-T-S-----------S- 123J1-K RS422 DATA LDR CLK XMT (L) -28 (22)-T-S-----------S- 123J1-J SHIELD GND SHIELD GND RS422 GENERAL BUS XMT (H) RS422 GENERAL BUS XMT (L) SHIELD GND A-429 RCVR #7 (H) A-429 RCVR #7 (L) A-429 RCVR #3 (H) A-429 RCVR #3 (L) SEC RADIO MANUAL TUNE IN TEST SIGNAL +5V Chassis Ground Chassis Ground Signal Ground SDI #3 IN (IDENT1) RS-232 SPARE REC IOP SPARE FMS DISC IN #8 A-429 RCVR #5 (H) A-429 RCVR #5 (L) SHIELD GND -31 (24)-T-S-----------S- 144J1-AA, C144J1-AA -30 (24)-T-S-----------S- 144J1-t, C144J1-t SHIELD GND -33 -47 -34 -21 -35 -36 -37 -38 -39 -40 -41 -42

(B) (B)

(B) (B) (B) (B) (I) ( ) (P) (P) (P) (I) (B) (I) (B) (B)

(22)----------------- CHASSIS GROUND (22)----------------- CHASSIS GROUND (22)----------------- SIGNAL GROUND

-44 (24)-T-S-----------S- C1J1B-K12 AHRS -43 (24)-T-S-----------S- C1J1B-K13 #2 SHIELD GND

(B) (B)

RS422 DATA LDR DATA XMT (H) -45 (22)-T-S-----------S- 123J1-H RS422 DATA LDR DATA XMT (L) -58 (22)-T-S-----------S- 123J1-G SHIELD GND SHIELD GND RS422 XMTR #2 (H) RS422 XMTR #2 (L) SIGNAL GND FOR C.M. -46 -32 121J1B-48 (22)----------------- 199J1-2, TEST CONNECTOR

(B) (B) ( )

22-05-14

Page 3-254 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

NAVIGATION COMPUTER NZ-2000 (cont) IO BP (B) (B) Function Connector Pin Connects To

A-429 RCVR #4 (H) 121J1B-49 (24)-T-S-----------S- 1J1B-K12 AHRS A-429 RCVR #4 (L) -50 (24)-T-S-----------S- 1J1B-K13 #1 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND TEST SIGNAL VS Aircraft Battery +28V -51 -52 (22)----------------- TO 28 VDC FMS MAIN POWER, 121J1B-10, -11,-12

( ) ( )

(B) (I) (B) (B)

RS-232 CFG MOD XMT (RSRVD) IDENT4 (PRIVATE MODE) RS422 CDU CLOCK XMT (H) RS422 CDU CLOCK XMT (L) SHIELD GND A-429 RCVR #6 (H) A-429 RCVR #6 (L) PERF COMPUTER INSTALLED A-429 RCVR #8 (H) A-429 RCVR #8 (L) Analog In #4 (H) Analog In #4 (L) DATA LOADER CONNECTED IN MAINTENANCE TEST ENABLE IN A-429 RCVR #12 (H) A-429 RCVR #12 (L) SHIELD GND RS-232 IOP CPU DM REC (SEE J1A-34 FOR XMT PIN) RS422 RCVR #5A (H) RS422 RCVR #5A (L)

-53 -55 -57 (22)-T-S-----------S- 120J1-W -56 (22)-T-S-----------S- 120J1-X SHIELD GND -59 -60 -61 -62 -75 -64 -63 -65 -66 (24)----------------- 123J1-E, 149J1-12

(B) (B) (I) (B) (B) (I) (I) (I) (I) (B) (B)

-67 (24)-T-S-----------S- 9J1-68 MADC -68 (24)-T-S-----------S- 9J1-69 #1 SHIELD GND -69 (24)----------------- TEST CONNECTOR

(B)

(B) (B)

-71 121J1B-70

22-05-14

Page 3-255 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

NAVIGATION COMPUTER NZ-2000 (cont) IO BP (B) (B) Function Connector Pin Connects To

RS422 DME SEC RCV (H) 121J1B-73 (24)-T-S-----------S- C164J1A-57 RS422 DME SEC RCV (L) -74 (24)-T-S-----------S- C164J1A-44 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND LATERAL WAYPOINT ALERT OUT WEIGHT ON WHEELS (WOW) IN RS422 RCVR #5B (H) RS422 RCVR #5B (L) RS422 DME PRI RCVR (H) RS422 DME PRI RCVR (L) SHIELD GND SDI #2 IN (IDENT2) -76 -77 -79 -78 -80 (24)-T-S-----------S- 164J1A-57 -81 (24)-T-S-----------S- 164J1A-44 SHIELD GND -84

(O) (I) (B) (B) (B) (B)

(24)----------------- GND = WOW

(I) (B) (B)

RS422 DATA LDR DATA REC (H) -86 (22)-T-S-----------S- 123J1-T RS422 DATA LDR DATA REC (L) -72 (22)-T-S-----------S- 123J1-S SHIELD GND SHIELD GND A-429 RCVR #10 (H) A-429 RCVR #10 (L) TEST SIGNAL +5 TRUE/MAGNETIC SELECTED OUT INITIATED XFER-TRANSMIT IN RESERVED FOR GROWTH DEAD RECKONING OUT RS422 VOR SEC RCVR (H) RS422 VOR SEC RCVR (L) SHIELD GND RS422 VOR PRI RCVR (H) RS422 VOR PRI RCVR (L) SHIELD GND RS422 XMTR #3 (H) RS422 XMTR #3 (L) -87 -101 -88 -89 -91 -92 -93 -94 (24)-T-S-----------S- C164J1B-89 -95 (24)-T-S-----------S- C164J1A-59 SHIELD GND -96 (24)-T-S-----------S- 164J1B-89 -82 (24)-T-S-----------S- 164J1A-59 SHIELD GND

(B) (B) ( ) (O) (I) ( ) (O) (B) (B)

(B) (B)

(B) (B)

-97 121J1B-83

22-05-14

Page 3-256 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

NAVIGATION COMPUTER NZ-2000 (cont) IO BP (B) (B) (B) (B) Function A-429 XMTR #5 (H) A-429 XMTR #5 (L) A-429 XMTR #4 (H) A-429 XMTR #4 (L) SHIELD GND (I) (B) (B) (O) (I) ( ) PRI RADIO MANUAL TUNE IN A-429 RCVR #9 (H) A-429 RCVR #9 (L) Connector Pin 121J1B-98 -85 (24)-T-S-----------S- 190J2A-21, GPWS C190J2A-21 -100 (24)-T-S-----------S- 190J2A-22, GPWS C190J2A-22 SHIELD GND -102 -103 -90 -99 Connects To

VERT WAYPOINT ALERT OUT -104 SPARE DISC IN #13 -105 RESERVED FOR GROWTH 121J1B-106

22-05-14

Page 3-257 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

FMS CDU CD-810 IO BP (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) (P) Function Connector Pin Connects To FIG. 6-1A POWER GND LIGHTING GND FIG. 6-1A CHASSIS GND LIGHTING GND ACFT 5V LIGHTING

+28 VDC POWER 120J1-B POWER RETURN -C PANEL LIGHTING RETURN -D 28V ANNUNC LIGHTING -F CHASSIS GND -G ANNUNC LIGHTING RETURN -H 5V KEYBOAD PANEL LIGHTING -J

(20)--------------------(20)--------------------(22)--------------------(20)--------------------(20)--------------------(22)--------------------(22)---------------------

(B) (B)

RS422 XMTR NAV CMPTR - DATA

(H) -M (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1B-1 (L) -N (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1B-14 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND (H) -P (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1A-92 (L) -R (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1A-52 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND (H) -S (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1B-13 (L) -T (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1B-26 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND (H) -U (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1A-103 (L) -V (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1A-104 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND (H) -W (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1B-57 (L) -X (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1B-56 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -i -m -n -q -s (22)--------------------- 121J1A-28

(B) (B)

RS422 XMTR NAV CMPTR - CNTL

(B) (B)

RS422 RCVR NAV CMPTR - DATA

(B) (B)

RS422 RCVR NAV CMPTR - CNTL

(B) (B)

RS422 RCVR NAV CMPTR - CLK

(O) (O) (O) (I) (I) (I) (I)

CDU VALID (GND/OPEN) R PHOTO SENSOR OUT L PHOTO SENSOR OUT DIM CALIBRATION LAMP TEST

ANNUNC LIGHTING BRT/DIM -v (OPEN/28V) ANNUNC LIGHTING DIM 120J1-w CONTROL (0 - 28 V)

(22)--------------------- FIG. 6-1A (22)--------------------- ACFT ANNUNC DIM CONTROL

22-05-14

Page 3-258 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

FMS DATA LOADER DL-900 IO BP (P) (P) (O) Function +28 VDC POWER RETURN +28 VDC POWER LOADER CONNECTED LEFT Connector Pin 123J1-B -C -E Connects To

(20)--------------------- POWER GND (20)--------------------- FIG. 6-1A (22)--------------------- 121J1B-65, 149J1-12

(B) (B)

RS422 RCVR DATA

(L) -G (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1B-58 (H) -H (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1B-45 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND (L) -J (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1B-28 (H) -K (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1B-29 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND (L) -S (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1B-72 (H) -T (22)---T-S-----------S--- 121J1B-86 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -U -V -W -X -Y (22)-------------------- MAINT (22)-------------------- (22)-------------------- TEST (22)-------------------- (22)-------------------- CONN

(B) (B)

RS422 RCVR CLOCK

(B) (B)

RS422 TXMITR DATA

(B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B) (B)

RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232

RCV LINE SIG DET SIGNAL GND DATA SET READY CLEAR TO SEND REQUEST TO SEND

RS232 RCV DATA RS232 XMIT DATA

-Z (22)---T-S-----------S--- 149J1-2 -a (22)---T-S-----------S--- 149J1-3 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND 123J1-b (22)--------------------- CHASSIS GND

(P)

CHASSIS GND

22-05-14

Page 3-259 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

FMS CONFIGURATION MODULE IM-803 IO BP (P) (P) (O) Function +5 VDC POWER DC POWER RETURN DATA XMIT Connector Pin 199J1-1 -2 -3 Connects To

(22)-------------------- 121J1B-8 (22)-------------------- 121J1B-48, TEST CONNECTOR (24)-------------------- 121J1A-61

22-05-14

Page 3-260 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

APPENDIX C PRIMUS 870/660/880 OPTIONS

22-05-14

Page 3-261 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ANTENNA AND RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER UNIT WU-870

Function 28 V DC POWER POWER GROUND #2 CONTROL BUS H L H L

Connector Pin 59J1-A -B -X -W -a -b (20)------------------(20)------------------(20)------------------(20)-------------------

Connects To 28 VDC Ckt Brkr, 7.5 Amp, 61J1-D DC GND DC GND

#1 CONTROL BUS

-c (24)-T-S------------S-- 61J1-A -d (24)-T-S------------S-- 61J1-B SHIELD GND 61J1-M -p (24)------NC -U (24)------------------- 61J1-R -T (24)------------------- ACFT WOW SWITCH -C -V -F -Y -E -S RESERVED FOR ANALOG AIRSPEED INPUT

CONTROL BUS SHIELD REMOTE ON WEIGHT ON WHEELS TRANSMIT ON

ARINC 429 ADC INPUT INSTALLED STABILIZATION INPUT (ARINC 429) H L

-H (24)------------------- SIG GND

-K (24)-T-S------------S-- 1J1B-K12 -L (24)-T-S------------S-- 1J1B-K13 (FIG 6-10) SHIELD GND SHIELD GND -R (24)------------------- SIG GND, 59J1-T -P -J -M -N

REACT COMPENSATION OVERRIDE GND FOR 200 MV/DEG

STABILIZATION 400 HZ 26V -Z REF INPUT 115V -D COM -G H -m (24)-T-S------------S-- 190J2A-17 LEFT EFIS CONTROL BUS L 59J1-n (24)-T-S------------S-- 190J2A-18 SHIELD GND SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-262 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

ANTENNA AND RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER UNIT (cont) WU-870

Function ARINC 429 AIR DATA INPUT H L

Connector Pin 59J1-t (24)-T-S------------S--r (24)-T-S------------S--

Connects To MADC MADC

RIGHT EFIS CONTROL BUS

H L SHIELD GND

-e (24)-T-S------------S-- C190J2A-17 -f (24)-T-S------------S-- C190J2A-18 SHIELD GND

LEFT EFIS PICTURE BUS

-q (24)------NC -g (24)-T-S-------------S- L -h (24)-T-S-------------S- SHIELD GND -i -j H -k (24)-T-S------------S- L 59J1-s (24)-T-S------------S- SHIELD GND

130J1-77, 131J1-77 FIG.6-5 130J1-64, 131J1-78 SHIELD GND

CENTER PICTURE BUS

H L

RIGHT EFIS PICTURE BUS

C130J1-77, C131J1-77 FIG. C130J1-64, 6-6 C131J1-78 SHIELD GND

22-05-14

Page 3-263 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS WEATHER RADAR CONTROLLER WC-870

Function SERIAL CONTROL (HI) SERIAL CONTROL (LO) SPARE 28 V DC INPUT 28 V DC GND CHASSIS GND EDGE LIGHTING 28 V DC (+) EDGE LIGHTING 5 V AC/DC (+) EDGE LIGHTING RETURN ANNUNCIATOR DIMMING SPARE CONTROL BUS SHIELD GND SPARE FSB1 REMOTE ON FSB2 OFF IN OFF OUT

Connector Pin 61J1-A (24)----T-S--------S--B (24)----T-S--------S- -C ------NC -D (22)---------------- -E (22)-----------------F (22)-----------------G ------NC -H (24)-----------------J (24)-----------------K (24)-----------------L ------NC -M (24)----- -N ------NC -P (24)------------------R (24)------------------S ------NC -T ------NC 61J1-U ------NC

Connects To 59J1-c 59J1-d SHIELD GND +28 VDC PWR, 7.5 Amps, 59J1-B DC PWR GND CHASSIS GND 5V PNL LIGHTING LIGHTING GND DAY NIGHT LOGIC

FIG 6-2 59J1-U

22-05-14

Page 3-264 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

WEATHER RADAR RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER WU-660/880

IOPB (O) (O)

Function LEFT WXPD BUS (P) LEFT WXPD BUS (N)

Connector Pin 59J1-1 (24)-T-S-----------S--2 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD -3 -----NC -4 -----NC -5 (24)-T-S-----------S--6 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD -7 -----NC -8 -----NC -9 -----NC -10 -----NC -11 (22)------------------12 -----NC -13 -14 -15 -16 -17 -18 -19 -20 -21 (22)-----------------(22)-----------------(22)-----------------(22)----------------------NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC

Connects To FIG. 6-5 FIG. 6-5 SHIELD

RESERVED RESERVED (O) (O) RIGHT WXPD BUS (P) RIGHT WXPD BUS (N)

FIG. 6-6 FIG. 6-6 SHIELD

RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED (I) REMOTE ON RESERVED (P) (P) (P) (P) +27.5 +27.5 POWER POWER V DC PRI POWER V DC PRI POWER GROUND GROUND

61J1-R

FIG. 6-1 FIG. 6-1 DC GND DC GND

RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED (I) (I) ARINC 429 AHRS (P) ARINC 429 AHRS (N) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED

-22 (24)-T-S-----------S--23 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD -24 -----NC -25 -----NC -26 -----NC -27 -----NC 59J1-28 -----NC

FIG. 6-10 FIG. 6-10 SHIELD

22-05-14

Page 3-265 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

WEATHER RADAR RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER (cont) WU-660/880 IOPB Function Connector Pin Connects To

RESERVED 59J1-29 -----NC LEFT EFIS CONTROL BUS (H) -30 (24)-T-S-----------S-LEFT EFIS CONTROL BUS (L) -31 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD RIGHT EFIS CONTROL BUS (H) -32 (24)-T-S-----------S-RIGHT EFIS CONTROL BUS (L) -33 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD RESERVED -34 -----NC RESERVED -35 -----NC RESERVED -36 -----NC RESERVED -37 -----NC RESERVED -38 -----NC RESERVED -39 -----NC RESERVED -40 -----NC RESERVED -41 -----NC RESERVED -42 -----NC ARINC 429 AIR DATA (P) -43 (24)-T-S-----------S-ARINC 429 AIR DATA (N) -44 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED -45 -46 -47 -48 -49 -50 -51 -52 -53 -54 -55 -56 -57 -58 -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 59J1-67 -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC

190J2A-17 190J2A-18 SHIELD C190J2A-17 C190J2A-18 SHIELD

(I) (I)

FIG. 6-11 FIG. 6-11 SHIELD

22-05-14

Page 3-266 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

WEATHER RADAR RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER (cont) WU-660/880

IOPB

Function RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED LEFT SCI BUS (P) LEFT SCI BUS (N)

Connector Pin 59J1-68 -----NC -69 -----NC -70 -----NC -71 (24)-T-S-----------S--72 (24)-T-S-----------S-SHIELD -73 -74 -75 -76 -77 -78 -79 -80 -81 -82 -83 -84 -85 -86 -87 -88 -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC --------------------------NC -----NC -----NC

Connects To

(B) (B)

61J1-A 61J1-B 61J1-M

(I) (I) (I) (I)

RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED ALT/AIR/STAB ALT/AIR/STAB ALT/AIR/STAB ALT/AIR/STAB

CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG CONFIG

0 1 1 1

SIG GND

(I)

RESERVED WEIGHT ON WHEELS RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED TEXT FAULTS RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED

-89 -----NC -90 ----------------------91 -92 -93 -94 -95 -----NC -----NC -----NC -----NC (22)------------------

A/C WOW INPUT (P-880 ONLY)

(I)

SIG GND

-96 -----NC -97 -----NC -98 -----NC -99 -----NC -100 -----NC -101 -----NC -102 -----NC -103 -----NC 59J1-104 -----NC

22-05-14

Page 3-267 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

PILOTS WEATHER RADAR CONTROLLER WC-650/880

Function SERIAL CONTROL (HI) SERIAL CONTROL (LO) SPARE 28 V DC INPUT 28 V DC GND CHASSIS GND EDGE LIGHTING 28 V DC (+) EDGE LIGHTING 5 V AC/DC (+) EDGE LIGHTING RETURN ANNUNCIATOR DIMMING SPARE CONTROL BUS SHIELD GND SPARE FSB1 REMOTE ON FSB2 OFF IN OFF OUT

Connector Pin 61J1-A (24)----T-S--------S--B (24)----T-S--------S- -C ------NC -D (22)-----------------E (22)-----------------F (22)-----------------G ------NC -H (24)-----------------J (24)-----------------K (24)-----------------L ------NC -M (24)----- -N ------NC -P (24)------------------R (24)------------------S ------NC -T ------NC 61J1-U ------NC

Connects To 59J1-71 59J1-72 SHIELD GND +28 VDC PWR DC PWR GND CHASSIS GND 5V PNL LIGHTING LIGHTING GND DAY NIGHT LOGIC

FIG 6-2 59J1-11

22-05-14

Page 3-268 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

APPENDIX D DUAL RAD ALT OPTION

22-05-14

Page 3-269 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

RADIO ALTIMETER NO. 1 RT-300

Function SPARE SPARE SPARE TEST INHIBIT OUTPUT TEST TRACK INVALID SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE TRIP NO. 4 (200 FT)

Connector Pin 20J1-A -B -C -D -E -F -G -H -J -K -L

Connects To

------NC (24)--------------- +/- 15 V DC COMMON -M ------NC OUTPUT COMMON -N (24)-T-S-----------S- ALT TRIP COMMON -P (24)---------------TRIP NO. 3 (50 FT) -R ------NC SPARE -S TEST* -T (24)----------------TRIP NO. 1 (1200 FT) -U ------NC TRIP NO. 2 (1500 FT) -V (24)---------------- ALT OUTPUT (EH) -W (24)--T-S-----------S- SHIELD GND AUX OUTPUT (H) -X (24)--T-S-----------S-RAD. ALT VALID (28 V/OPEN) -Y (24)-------------------

STALL PROTECTION COMPUTER 190J2A-50, 193RMP-2J DC GND

190J2A-97 AURAL WARNING SYSTEM 190J2A-51 SHIELD GND 193RMP-2H 190J2A-49 193RMP-2K

+15 V -15 V POWER +28 V

DC DC GND DC

-Z -a -b 20J1-c

TRANSMIT RECEIVE

------NC ------NC (22)------------------- DC GND (22)------------------- 1.5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER 20J2 * ------ ---------- 21J1 COAX TO TRANSMIT ------ ANTENNA 20J3 * ------ ---------- 22J1 COAX TO TRANSMIT ------ ANTENNA

22-05-14

Page 3-270 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

RADIO ALTIMETER NO. 2 RT-300

Function SPARE SPARE SPARE TEST INHIBIT OUTPUT TEST TRACK INVALID SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE TRIP NO. 4 (200 FT)

Connector Pin C20J1-A -B -C -D -E -F -G -H -J -K -L

Connects To

------NC (24)----------------- +/- 15 V DC COMMON -M ------NC OUTPUT COMMON -N (24)-T-S-----------S- ALT TRIP COMMON -P (24)---------------TRIP NO. 3 (50 FT) -R ------NC SPARE -S TEST* -T (24)----------------TRIP NO. 1 (1200 FT) -U ------NC TRIP NO. 2 (1500 FT) -V (24)---------------- ALT OUTPUT (EH) -W (24)--T-S-----------S- SHIELD GND AUX OUTPUT (H) -X (24)--T-S-----------S-RAD. ALT VALID (28 V/OPEN) -Y (24)-------------------

STALL PROTECTION COMPUTER C190J2A-50 193RBP-3B DC GND

C190J2A-97 AURAL WARNING SYSTEM C190J2A-51 SHIELD GND 193RBP-3A C190J2A-49 193RBP-3C

+15 V -15 V POWER +28 V

DC DC GND DC

-Z -a -b C20J1-c

TRANSMIT RECEIVE

------NC ------NC (22)------------------- DC GND (22)------------------- 1.5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER C20J2 * ------ ---------- C21J1 COAX TO TRANSMIT ------ ANTENNA C20J3 * ------ ---------- C22J1 COAX TO TRANSMIT ------ ANTENNA

22-05-14

Page 3-271 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

APPENDIX E GPS OPTION

22-05-14

Page 3-272 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

APPENDIX E GNSSU

Function GNSSU FAULT RS-232 TRANSMIT RS-232 RECEIVE

Connector Pin 149J1-1 -2 (24) -T-S-----------S---3 (24) -T-S-----------S--SHIELD GND -4 ------NC -15 ------NC -6 (24) -T-S-----------S---7 (24) -T-S-----------S--SHIELD GND -8 (24)--------------------9 -22 -10 (24) -T-S----------S---11 (24) -T-S----------S--SHIELD GND -12 (24)-------------------

Connects To

123J1-Z 123J1-a SHIELD GND SEE NOTE 1

429 IN DATA LOADER (H) 429 IN DATA LOADER (L) AIR DATA REF INPUT #1 (H) AIR DATA REF INPUT #1 (L)

9J1-68 FIG. 9J1-69 6-11 SHIELD GND 149J1-21

INPUT DISCRETE RETURN TIME MARK #2 (H) TIME MARK #2 (L) AIR DATA REF INPUT #2 (H) AIR DATA REF INPUT #2 (L)

C9J1-68 FIG. C9J1-69 6-11 SHIELD GND 123J1-E, 121J1B-65

DATA LOAD MODE DISCRETE

TIME MARK #3 (H) TIME MARK #3 (L) GEN PURPOSE/DIFF 429 #2 (H) GEN PURPOSE/DIFF 429 #2 (L) 429 IN IRS/FMS #1 (H) 429 IN IRS/FMS #1 (L)

-13 -14 -16 -17 -18 (24)-T-S-----------S---37 (24)-T-S-----------S--SHIELD GND -19 -20 -21 (24)-------------------23 149J1-41 149J1-8 121J1A-62 121J1A-49 SHIELD GND

TIME MARK #1 (H) TIME MARK #1 (L) 429 HS/LS SELECT GEN PURPOSE/DIFF 429 #1 (H) GEN PURPOSE/DIFF 429 #1 (L) NOTE 1:

THE DL-900 DATA LOADER CONNECTS TO THE RS-232 PORT, PINS 2 & 3.

22-05-14

Page 3-273 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 3-1. Interconnect Information (cont)

GNSSU (cont)

Function 429 OUT #2 (H) 429 OUT #2 (L) 429 IN IRS/FMS #2 (H) 429 IN IRS/FMS #2 (L) AIR/GROUND

Connector Pin 149J1-24 -25 -26 -27 -28 (24)-------------------

Connects To

WOW SWITCH (GND = WOW)

429 OUT #3 (H) 429 OUT #3 (H) 429 IN #3 (H) 429 IN #3 (H) CHASSIS GND +28 V DC RETURN +28 V DC POWER

-29 -30 -31 -32 -33 (24)-------------------34 (20)-------------------35 (20)------------------CHASSIS GND DC POWER GND ACFT +28 VDC (3 AMP BREAKER) SIGNAL GND

SDI PIN #1 SDI PIN #2 429 OUT #1 (H) 429 OUT #1 (H)

-36 (24)-------------------5 -38 (24)-T-S-----------S---39 (24)-T-S-----------S--SHIELD GND 149J1-40

121J1B-17 121J1B-18 SHIELD GND

AIR DATA 419/429 SELECT

22-05-14

Page 3-274 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 4


SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 4 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Equipment and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Procedure for the AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit (AHRU) . . . 4. Procedure for the AHRU Mounting Tray Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Procedure for the AHRU Mounting Tray Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Procedure for the AHRU Mounting Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Procedure for the AT-860 ADF Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. Procedure for the AT-910 TCAS Directional Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. Procedure for the AV-850A Audio Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. Procedure for the AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer (MADC) . . . . . . . . . 11. Procedure for the BL-870/871 Bezel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. Procedure for the CD-810 Control Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. Procedure for the CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head (CDH) . . . . 14. Procedure for the DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. Procedure for the DC-550 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16. Procedure for the DL-900 Data Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17. Procedure for the DU-870 Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. Procedure for the FX-600 Thin Flux Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19. Procedure for the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. Procedure for the Global Navigation System Sensor Unit (GNSSU) . . . 21. Procedure for the IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer (IAC) . . . . . . . 22. Procedure for the IM-803 Installation Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23. Procedure for the MM-260 AHRS Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24. Procedure for the NZ-2000 FMS Navigation Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25. Procedure for the PC-400 Autopilot Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26. Procedure for the RCZ-851(X) Integrated Communications Unit . . . . . . 27. Procedure for the RM-855 Radio Management Unit (RMU) . . . . . . . . . . 28. Procedure for the RNZ-851(X) Integrated Navigation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . 29. Procedure for the RNZ-851/RCZ-851 Strap Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . 30. Procedure for the RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter . . . . . . 31. Procedure for the RT-910 TCAS Computer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32. Procedure for the SM-200 Servo Drive and SB-201 Drum and Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33. Procedure for the WC-6X0/8X0 Weather Radar Controller . . . . . . . . . . . 34. Procedure for the WU-6X0/8X0 Antenna and Receiver Transmitter Unit (RTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 . 4-1 . 4-3 . 4-4 . 4-5 . 4-6 . 4-8 . 4-9 4-10 4-12 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-21 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-28 4-43 4-44 4-45 4-47 4-49 4-50 4-54 4-55 4-56 4-58 4-62 4-63 4-65

. . . . 4-66 . . . . 4-68 . . . . 4-69

22-05-14

Page TC4-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 4 (Cont)

List of Illustrations
FIGURE/TITLE Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 4-1. 4-2. 4-3. 4-4. 4-5. 4-6. 4-7. 4-8. 4-9. Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV-850A Audio Control Unit Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . Nomograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checklist Loading Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COM Unit Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NAV Unit Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RT-300 Zero Adjustment Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical PRIMUS 660/880 Stabilization Trim Mode Entry Page Typical PRIMUS 660/880 Stabilization Trim Adjustment Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 4-18 4-32 4-46 4-56 4-59 4-64 4-73 4-74

List of Tables
TABLE/TITLE Table Table Table Table Table 4-1. 4-2. 4-3. 4-4. 4-5. AV-850A Audio Control Unit Adjustments Aircraft Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aircraft Alignment Example 1 . . . . . . . . . Aircraft Alignment Example 2 . . . . . . . . . Aircraft Alignment Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . . . . 4-17 4-31 4-33 4-33 4-34

22-05-14

Page TC4-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 4

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 1. General


This section provides instructions for removing, reinstalling, and adjusting each line replaceable unit (LRU) of the PRIMUS 1000 Integrated Avionics System that has been previously installed by the aircraft manufacturer or completion center. Where applicable, instructions for replacing lamps, knobs and setscrews are included. Adjustment information is called out as required. CAUTIONS: 1. SHOULD ANY INSTALLATION CRITICAL CASES ARISE WITH THE REINSTALLATION OF ANY UNIT, YOU MUST COMPLY 100 PERCENT WITH THE INSTRUCTION. TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT, TURN AIRCRAFT POWER OFF WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING LRUs.

2.

The following paragraphs describe general information when removing or installing antennas: NOTE: For all antennas not supplied by Honeywell, removal and installation should be in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions.

A.

Antenna Weather Protection


(1) Some antennas require gaskets, and others have O-rings. When reinstalling antennas, new gaskets or O-rings should be used. A weather sealant should be applied around the periphery of the antenna base to prevent seepage of water and condensation and preclude corrosion. If a sealant or aerodynamic smoother is used around the periphery of the antenna base, it should be applied after the antenna has been bolted down. The sealant used should be non-adhering to allow the antenna to be removed at a later time, if necessary. Chromatic tape is recommended. NOTE: When mounting antennas on a pressurized fuselage, a leveling and sealing compound such as Product Research No. 870B-1/2 aerodynamic smoother should be used between the entire mounting surface of the antenna and the fuselage. Use of this compound, in addition to the installation gasket, will compensate for surface irregularities and voids between the antenna and the fuselage. A mold releasing agent may be used on the fuselage prior to installation to prevent the leveling compound from adhering to the fuselage.

(2)

(3)

To prevent water seepage on top mounted antennas, it may be necessary to apply Silastic sealant (RTV-3145 or equivalent) to the mounting screw heads.

22-05-14

Page 4-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

Antenna Hardware
(1) (2) Clean the airframe at the antenna mounting area to remove any foreign material. Because of the insulation qualities of gaskets and leveling compounds, the mounting screws are required to provide the electrical bonding between the antennas and the aircraft (typically 15 milliohms or less is required). Therefore, the technician doing the reinstallation must be sure that any hardware being reused is clean and free of corrosion. If in doubt, use new hardware. Gaskets and O-rings deform during initial installation. While it is possible to reuse gaskets and O-rings, it is highly recommended that new gaskets or O-rings be used.

(3)

C.

General Antenna Removal Instructions


NOTE: These procedures apply to all antennas. To prevent damage to the antennas, do not apply pressure to or pry on plastic housings.

(1) (2)

Pull the appropriate circuit breakers. After removing and saving the hardware, cut the bond line of any installer-applied sealant between the antenna and the aircraft skin. Pull the antenna away from the aircraft skin far enough to disconnect the cable connector(s).

(3)

22-05-14

Page 4-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

2.

Equipment and Materials


Augat, Part No. T-114-1, IC puller is used as a switch pushbutton puller when replacing lamps on the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit. HMN 97D0878, HAZARD CODE 210D Retaining compound - Loctite Assure No. 425 surface curing threadlocker, Loctite Corp, Newington, CT (Used on controller knob setscrews)

Refer to the applicable leading particulars table in SECTION 2 of this manual for replacement gaskets, lamps, knobs, and setscrew part numbers. Uploading/Downloading of the checklist files requires the following: IBM compatible laptop personal computer (PC) IAC to PC adapter harness, Honeywell Part No, T-336238-2.

Reinstallation of the mounting tray for the AH-800 AHRU requires the use of the leveling device, Honeywell Part No. UG5046, and Embraer-fabricated yaw-axis alignment tool. The AHRS flux valve calibration procedure and mounting tray leveling procedure requires the following: 50-pin maintenance connector to PC adapter cable, Honeywell Part No. T-336238. Refer to the Embraer 145 Aircraft Maintenance Manual for details IBM compatible laptop PC AHZ-800 AHRS Installation Software, Part No. 26011402-102 (version 1.7 or later) Four sets of shim washers 0.250 in. (6.35 mm) to 0.375 in. (9.52 mm) I.D. and 0.750 in. (19.05 mm) to 0.875 in. (22.22 mm) O.D. containing the following: Qty Qty Qty Qty 2 2 4 4 at at at at 0.100 0.050 0.015 0.006 in. in. in. in. (2.54 mm) thick (1.27 mm) thick (0.381 mm) thick (0.152 mm) thick

No additional special equipment or materials other than those commonly used in the shop are required for reinstalling units in existing trays and clamps and adjusting the system. Do not over tighten mounting screws. Where torque values are not given, finger tightening of the mounting screws is acceptable.

22-05-14

Page 4-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

3.

Procedure for the AH-800 Attitude Heading Reference Unit (AHRU)


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the AHRU. (a) Loosen the two thumbwheel clamps until they disconnect from the support hooks. Slide the unit out of the mounting tray.

(b) (2)

Reinstall the AHRU. CAUTION: WHEN PLACING THE UNIT ON THE MOUNTING TRAY, DO NOT FORCE FIT. IF MATING IS DIFFICULT, REMOVE THE UNIT AND CHECK FOR CONNECTOR PINS THAT MAY BE BENT OR OUT OF ALIGNMENT. ALSO, VISUALLY CHECK THE ALIGNMENT OF THE RECEPTACLE ON THE MOUNTING TRAY.

(a)

Place the unit on the mounting tray. Slide it onto the three guide pins. Slide the unit backwards until its connectors are fully engaged with the mating connectors of the mounting tray. Secure the unit in place by tightening the two thumbwheel clamps over the support hooks. CAUTION: IF THE MOUNTING TRAY IS MOVED IN ANY DIRECTION, A COMPLETE TRAY ALIGNMENT MUST BE DONE. REFER TO THIS PROCEDURE IN PARAGRAPH 6.

(b)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

4.

Procedure for the AHRU Mounting Tray Fan Filter


NOTE: In a new installation, the filter should be cleaned or replaced after approximately 100 hours of operation and then approximately every 300 to 500 hours depending on the environmental conditions.

A.

Removal and Reinstallation Procedures


(1) Remove the filter. Pull up on the removal tab to separate the filter from the fan. (2) Reinstall the filter. Align the cutout area on the bottom of the filter with the wires on the fan and press down on the filter until it snaps into place.

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Cleaning Procedures
NOTE: Visually inspect the filter for signs of damage or deterioration. Replace filter if any damage or deterioration is found.

(1)

Vacuum the filter using a standard commercial vacuum cleaner or clean the filter using compressed air at a pressure not to exceed 30 PSI. Wash the filter in a mild detergent solution and rinse with water. Temperature of the detergent solution or the water must not exceed 140 F. Do not use chlorine solutions. Allow the filter to air dry. Install the filter on the fan assembly.

(2)

(3) (4)

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Apply 28 V dc power to the AHRU and verify proper operation of the fan.

22-05-14

Page 4-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

5.

Procedure for the AHRU Mounting Tray Fan


See Figure 4-1.

A.

Removal and Reinstallation Procedures


(1) Remove the fan. (a) (b) Remove the fan filter as previously instructed in paragraph 4.A.(1). There are two wires (one red, one black) coming out of the fan housing. Disconnect these wires at their source. Turn the rim clamps until the flat edge of each clamp is facing toward the fan. Separate the fan from the fan mounting plate.

(c) (d) (2)

Reinstall the fan. (a) Place the fan in position on mounting tray, making sure that the AIRFLOW arrow on the fan points down. Attach the fan to the base of the tray with three rim clamps. Make sure that the flat edge of the rim clamp faces away from the fan. Connect the red wire to the 28 V dc source. Connect the black wire to the ground source.

(b)

(c) (d)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Apply 28 V dc power to the AHRU and verify proper operation of the fan.

22-05-14

Page 4-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

FAN HOUSING MACHINE SCREW AND RIM CLAMP (4 PL)

PILOT'S FAN MOUNTING

MOUNTING TRAY

CO-PILOT'S FAN MOUNTING

NOTE: FAN FILTER (NOT SHOWN) SNAPS ON TOP.

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

AIRFLOW

AD-51243@

Figure 4-1. Fan Replacement

22-05-14

Page 4-7 Nov 1/1996

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

6.

Procedure for the AHRU Mounting Tray


CAUTION: THE PHYSICAL/MECHANICAL INSTALLATION OF THE MOUNTING TRAY FOR THE AHRU HAS A VERY LARGE EFFECT ON THE ACCURACY OF ATTITUDE AND HEADING DATA. DO NOT REMOVE THE TRAY UNLESS IT HAS BEEN DAMAGED OR DEFORMED.

A.

Removal and Reinstallation Procedures


(1) Remove the mounting tray. (a) (b) Remove the unit, fan, and filter as instructed in paragraphs 3, 4, and 5. Remove and set aside the four nuts, four washers, and four screws that attach the ARINC 600 connector to the rear of the mounting tray. Detach the ARINC 600 connector. Remove and set aside the four screws and four washers that attach the mounting tray to the airframe.

(c) (d)

(2)

Reinstall the mounting tray. NOTE: The accuracy of attitude angle indication is directly dependent upon the accuracy with which the AHRU is aligned with the aircraft axes. The mounting tray must be installed with a relative alignment accuracy of 0.2 degree in the pitch, roll and yaw axes.

(a)

Using the mounting hardware previously removed and set aside, attach the mounting tray to the airframe. Screws should be tight enough to prevent movement of the tray. Using the connector hardware previously removed and set aside, install the ARINC 600 connector, making sure to leave a maintenance loop in the harness of sufficient length so as not to apply any pressure on the mounting tray. Level the tray in accordance with procedures in paragraph 6.B.

(b)

(c)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Refer to AHRU mounting tray alignment procedures in the Embraer Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-8 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

7.

Procedure for the AT-860 ADF Antenna


NOTES: 1. The AT-860 ADF Antenna, is a totally self-contained low profile antenna that requires no adjustment during operation. It combines both the loops and the sense antennas in one package, and therefore, does not require a separate long wire sense antenna. It is very important that the metal base of the antenna be electrically bonded (less than 2.5 milliohms) to the metal skin of the airframe to provide a ground plane for the antenna elements. When a mounting gasket is used, the mounting bolts must provide electrical contact with the metal spacers that form the mounting holes in the antenna through the mounting nuts to the airframe.

2.

A.

Removal and Reinstallation Procedures


NOTE: (1) Refer to the general instruction in paragraph 1.A.

Remove the antenna. (a) (b) (c) Loosen, remove and set aside four No. 10 sockethead cap screws. Unseal and remove the antenna. Disconnect the cable connectors.

(2)

Reinstall the antenna. (a) (b) (c) (d) Place the new gasket, Honeywell Part No. 7020801-947, on the antenna. Connect the cable connectors. Mount the antenna and apply the appropriate sealant. Install the four No. 10 corrosion resistant steel socket-head cap screws that were removed and previously set aside.

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-9 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

8.

Procedure for the AT-910 TCAS Directional Antenna


NOTES: 1. There is at least one AT-910 required for TCAS, mounted on top of the fuselage. A second (optional) AT-910 may be mounted on the bottom of the fuselage. These procedures apply to both antennas. Refer to the general instructions in paragraph 1.A.

2.

A.

Removal and Reinstallation Procedures


(1) Remove the antenna. (a) Loosen, remove and set aside eight non-torx drive screws and washers securing the antenna to the aircraft. Unseal and remove the antenna. Verify that the four coaxial cables have the appropriate color coding rings in place. If they have been damaged or removed, tag the cables. Disconnect the four cable connectors.

(b) (c)

(d) (2)

Disassemble the antenna and mounting plate. (a) Remove and set aside the attaching hardware and separate antenna dish and adapter plate. Clean the antenna dish and adapter plate to remove any sealant and foreign material.

(b)

(3)

Assemble the antenna and mounting plate. (a) Mate the antenna dish with the adapter plate, making sure that all holes are aligned. Using a grease pencil, make an alignment mark on the antenna dish and adapter plate. Separate the antenna dish and adapter plate. Apply a continuous bead of sealant (polysulfide type 1, class B-1/2) to the outer recess in the adapter plate. Place the adapter plate over the antenna dish to match alignment marks made earlier in paragraph 8.A.(3)(b). Press the adapter plate onto the antenna dish. Attach the adapter plate to the antenna dish using the attaching hardware removed in paragraph 8.A.(2)(a).

(b)

(c) (d)

(e)

(f) (g)

22-05-14

Page 4-10 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(4)

Reinstall the antenna. (a) Place the new O-ring, Honeywell Part No. 4000171-240, in the O-ring groove of the antenna assembly. Position the antenna assembly to its location on the fuselage and align the mounting holes (note the non-symmetrical hole pattern). Note the orientation of the antenna with respect to the airframe. Do not attach the antenna to the airframe at this time. Carefully inspect all mating connectors for the presence of foreign matter. Clean as necessary. Connect the four coaxial cables to the antenna. Note the color bands on the cables and mating connectors: yellow to J1, black to J2, blue to J3, and red to J4. Align the antenna mounting holes with the holes in the aircraft (note the non-symmetrical hole pattern). Secure the antenna with eight non-torx drive screws and washers that were removed and previously set aside. Tighten the screws to 18 inch-pounds maximum torque.

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(g)

(h)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-11 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

9.

Procedure for the AV-850A Audio Control Unit


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the AV-850A Audio Control Unit. (a) (b) Disengage the Dzus fasteners on the unit. Slide the unit out of the aircraft mounting location and disconnect the cable connector(s).

(2)

Reinstall the AV-850A Audio Control Unit. (a) Mate the unit connector(s) with the aircraft cable connector(s) and slide the unit into the mounting location. Engage the Dzus fasteners on the unit.

(b)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
(1) Adjust the AV-850A Audio Control Unit. NOTE: All adjustments for the AV-850A Audio Control Unit are set at the factory for typical operating conditions. Most installations should not require adjustment of the audio control unit. If an adjustment is necessary, perform that adjustment in accordance with the following procedures. Table 4-1 contains a list of audio control unit adjustable functions and the applicable potentiometer associated with that function. Figure 4-3 provides adjustment locations for the AV-850A Audio Control Units.

(a)

Warning Adjustments The warning inputs are factory set for a nominal input signal of 10 milliwatts into 600 ohms. Should adjustment become necessary, proceed as follows. 1 Warning 1 Level Adjust Apply an input signal to the WARNING 1 AUDIO input. While listening to the cockpit speaker or phones, adjust the WARNING 1 LEVEL ADJUST potentiometer (A1R40) for the desired output level. 2 Warning 2 Level Adjust Apply an input signal to the WARNING 2 AUDIO input. While listening to the cockpit speaker or phones, adjust the WARNING 2 LEVEL ADJUST potentiometer (A1R41) for the desired output level.

22-05-14

Page 4-12 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Warning 3 Level Adjust Apply an input signal to the WARNING 3 AUDIO input. While listening to the cockpit speaker or phones, adjust the WARNING 3 LEVEL ADJUST potentiometer (A1R42) for the desired output level.

Warning 4 Level Adjust Apply an input signal to the WARNING 4 AUDIO input. While listening to the cockpit speaker or phones, adjust the WARNING 4 LEVEL ADJUST potentiometer (A1R43) for the desired output level.

Warning 5 Level Adjust Apply an input signal to the WARNING 5 AUDIO input. While listening to the cockpit speaker or phones, adjust the WARNING 5 LEVEL ADJUST potentiometer (A1R44) for the desired output level.

(b)

Maintenance System Adjustments The Maintenance System is adjusted for typical microphones and headphones and will not normally need adjusting. Should adjustment become necessary, proceed as follows: 1 Maintenance Mic 1 Level Adjust the Audio Control Unit INPH and PHONE controls for a comfortable headphone listening level while listening to interphone audio transmitted from the cross-side Audio Control Unit. Connect a microphone to the MAINT 1 MIC input of the Audio Control Unit. Ground the MAINT 1 ENABLE input of the Audio Control Unit. Adjust the MNT 1 MIC potentiometer (A3R11) for the desired level using the cross-side Audio Control Unit as a reference. Perform Maintenance Phone Level adjustment as described in paragraph 11.B.(1)(b)3. 2 Maintenance 2 Mic Level Adjust the Audio Control Unit INPH and PHONE controls for a comfortable headphone listening level while listening to interphone audio transmitted from the cross-side Audio Control Unit. Connect a microphone to the MAINT 2 MIC input of the Audio Control Unit. Ground the MAINT 2 ENABLE input of the Audio Control Unit. Adjust the MNT 2 MIC potentiometer (A3R60) for the desired level using the cross-side Audio Control Unit as a reference. Perform Maintenance Phone Level adjustment as described in paragraph 11.B.(1)(b)3. 3 Maintenance Phone Level Connect headphones to the MAINT PHONE output of the Audio Control Unit. Adjust the MNT PH potentiometer (A3R19) to obtain the desired Maintenance Phone level while listening to interphone audio.

22-05-14

Page 4-13 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(c)

Passenger Address (PA) System Adjustments The PA output is factory adjusted to generate 10 mW into 600 ohms. Should adjustment become necessary, proceed as follows: Depress the PA microphone select button While the Push to Talk (PTT) button is engaged, adjust the PA LVL potentiometer (A2R40) for the desired level in the cabin.

(d)

Miscellaneous Adjustments 1 Cockpit Mic Level The Cockpit Mic Level potentiometer (A1R17) is adjusted for typical microphones and will not normally need adjusting. NOTE: This adjustment is for signals internal to the Audio Control Unit only. Changing this adjustment will not change the modulation characteristics of a COM radio.

Comm/Mkr Minimum Gain The purpose of this adjustment is to set the minimum level that an "autoselected" COM receiver (a receiver that was selected automatically because the COM transmitter was selected) may have. It also sets the minimum gain that a selected Marker Beacon receiver may have. Turning off the audio of an autoselected COM or the Marker Beacon require the devices to be deselected manually. Depress the COM 1 microphone select switch. While listening to COM 1, adjust the volume controls for a comfortable listening level. Rotate the COM 1 receiver volume control fully counterclockwise, then deselect the COM (button recessed). Adjust the MIN GAIN potentiometer (A1R54) for the desired level.

Mkr Mute Level The Marker Beacon Mute Level is factory adjusted to work properly with the RNZ-851 NAV Unit and normally will not need to be adjusted. NOTE: The Marker Beacon mute algorithm in the Audio Control Unit relies on both timing and Marker Beacon audio level to determine when to un-mute the Marker Beacon audio. The timing parameters are not adjustable. This procedure adjusts the audio level threshold.

Apply a signal modulated with one of the marker tones (Inner, Middle, or Outer) to the Marker Beacon receiver. Adjust the signal strength so that the selected Marker indicator is just illuminated.

22-05-14

Page 4-14 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Turn the MKR MUTE potentiometer (A1R53) fully clockwise. Momentarily depress the Marker mute button to mute the Marker signal. Begin adjusting the MKR MUTE potentiometer counterclockwise in small increments and wait at least 5 seconds after each increment. If the signal does not reappear within 5 seconds, continue to turn the potentiometer in small increments until the signal does reappear. (Wait 5 seconds after each increment). This will establish the correct Marker mute level. 4 Phone Squelch Depress the PA microphone select button. Latch in all switch/pots except for INPH and MUTE. Adjust the SQUELCH potentiometer (A1R68) while listening to the headphone output and transmitting on the Interphone. 5 Voice Recorder Output Level The voice recorder output potentiometer (A3R35) is factory adjusted for 10 mW into 600 ohms. Interfacing the output to a voice recorder with input levels other than this will require adjustment of the Audio Control Unit. Refer to applicable voice recorder instructions on how to set input level. 6 Minimum Speaker Gain Depress the COM 1 microphone select switch. While listening to COM 1, adjust the COM 1 and SPEAKER volume controls for a comfortable listening level. Rotate the SPEAKER volume control fully counterclockwise. Latch out the MIC/MASK selector. Adjust the MIN SPKR potentiometer (A3R48) for the desired level. (e) Sidetone Adjustments 1 Headphone Sidetone Level NOTE: The differential level between the COM receiver level and the COM sidetone level when listening in the headphone is set by the selected COM receiver.

While listening to a COM transmission such as ATIS, adjust the COM and HEADPHONE volume control for a comfortable listening level. While transmitting on an unused frequency, adjust the COM sidetone level for a comfortable listening level. See Figure 4-6 for the location of the COM sidetone level for an RCZ-851.

22-05-14

Page 4-15 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Speaker Sidetone Level While listening to the cockpit speaker and transmitting on a COM transceiver, adjust SPEAKER SIDETONE for the desired speaker sidetone level.

Internal Sidetone Level While listening to the cockpit speaker and transmitting on the CABIN address system, adjust the INT ST potentiometer (A3R46) for the desired speaker sidetone level. This will normally be adjusted to the same sidetone level as the COMs.

C.

Repair Procedures
Replacement of the control knobs. NOTE: Only the large SPEAKER and HEADPHONE knobs are field replaceable. The small knobs require removal of the front panel, and should only be serviced in an approved shop.

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Use a 0.060-inch O.D., 6 flute, Bristol wrench to loosen the setscrews. Slide the knob off the shaft. Turn the shaft fully counterclockwise. On new knobs, make sure that the setscrews are out far enough to allow the knob to slide onto the shaft. Slide the knob onto the shaft with the pointer at the 8 oclock position. Tighten the setscrews. Check to make sure that the knob is not rubbing against the front panel, and that the pointer is at the 8 oclock position when rotated fully counterclockwise.

(5) (6) (7)

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-16 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Table 4-1. AV-850A Audio Control Unit Adjustments FUNCTION Cabin PA Level Cockpit Mic Level Comm/Mkr Minimum Gain Internal Sidetone Maintenance 1 Mic Level Maintenance 2 Mic Level Maintenance Phone Level Marker Mute Level Minimum Speaker Gain Phone Squelch Voice Recorder Output Level Warning 1 Level Warning 2 Level Warning 3 Level Warning 4 Level Warning 5 Level LABEL PA LVL MIC LVL MIN GAIN INT ST MNT 1 MIC MNT 2 MIC MNT PH MKR MUTE MIN SPKR SQUELCH CVR WRNG 1 WRNG 2 WRNG 3 WRNG 4 WRNG 5 ST NOTE: * A2R38 is software disabled when ST control is on front panel AV-850A ADJUSTMENTS A2R40 A1R17 A1R54 A3R46 A3R11 A3R60 A3R19 A1R53 A3R48 A1R68 A3R35 A1R40 A1R41 A1R42 A1R43 A1R44 A2R38*

22-05-14

Page 4-17 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

WRNG 4 (A1R43) WRNG 5 (A1R44) MKR MUTE (A1R53) MIN GAIN (A1R54)

WRNG 3 (A1R42) WRNG 2 (A1R41) WRNG 1 (A1R40) MIC LVL (A1R17) SQUELCH (A1R68)

FRONT

MNT PH (A3R19)

A3TP1/MNT 2 MIC (A3R60)

MNT 1 MIC (A3R11)

LEFT SIDE

ST (A2R38)* PA LVL (A2R40)

FRONT

INT ST (A3R46)

MIN SPKR (A3R48)

CVR (A3R35)
AD-34524@

RIGHT SIDE
*NOT FUNCTIONAL IN UNITS WITH FRONT PANEL ST CONTROL.

Figure 4-2. AV-850A Audio Control Unit Adjustment Locations

22-05-14

Page 4-18 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

10. Procedure for the AZ-850 Micro Air Data Computer (MADC)
A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the MADC. (a) Disconnect the pitot and static lines. Cap or cover the hose end connectors to keep debris out of the system. Disconnect the cable connector. Using a 3/16-inch Allen wrench, loosen the jackscrew until the hold-down hook releases the MADC. Slide the MADC out of the tray.

(b) (c)

(d) (2)

Reinstall the MADC. (a) (b) (c) Slide the MADC into the mounting tray. Make sure that the rear boss engages the mounting tray slot. Make sure that the hold-down hook engages the boss on the MADC and using a 3/16-inch Allen wrench, tighten the jackscrew. Mate the cable connector and the unit connector. Connect the pitot and static lines and perform the appropriate pitot/static leak check as instructed in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

(d) (e)

(3)

Procedure for Non-Honeywell Components Non-Honeywell parts of the Air Data System, such as the temperature probes are not covered here. For specific information on these components, consult the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures for the Air Data System in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-19 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

11. Procedure for the BL-870/871 Bezel Assembly


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the bezel assembly. (a) (b) Loosen the two captive holding screws at the ends of the bezel assembly. Gently pull the bezel assembly straight away from the display unit separating the bezel and the display unit connectors.

(2)

Reinstall the bezel assembly. (a) Align the bezel assembly on the display unit so the bezel and display unit connectors mate. Tighten the captive screws.

(b)

B.

PFD Bezel Assembly Inclinometer Level Adjustment Procedures


(1) (2) Loosen the two screws on the inclinometer. Adjust the inclinometer until level and tighten the screws.

C.

Repair Procedures
Replacement of BL-870/871 Bezel Assembly set knobs. (1) (2) (3) Loosen both the setscrews in the knob with a 1/16-inch Allen wrench. Slide the knob off the shaft. On new knobs, make sure that the setscrews are out far enough to allow the knob to slide onto the shaft. Apply retaining compound to the setscrews. Slide the knob onto the shaft. Make sure that the space between the knob and the bezel is approximately 0.030 in. (0.8 mm). Tighten both No. 6-32 setscrews with the Allen wrench. Visually check the spacing between the knob and the bezel to make sure that the knob has not slipped during installation.

(4) (5)

(6) (7)

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-20 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

12. Procedure for the CD-810 Control Display Unit


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the CD-810 Control Display Unit. (a) (b) Disengage the Dzus fasteners on the unit. Slide the unit out of the aircraft mounting location and disconnect the cable connector(s).

(2)

Reinstall the CD-810 Control Display Unit. (a) Mate the cable connector(s) with the unit connector(s) and slide the unit into the aircraft mounting location. Engage the Dzus fasteners on the unit.

(b)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

13. Procedure for the CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head (CDH)
A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the CD-850 CDH. (a) Using an 3/32-inch Allen wrench, loosen the unit mounting clamp screws accessible through holes at the sides of the front panel. Slide the CDH out of the panel and disconnect the cable connector.

(b) (2)

Reinstall the CD-850 CDH. (a) Mate the cable connector with the unit connector and slide the display into the panel. Using a 3/32-inch Allen wrench, tighten the unit mounting clamp screws.

(b)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

22-05-14

Page 4-21 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

Repair Procedures
Replacement of the control knobs. NOTE: Each control knob is held in place by two No. 4-40 X 3/32-inch hex setscrews. The setscrews in the small tuning knob are reached through access holes in the large tuning knob.

(1)

Rotate the large tuning knob as necessary to reach the setscrews in the small tuning knob. Using the appropriately sized Allen wrench, loosen both No. 4-40 setscrews in the knob. Slide the knob off the shaft. On new knobs, make sure that the setscrews are out far enough to allow the knob to slide onto the shaft. Apply retaining compound to the setscrews. Slide the large tuning knob onto the shaft. Make sure that the space between the knob and the bezel is approximately 0.030 inch (0.8 mm). Tighten both No. 4-40 setscrews with the Allen wrench. Recheck spacing between the knob and the bezel to make sure that knob has not slipped during installation. Slide the small tuning knob onto the shaft, making sure that the small tuning knob does not rub against the large tuning knob. Align the access holes in the large tuning knob with the setscrews in the small tuning knob. Tighten both No. 4-40 setscrews with the Allen wrench. Recheck to make sure that the small tuning knob has not slipped during installation, and is not rubbing against the large tuning knob.

(2)

(3) (4)

(5) (6)

(7) (8)

(9)

(10)

(11) (12)

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-22 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

14. Procedure for the DA-800 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU)


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the DA-800 DAU. (a) Press up on the inside at the top of the front handle to release the locking lever. Move the locking lever out and down to release the locking cam. Slowly pull forward on the handle to separate the unit and tray connectors and slide the unit out of the tray. Stow the locking lever by pressing it up and into the slot in the handle until the latching button clicks into place.

(b)

(c)

(2)

Reinstall the DA-800 DAU. (a) Press up on the inside at the top of the front handle to release the locking lever. Move the locking lever out and down to release the locking cam. CAUTION: WHEN PLACING THE UNIT ON THE MOUNTING TRAY, DO NOT FORCE FIT. IF MATING IS DIFFICULT, REMOVE THE UNIT AND CHECK FOR CONNECTOR PINS THAT MAY BE BENT OR OUT OF ALIGNMENT. ALSO, VISUALLY CHECK THE ALIGNMENT OF THE RECEPTACLE ON THE MOUNTING TRAY.

(b)

Place the unit on the mounting tray. Slide the unit backwards until its connectors are fully engaged with the mating connectors of the mounting tray. To make sure proper connector engagement, place a gauge 0.220 inch (5.58 mm) thick (a No. 2 drill bit is 0.221 inch) between back of unit and center of tray. If gauge fits between unit and tray, the unit is improperly engaged. Remove and reinstall as required until proper connector engagement is made. Making sure that the locking cam mates properly with the cam receptacle, move the locking lever up and into the slot in the handle until the locking button clicks into place.

(c)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-23 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

15. Procedure for the DC-550 Display Controller


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the DC-550 Display Controller. (a) (b) Disengage the Dzus fasteners on the unit. Slide the unit out of the aircraft mounting location and disconnect the cable connector(s).

(2)

Reinstall the DC-550 Display Controller. (a) Mate the cable connector(s) with the unit connector(s) and slide the unit into the aircraft mounting location. Engage the Dzus fasteners on the unit.

(b)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-24 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

16. Procedure for the DL-900 Data Loader


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the DL-900 Data Loader. (a) (b) Disengage the Dzus fasteners on the unit. Slide the unit out of the aircraft mounting location and disconnect the cable connector(s).

(2)

Reinstall the DL-900 Data Loader. (a) Mate the cable connector(s) with the unit connector(s) and slide the unit into the aircraft mounting location. Engage the Dzus fasteners on the unit.

(b)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-25 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

17. Procedure for the DU-870 Display Units


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the DU-870 Display Unit. (a) (b) Loosen the two captive holding screws at the ends of the bezel assembly. Gently pull the bezel assembly straight away from the display unit separating the bezel and the display unit connector. Set the bezel assembly aside. Using a 3/16-inch Allen wrench, loosen the jackscrew and separate the unit and tray connector(s). Gently lift the front of the display unit until the jackscrew latch clears the slot in the mounting tray. Slide the display unit out of the tray.

(c)

(d)

(e) (2)

Reinstall the DU-870 Display Unit. CAUTION: WHEN PLACING THE UNIT ON THE MOUNTING TRAY, DO NOT FORCE FIT. IF MATING IS DIFFICULT, REMOVE THE UNIT AND CHECK FOR CONNECTOR PINS THAT MAY BE BENT OR OUT OF ALIGNMENT. ALSO, VISUALLY CHECK THE ALIGNMENT OF THE RECEPTACLE ON THE MOUNTING TRAY.

(a)

Slide the display unit into the panel tray, lifting the front of the display unit as necessary to make sure that the jackscrew latch engages the slot in the mounting tray. Slide the display unit backwards until its connectors are fully engaged with the mating connectors of the mounting tray. Tighten the jackscrew with a 3/16-inch Allen wrench. Reinstall the bezel assembly. 1 2 Align the bezel assembly on the display unit. Tighten the captive screws.

(b)

(c) (d)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

22-05-14

Page 4-26 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

Repair Procedures
Cleaning of the display unit faceplate filter. NOTE: The display unit faceplate is protected by a filter which reduces reflections. It is sturdy, but it is not indestructible.

(1) (2)

Inspect the outside surface for foreign material and variations in optical quality. Particles of grit, dirt, or sand are to be removed with pressurized dry air or a soft camel-hair brush. Dampen a clean piece of lint-free cloth with isopropyl alcohol or ammoniated cleaner. Do not use household paper towels. Carefully rub the unclean portion of the filter with the damp cloth. Repeat paragraphs 17.C.(3) and (4) as necessary until the filter is clean.

(3)

(4) (5)

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-27 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

18. Procedure for the FX-600 Thin Flux Valve


NOTE: Whenever a flux valve is removed and reinstalled or replaced, a compass swing must be performed to maintain desired long-term heading accuracy. Any errors in the output of the flux valve in excess of 1 degree, which are caused by extraneous magnetic fields, will be corrected by performing the flux valve calibration procedure in paragraph 18.B.

A.

Removal and Reinstallation Procedures


(1) Remove the FX-600 Thin Flux Valve. (a) Remove and set aside the three non-magnetic screws securing flux valve to mounting bracket. DO NOT lose non-magnetic screws. Put as little strain as possible on lead connections when withdrawing flux valve. One at a time, loosen the captive screws, Honeywell Part No. 873076-62, which hold the six terminal lugs to the terminal board on the flux valve. Slide the lugs out from under the screw heads and tighten the screws in the terminal board. Label the leads to the flux valve terminal board to make sure proper reconnection.

(b)

(2)

Reinstall the FX-600 Thin Flux Valve. (a) One at a time, loosen the screws in the terminal board. Connect and secure the flux valve leads to the terminal board. Be certain to make proper connections. Install the flux valve in the mounting bracket and secure with three No. 6-40 X 3/8-inch, roundhead, non-magnetic machine screws, Honeywell Part No. 1712115, that were removed and previously set aside. DO NOT tighten the screws. NOTE: DO NOT use the magnetic type screws to mount the flux valve.

(b)

(c)

Align centerline on the flux valve mounting flange alignment scale with the longitudinal axis of the aircraft. Tighten the mounting screws.

B.

FX-600 Thin Flux Valve Calibration Procedures


Whenever a FX-600 Thin Flux Valve or MM-260 Memory Module is installed or removed and replaced, the system must be calibrated in order for it to provide the desired magnetic heading accuracy. If the flux valve calibration has never been performed, as in a new installation, the MAG mode will not be valid. This procedure will provide for computation and correction for index error, single cycle error and two cycle error. Any errors in the output of the flux valve in excess of 1 degree, which are caused by extraneous magnetic fields, will be corrected by performing the flux valve calibration as follows:

22-05-14

Page 4-28 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(1)

Compass Swing Site Move the aircraft to a level site that is free of buried metal objects and is at least 500 feet from the nearest metal structure. A Compass Rose that has been magnetically surveyed within the past two years is desirable if the results of the Compass Swing are to satisfy an accuracy of 1.0 degree.

(2)

Aircraft Alignment This section of the procedure defines the method to determine the alignment of the aircraft to a reference line of the Compass Rose. This alignment procedure will allow for the aircraft to be placed close to, but not have to be exactly on the reference line and will provide the accuracy of the initial reference heading to be within 0.2 degrees. NOTES: 1. The AHZ-800 compass system will provide an accuracy of 1.0 degree or less if the procedure outlined in this paragraph is utilized. If an alternate procedure to determine the initial reference heading to be entered is used, the initial reference heading may not be within the required 0.5 degrees and the results of the compass swing may not provide a system accuracy of 1.0 degree. An example of an alternate method that may not provide an initial reference heading accuracy of 0.5 degrees is the use of a land compass or sight compass. Use of this alternate method may only provide a compass system accuracy of approximately 1.5 to 2.5 degrees after the compass swing is completed. The aircraft may positioned to any known heading to begin the compass swing and that known heading would be used to enter as the initial reference heading in paragraph 18.B.(3)(m). Care should be exercised to make sure that this heading is accurate to within 0.5 degrees. Generally, most Compass Roses will be marked with a minimum of the cardinal and inter cardinal headings and frequently will have headings marked at 30 degree increments. A Compass Rose will seldom have the inter cardinal headings marked. The best and most efficient results will be achieved by following the procedure outlined in this paragraph.

2.

(a)

Position the aircraft to a known cardinal or inter cardinal heading. In this procedure, it will be assumed that the reference line used is the MAGNETIC N-S line of the Compass Rose and the aircraft will be pointing North. Position the aircraft such that it is aligned close to the N-S line. Drop a plumb line from the aircraft centerline at or near the nose and at or near the tail. Mark the points where the plumb bob comes to rest.

(b) (c)

22-05-14

Page 4-29 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(d)

Measure the distance between the nose and tail plumb bob marks. Record this distance on line 1 of Table 4-2. Measure the lateral displacement distance of each plumb bob mark from the N-S line. Record these distances on line 2 and line 3 of Table 4-2. NOTE: If this displacement is to the left of the reference (N-S) line, while facing in the same direction as the aircraft, it shall have a negative (-) value. If this displacement is to the right of the reference (N-S) line, while facing in the same direction as the aircraft, it shall have a positive (+) value.

(e)

(f)

Algebraically subtract the lateral displacement at the tail (line 3) from the lateral displacement at the nose (line 2). [The equation would be: (line 2) (line 3)]. Record the result on line 4 of Table 4-2. Determine the aircraft misalignment using the Nomograph (Figure 4-4). Record this value on line 5 of Table 4-2. The polarity of line 5 will be the same as line 4. Convert the value of line 5 in Table 4-2 from minutes to degrees. Enter the number of degrees in line 6 of Table 4-2. The polarity of line 6 will be the same as line 4 and line 5. As an aid, the following conversions are provided: 0.1 deg = 6 minutes 0.2 deg = 12 minutes 0.3 deg = 18 minutes 0.4 deg = 24 minutes 0.5 deg = 30 minutes 0.6 deg = 36 minutes 0.7 deg = 42 minutes 0.8 deg = 48 minutes 0.9 deg = 54 minutes 1.0 deg = 60 minutes.

(g)

(h)

22-05-14

Page 4-30 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(i)

Algebraically add the heading of the reference line and the value of line 6. Record this value on line 7 of Table 4-2. This will be the actual aircraft heading and will be used in paragraph 18.B.(3)(l) as the initial reference heading. As an aid, three examples are shown in Tables 4-3, 4-4, and 4-5. Table 4-2. Aircraft Alignment PLUMB BOB SEPARATION ALONG AIRCRAFT_______________Line 1

DISPLACEMENT OF NOSE PLUMB BOB FROM N-S LINE____________Line 2 DISPLACEMENT OF TAIL PLUMB BOB FROM N-S LINE_______________Line 3 PLUMB BOB DISPLACEMENT = (Line 2) - (Line 3)_______________Line 4 AIRCRAFT ALIGNMENT WITH N-S LINE FROM NOMOGRAPH_______________Line 5 VALUE OF LINE 5 CONVERTED TO DEGREES _______________Line 6 ACTUAL AIRCRAFT HEADING = ( 0.0 deg ) + (Line 6)_______________Line 7

22-05-14

Page 4-31 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

AIRCRAFT MISALIGNMENT (MINUTES) 99 87

PLUMB BOB DISPLACEMENT (INCHES) 35 30 20 15

PLUMB BOB SEPARATION (FEET) 100 90 80 70

60 48 36 5 30 24 21 18 15 12 9 1 0.70 0.50 0.40 6 0.30 0.25 0.20 0.15 3 0.1 2 4 3 10

60

50

40 2

30

25

20

15

10 0.05 NOTE: USING A STRAIGHT EDGE, CONNECT LINE BETWEEN PLUMB BOB SEPARATION AND DISPLACEMENT VALUES TO DETERMINE AIRCRAFT MISALIGNMENT. AD-46791@

Figure 4-3. Nomograph

22-05-14

Page 4-32 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Example 1: Aircraft positioned pointing north and nose and tail both to the east (right) of the magnetic N-S line. Nose plumb bob displacement = 8 inches; tail plumb bob displacement = 6 inches; plumb bob separation = 22 feet. Line 4 = (Line 2) - (Line 3) = (+8) - (+6) = +2. Table 4-3. Aircraft Alignment Example 1 PLUMB BOB SEPARATION ALONG AIRCRAFT 22 feet Line 1 Line 2 Line 3

DISPLACEMENT OF NOSE PLUMB BOB FROM N-S LINE DISPLACEMENT OF TAIL PLUMB BOB FROM N-S LINE PLUMB BOB DISPLACEMENT = (Line 2) - (Line 3)

+ 8 inches + 6 inches

+ 2 inches

Line 4

AIRCRAFT ALIGNMENT WITH N-S LINE FROM NOMOGRAPH + 30 minutes Line 5 VALUE OF LINE 5 CONVERTED TO DEGREES + 0.5 deg Line 6 Line 7

ACTUAL AIRCRAFT HEADING = ( 0.0 deg ) + (Line 6)

000.5 deg

Example 2: Aircraft positioned pointing north and nose and tail both to the west (left) of the magnetic N-S line. Nose plumb bob displacement = -4 inches; tail plumb bob displacement = -7 inches; plumb bob separation = 20 feet. Line 4 = (Line 2) - (Line 3) = (-4) - (-7) = -4 +7 = +3. Table 4-4. Aircraft Alignment Example 2 PLUMB BOB SEPARATION ALONG AIRCRAFT 20 feet Line 1 Line 2 Line 3

DISPLACEMENT OF NOSE PLUMB BOB FROM N-S LINE DISPLACEMENT OF TAIL PLUMB BOB FROM N-S LINE PLUMB BOB DISPLACEMENT = (Line 2) - (Line 3)

- 4 inches - 7 inches

+ 3 inches

Line 4

AIRCRAFT ALIGNMENT WITH N-S LINE FROM NOMOGRAPH + 48 minutes Line 5 VALUE OF LINE 5 CONVERTED TO DEGREES + 0.8 deg Line 6 Line 7

ACTUAL AIRCRAFT HEADING = ( 0.0 deg ) + (Line 6)

000.8 deg

22-05-14

Page 4-33 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Example 3: Aircraft positioned pointing north with nose to the west (left) and tail to the east (right) of the magnetic N-S line. Nose plumb bob displacement = -3 inches; tail plumb bob displacement = + 1.5 inches; plumb bob separation = 25 feet. Line 4 = (Line 2) - (Line 3) = (-3) - (+1.5) = -3 -1.5 = -4.5. Table 4-5. Aircraft Alignment Example 3 PLUMB BOB SEPARATION ALONG AIRCRAFT 25 feet Line 1 Line 2 Line 3

DISPLACEMENT OF NOSE PLUMB BOB FROM N-S LINE DISPLACEMENT OF TAIL PLUMB BOB FROM N-S LINE PLUMB BOB DISPLACEMENT = (Line 2) - (Line 3)

- 3 inches + 2 inches

- 4.5 inches

Line 4

AIRCRAFT ALIGNMENT WITH N-S LINE FROM NOMOGRAPH - 60 minutes Line 5 VALUE OF LINE 5 CONVERTED TO DEGREES ACTUAL AIRCRAFT HEADING = ( 0.0 deg ) + (Line 6) - 1.0 deg Line 6 Line 7

359.0 deg

(3)

Flux Valve Calibration Procedure 1. The accuracy of the flux valve calibration will be optimized if the calibration procedure is performed while the aircrafts engines are running and all normal electrical and avionics systems are operating. The magnetic characteristics of the engines are different if they are running or if they are not running and the electrical and avionics systems and their associated wiring can contribute magnetic noise in the aircraft. The flux valve should be calibrated under magnetic conditions that closely approximate the conditions encountered in flight. It is recommended that the Compass Swing not be performed if the wind is greater than 15 knots. If more than one AHRS is to be calibrated, the flux valve calibration procedure can be performed on multiple units simultaneously. To do this, the RS-232 port of each AHRS to be calibrated can either be connected to a separate serial port on the PC, connected to separate PCs or multiplexed into a single port via an external switch. If a dual swing is to be done, the best results will be achieved by using two PCs, by multiplexing the two AHRS into one COM port of a PC or by using one PC with two COM Ports and performing both Compass Swings at the same time. This will save time and reduce the possibility of compass splits.

NOTES:

2. 3.

4.

22-05-14

Page 4-34 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(a)

Before connecting the Honeywell adapter cable (T-236238) to the 50-pin aircraft maintenance connector and the PC, make sure the System power is off. Connect P1 of the adapter cable to the 50-pin maintenance connector located on the maintenance panel behind the pilots seat. Connect P3 of the adapter cable to the PCs 9-pin access connector. Apply aircraft ground to J1 AHRS PROGRAM GROUND. Set S1 to AHRS 1 ENABLE or S2 to AHRS 2 ENABLE, if a single flux valve calibration is being performed. Set S1 to AHRS 1 ENABLE and S2 to AHRS 2 ENABLE, if a multiple flux valve calibration is being performed. Turn on power to the AHRS and wait 4 minutes for the system to stabilize. Turn on the PC. Run the AHZ-800 Attitude Heading Reference System PC Installation/Memory Access Software program, Honeywell Part No. 26011402-102, on the PC by typing "MA" at the DOS prompt. The following title screen will appear: AHZ-800 Attitude Heading Reference System PC Installation / Memory Access Software Part Number: 26011402-102 Version: 1.7 Compiled: 10-12-94

(b)

(c) (d) (e)

(f) (g) (h)

Copyright 1993, 1994, Honeywell Inc. All rights reserved

Press any key to go to the main menu

(i)

Press any key to continue to see the following Main Menu screen:

Configuration Calibration Single Flux Valve Calibration Multiple Flux Valve Calibration Display Flux Valve Calibration Single Tray Heading Alignment

22-05-14

Page 4-35 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(j)

Verify that the PROGRAMMING AHRS CONFIGURATION procedure has been performed before continuing the Flux Valve Calibration Procedure. Select CONFIGURATION from the Main Menu. The following is an example of the READ CONFIGURATION page of the AHZ-800 Installation software: AHRU Orientation: SDI: ASCB Configuration High Priority: ASCB Version: ARINC Configuration ARINC DADC 1 Speed: ARINC DADC 2 Speed: Controller Configuration Controller Configuration: Tray Heading Misalignment Misalignment coefficient Misalignment coefficient: Low Speed Low Speed Discretes = 0.0082 Preserve Handle Left AHRS #1

Enter=Edit Field; ESC=Quit; F1=Write Config to Memory Module

(k)

From the Main Menu, select "Calibration" and then select "Multiple Flux Valve Calibration". The following example shows AHRS 1 and AHRS 2 will be connected to COM 1. This selection would apply if the PC has only one COM port and AHRS 1 and AHRS 2 will be multiplexed into COM 1 port. If the PC has two COM ports, AHRS 1 can be connected to COM 1 port and AHRS 2 can be connected to COM 2 port. To edit the port definitions, follow the instruction at the bottom of the screen. Multiple Flux Valve Calibration will calibrate up to four AHRUs at once. An AHRU may be connected to either serial port 1 (COM1) or serial port 2 (COM2), if available. Four AHRUs are listed below, indicate which serial port (if any) the unit is connected to. AHRS #1: COM1 AHRS #2: COM1 AHRS #3: NOT USED AHRS #4: NOT USED

Press RET to edit; Press ESC to save and begin calibration

22-05-14

Page 4-36 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(l)

On the installation program s main menu, select the STATUS PAGE. If a multiple swing is to be done, both AHRS should be checked. The following is an example of that page: System Status Miscellaneous Data Mode = DG Basic Elapsed Time = 6919.52 sec Internal Temp = 64.23 C SDI = AHRS #2 Memory Access Password = Enabled # of Flight Faults in NVM = 1 Discretes Shop Maintenance = Disabled Memory Access = Enabled Auxiliary Power = Available On Primary Power Weight-on-Wheels = On-Ground Functional Test = Not In Progress DG Mode = Selected HS1,HS2,HS3,HS4 = 1,1,0,0 The AHRU is currently not exhibiting any faults, Press any key to Exit

(m)

If the flux valve has previously been calibrated, verify that: The AHRU is currently not exhibiting any faults Memory Access = Enabled and Weight-On-Wheels = On-Ground.

If the memory module has never had flux valve coefficients written to it, such as in a new installation, expect to see a memory module fault for the flux valve coefficient sumcheck test. If there are any other flux valve faults, the flux valve and wiring should be checked.

22-05-14

Page 4-37 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(n)

On the installation programs Main Menu, select the "Memory Access Tests" option. Then select the "Interface Test" option. This will verify that the communication between the PC or laptop and the AHRU is established. The following is an example of the Interface Test screen: Interface Test Memory Access Read Test: Passed Memory Access Input Discrete Test Ground/Air Flag: On Ground Memory Access Discrete: Enabled Weight On Wheels Discrete: On Wheels Memory Access Write Test: Passed Interface Test Passed Press Any Key to Return to the Main Menu

(o)

Verify the following: Interface Test Passed Ground/Air Flag: On Ground Weight-On-Wheels Discrete: On Wheels messages appear.

(p)

Select the DG mode from the DG/SLVD switch in the cockpit.

22-05-14

Page 4-38 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(q)

On the installation programs Main Menu, select the "Calibration" option. Next select the "Single Flux Valve Calibration" or "Multiple Flux Valve Calibration" option. The following or similar screen will be displayed:

Steer the aircraft to a known heading, accurate to within 0.5 Enter Reference Heading (Degrees): _______

(r)

Enter the initial reference heading (actual aircraft heading from Line 7, Table 4-2) as a value, in degrees, in the range of 000.0 to 359.9 degrees and select "ENTER" on the PC. This heading can be any cardinal or inter cardinal heading. Verify that the compass card display in the cockpit reads the value entered as the initial reference heading. If the PC indicates that it was unsuccessful in its attempt to transmit the entered initial reference heading to the AHRS, perform the steps in paragraph 18.B.(3)(o). CAUTION: THE COMPASS SWING PROCEDURE SHOULD BE COMPLETED WITHIN 60 MINUTES, OR AS QUICKLY AS POSSIBLE, FROM THE TIME THE INITIAL REFERENCE HEADING WAS "ENTERED". THE BASIS OF THE 60 MINUTE TIME LIMIT IS THE MAXIMUM SPECIFIED ALLOWABLE FREE DRIFT OF THE HEADING AXIS GYRO, WHICH IS 5.0 DEGREES PER HOUR. (TYPICALLY, THE FREE DRIFT WILL BE SIGNIFICANTLY LESS THAN 5.0 DEGREES PER HOUR) WHEN THE INITIAL REFERENCE HEADING IS "ENTERED", THE HEADING AXIS GYRO IS ALSO SUBJECT TO EARTH RATE. THE PROCEDURE WILL MEASURE THE TOTAL DRIFT OF THE HEADING AXIS GYRO FROM THE TIME THE INITIAL REFERENCE HEADING IS "ENTERED" TO WHEN THE FINAL HEADING IS "ENTERED". IF THE TOTAL DRIFT OF THE HEADING AXIS GYRO HAS EXCEEDED 5.0 DEGREES THE SOFTWARE WILL NOT ALLOW FOR A SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION OF THE COMPASS SWING PROCEDURE. THEREFORE, AS LATITUDE INCREASES, THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE TIME DECREASES.

22-05-14

Page 4-39 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

NOTE:

The total drift of the heading axis gyro is the sum of the free drift and earth rate. Earth rate is a function of the latitude of the compass swing location. Earth rate is negative (-) in the Northern hemisphere and positive (+) in the Southern hemisphere.

The formula for earth rate (ER) is: ER = 15 sin (latitude) As an aid, the following earth rates and worst case total drift rates and time limits are provided for reference: LATITUDE 0 deg 10 deg 20 deg 30 deg 40 deg 50 deg 60 deg (s) EARTH RATE 0 deg/hr 2.6 deg/hr 5.1 deg/hr 7.5 deg/hr 9.6 deg/hr 11.5 deg/hr 13.0 deg/hr MAX TOTAL DRIFT 5.0 deg/hr 7.6 deg/hr 10.1 deg/hr 12.5 deg/hr 14.6 deg/hr 16.5 deg/hr 18.0 deg/hr MAX TIME 60 minutes 39 minutes 30 minutes 24 minutes 21 minutes 18 minutes 17 minutes

If the PC indicates that it was unable to place the AHRS into the Flux Valve Calibration Mode, perform the following steps: 1 2 3 4 Turn off power to the AHRS. Check the RS-232 connections between the AHRS and the PC. Turn on power to the AHRS. Verify that the configuration has been programmed, by selecting the "Read Configuration" option from the programs Configuration Menu. Wait several minutes for the system to stabilize. Repeat paragraph 18.B.(3)(n). If the PC cannot place the AHRS in the "Calibration Mode" on the second attempt, take the proper steps to make sure that the AHRS Memory Module, AHRU, Flux Valve or wiring is repaired.

5 6 7

22-05-14

Page 4-40 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(t)

On the PCs screen will be a list of cardinal and inter cardinal headings. To verify that the Calibration Mode has been entered, check the cockpit for indications that the displayed heading is in the DG mode and the displayed heading is the value entered as the initial reference heading. Using the EFIS or PFD compass card as a reference, taxi or tow the aircraft to the next heading displayed on the PC. Position the aircraft to within 5.0 degrees of the heading which is listed by the PC. The following is an example of the display on the PC. Flux Valve Calibration being performed on: AHRS #1 connected to COM1

Perform a 360 degree compass swing, stopping at the cardinal and inter-cardinal headings (within 5.0). The final heading sample must be the same as the initial reference heading (within 5.0). Select the corresponding swing heading at right and press enter.

----------45 Degrees 90 Degrees 135 Degrees 180 Degrees 225 Degrees 270 Degrees 315 Degrees Exit -----------

NOTE:

The aircraft may now be taxied to the next heading listed, or, if for some reason it is desirable, the aircraft can be taxied to any of the listed headings in any order. If the headings are selected in any order, move the cursor to the appropriate heading on the list and select ENTER. Continue this process until all of the listed headings have been selected Also, the initial aircraft heading can be any of the cardinal or inter cardinal headings.

(u)

After the aircraft has been positioned to the heading displayed by the cursor on the PC, let the flux valve stabilize for 15 to 20 seconds and then select "ENTER". Repeat for all the headings listed. After all of the headings listed have been entered, the calibration software will display a new screen. This screen will prompt the operator to return to the initial heading within 5 degrees and press "ENTER". The final heading sample will be the starting heading. When the PC indicates that the flux valve calibration has been completed successfully, press any key on the PCs keyboard. If during the swing, the PC indicates that the position of the aircraft needs to be adjusted, adjust the aircraft by the amount indicated on the PC.

(v)

22-05-14

Page 4-41 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(w)

If the PC indicates that a flux valve failure has occurred, terminate the flux valve calibration and take the proper steps to make sure that the AHRU, flux valve or wiring is repaired. If the PC displays an instruction to position the aircraft to another heading, return to paragraph 18.B.(3)(p). If the PC indicates that a second compass swing is required, press any key on the PCs keyboard and return to paragraph 18.B.(3)(p). If the PC indicates that the flux valve calibration has failed, perform the steps in paragraph 18.B.(3)(o). If the PC indicates that the AHRS was unable to write the results of the flux valve calibration to the memory module, take the proper steps to make sure that the AHRU, memory module or wiring is repaired. Remove power and disconnect the AHRS Test Box from the aircraft connectors and the PC. The next time the AHRS is powered up, it will then use the results of the completed compass swing procedure. The MAG mode will now be valid if this is the first time flux valve coefficients were stored by the memory module. The stored flux valve coefficients can then be read on the Display Flux Valve Coefficients screen of the PC. After this flux valve calibration (compass swing) procedure has been performed, the compass system will provide an accuracy of 1.0 degree under normal operating conditions. If dual AHZ-800 systems are installed, the maximum split between the two systems should be 2.0 degrees. NOTE: There may appear to be compass system errors or splits if the compass system is observed while on a taxi way, ramp area or near a hangar, due to metal reinforcement in the ramp or taxi way or due to magnetic disturbances if near a hangar.

(x)

(y)

(z)

(aa)

(ab)

(ac)

(ad)

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-42 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

19. Procedure for the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit. (a) (b) (c) (2) Disengage the Dzus fasteners on the unit. Slide the unit out of the panel. Disconnect the cable connectors.

Reinstall the GC-550 Guidance Control Unit. (a) Mate the cable connectors with the unit connectors and slide the unit into the panel. Engage the Dzus fasteners on the unit.

(b)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Replacement of the pushbutton switch lamps. NOTE: Access to these lamps does not require removing the control unit from the instrument panel. BE CAREFUL TO AVOID CRACKING THE PLASTIC SWITCH PUSHBUTTON WHEN PERFORMING PARAGRAPH 19.C.(1).

CAUTION:

(1)

Use an IC puller and insert the tips into the notch at the top and bottom or on each side of the switch pushbutton. Gently pull straight out until the pushbutton assembly moves out from the switch housing. Grasp the pushbutton assembly and slide it out until it reaches its stop and then let the pushbutton assembly hinge down. Remove and replace the defective lamp. Hinge the pushbutton assembly up and slide the assembly back into the housing until it locks into position.

(2)

(3) (4)

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-43 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

20. Procedure for the Global Navigation System Sensor Unit (GNSSU)
A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the GNSSU. (a) (b) Disconnect the aircraft cable and antenna connectors. Remove and set aside the four screws and washers securing GNSSU to the airframe.

(2)

Reinstall the GNSSU. (a) Secure the GNSSU to the airframe using the four 10-32 screws, lockwashers, and flat washers that were removed and set aside. Mate the unit connectors with the appropriate antenna and cable connectors.

(b)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-44 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

21. Procedure for the IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer (IAC)


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the IC-600 IAC. (a) (b) Loosen the mounting tray hold-down knob. Slowly pull forward on the unit handle to separate the unit and tray connectors and slide the unit out of the tray.

(2)

Reinstall the IC-600 IAC. NOTE: Make sure that the correct part number IAC is being installed. Pilots side (IAC No. 1) uses Part No. 7017000-824XX and copilots side (IAC No. 2) uses Part No. 7017000-834XX.

(a)

Slide the unit into the mounting tray. CAUTION: WHEN PLACING THE UNIT ON THE MOUNTING TRAY, DO NOT FORCE FIT. IF MATING IS DIFFICULT, REMOVE THE UNIT AND CHECK FOR CONNECTOR PINS THAT MAY BE BENT OR OUT OF ALIGNMENT. ALSO, VISUALLY CHECK THE ALIGNMENT OF THE RECEPTACLE ON THE MOUNTING TRAY.

(b)

Slide the unit backwards until its connectors are fully engaged with the mating connectors of the mounting tray. If necessary, gently lift the front of the unit to make sure that the hold-down assembly mates properly with the tray hold-down hooks. Tighten the hold-down knob.

(c)

(d)

B.

Checklist Loading Procedures


(1) IAC Checklist Upload Procedure The MFD checklist is stored in each IC-600 Integrated Avionics Computer. (a) (b) The aircraft must be on the ground (WOW) and powered up in standby. Locate the 50-pin maintenance connector located behind the pilots seat. Connect a personal computer (PC) using a RS-232 interconnect cable Honeywell Part No. T-336238-2 to the 50 pin maintenance connector. Connect IC-1 or IC-2 for the appropriate IAC and connect to the PC.

22-05-14

Page 4-45 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

NOTES:

1.

The PC must have the checklist programming software and the desired checklist available for use. Refer to the ECP-800 Programmable Checklist Manual for details. If the PC has Windows 3.1 or 95, do not access the ECP-800 software from the Windows prompt. Instead, use the DOS prompt to start the checklist software.

2.

(c)

Apply power to the avionics. Observe that the RA SET area on the PFD is valid. Using the on-side DC-550 Display Controller, use the RA (DH) knob to set 890 RA (DH) on the PFD. Push and hold the display controller TEST pushbutton for a minimum of 10 seconds and while holding the TEST pushbutton momentarily push the display controller ET pushbutton. The following display (Figure 4-4) appears on the onside PFD:

(d)

(e)

CHECKLIST LOADING

PROGRAMMABLE CHECKLIST EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED

SCREEN WILL BLANK

CYCLE IC-600 CIRCUIT BREAKER TO RECOVER

DC550 PUSHBUTTONS NAV ENTER CKLST

890 RA
AD-51524@

Figure 4-4. Checklist Loading Page (f) Momentarily push the NAV pushbutton on the onside DC-550 Display Controller. The PFD momentarily blanks and a large red X is displayed. The red X remains until paragraph 24.B.(3)(i).

22-05-14

Page 4-46 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(g)

Use the electronic programmable checklist software on the PC to output the checklist and upload it to the onside IAC.

NOTE:

If a checklist is already in the IAC, error code 5100 is displayed on the PC. Follow the instructions on the PC.

(h) (i) (j) (k) (l)

When the upload is complete, follow the instructions on the PC to finish. Pull the appropriate IAC circuit breaker to power down the IAC. Remove the RS-232 cable from the maintenance connector. Push in the appropriate IAC circuit breaker to power up the IAC. When the IAC is powered up, verify that the checklist can be selected by pushing either the NORM or EMER buttons which are selectable on the onside MFD bezel menu. Review the checklist for accuracy. The procedure is complete.

(m) (n)

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22. Procedure for the IM-803 Installation Module


NOTE: The IM-803 defines the configuration of the aircraft in which an optional NZ-2000 FMS is installed, and is located near the NZ-2000 mounting tray.

A.

Removal and Reinstallation Procedures


(1) Remove the IM-803 Installation Module. (a) (b) Loosen the two captive screws that attach the module to the enclosure. Grasp the handle and slide the module out of the enclosure.

22-05-14

Page 4-47 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(2)

Reinstall the IM-803 Installation Module. CAUTION: IF THE IM-803 IS REMOVED FROM THE AIRCRAFT AND REPLACED WITH AN IM-803 FROM CUSTOMER-OWNED SHELF STOCK OR WAS OBTAINED FROM EMBRAER OR HONEYWELL, THE CONFIGURATION STRAPS WILL HAVE TO BE CUT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LIST IN SECTION 3 AND THE PROCEDURE IN PARAGRAPH 22.B. OF THIS MANUAL.

(a) (b)

Carefully slide the module into the enclosure. Tighten the two captive screws.

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Cutting the configuration straps. CAUTIONS: 1. 2. BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN CUTTING CONFIGURATION STRAPS SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE THE CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY. PERFORM STRAP CUTTING IN AN ELECTROSTATIC-SAFE ENVIRONMENT TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY. ALWAYS TRANSPORT THE CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY IN ITS ENCLOSURE OR IN AN ANTISTATIC BAG.

3.

(1) (2)

Loosen the two captive screws that attach the module to the enclosure. Grasp the handle and slide the module containing the circuit card assembly out of the enclosure. Using a pair of diagonal cutters, cut the straps (jumper wires) in two places and remove the wire fragment. After cutting all the required jumpers, install the module in its enclosure and secure with the two captive screws.

(3)

(4)

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-48 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

23. Procedure for the MM-260 AHRS Memory Module


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
NOTE: (1) Removal of the Memory Module requires that the AHRU be out of the rack.

Remove the MM-260 AHRS Memory Module. NOTE: The MM-260 is "hard wired" to the AHRU mounting tray connector. Extract the five pins from connector 1J1B-F6, F7, F8, F9 and F11.

(a)

Remove and set aside the three screws which can be seen to the left of the connectors when looking into the rack. Lift the memory module out of the mounting tray.

(b) (2)

Reinstall the MM-260 AHRS Memory Module. (a) Insert the leads from the memory module into the ARINC 600 connector per the following color code: (b) Orange - F6 Red - F7 Black - F8 Yellow - F9 Brown - F11.

Align the memory module with the mounting holes on the back of the mounting tray. Reinstall and tighten the mounting screws that were previously removed and set aside. Perform adjustment procedures in paragraph 23.B.

(c)

(d)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Perform AHRS leveling procedure and flux valve calibration procedure.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-49 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

24. Procedure for the NZ-2000 FMS Navigation Computer


CAUTION: IF AN NZ-2000 IS REMOVED FROM THE AIRCRAFT AND REPLACED WITH AN NZ-2000 FROM CUSTOMER OWNED SHELF STOCK, OR WAS OBTAINED FROM EMBRAER OR HONEYWELL, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO DOWNLOAD THE CUSTOM AND NAVIGATION DATABASE AND CHECKLIST FILES FROM THE MEMORY TO A 3.5-INCH DISKETTE. BOTH THE NAVIGATION AND CUSTOM DATABASE AND THE CHECKLIST WILL NEED TO BE UPLOADED TO THE REPLACEMENT NZ-2000. REFER TO THE PROCEDURES IN PARAGRAPH 24.B. 1. The custom database is made up of flight plans and pilot defined waypoints. This database can be loaded from a disk if available. Please refer to your companys flight operations department for availability of custom database information on disk. Through the use of the DL-900 Data Loader, you have the option to transfer the custom database to 3.5-inch floppy diskettes. Also, you have the option to transfer the custom or navigation database from disk to the NZ-2000.

NOTES:

2.

A.

Removal and Reinstallation Procedures


(1) Remove the NZ-2000 FMS Navigation Computer. (a) (b) Loosen the mounting tray hold-down knob. Slowly pull forward on the unit handle to separate the unit and tray connectors and slide the unit out of the tray.

(2)

Reinstall the NZ-2000 FMS Navigation Computer. (a) Slide the unit into the mounting tray. CAUTION: WHEN PLACING THE UNIT ON THE MOUNTING TRAY, DO NOT FORCE FIT. IF MATING IS DIFFICULT, REMOVE THE UNIT AND CHECK FOR CONNECTOR PINS THAT MAY BE BENT OR OUT OF ALIGNMENT. ALSO, VISUALLY CHECK THE ALIGNMENT OF THE RECEPTACLE ON THE MOUNTING TRAY.

(b)

Slide the unit backwards until its connectors are fully engaged with the mating connectors of the mounting tray. If necessary, gently lift the front of the unit to make sure that the hold-down assembly mates properly with the tray hold-down hooks. Tighten the hold-down knob.

(c)

(d)

22-05-14

Page 4-50 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

Dataload and Data Transfer Procedures


(1) Loading the Navigation Database from the DL-900 Data Loader. NOTE: Every 28 days, the FMS navigation database in the NZ-2000 must be updated. The loading of the new navigation database can only be accomplished while the aircraft is on the ground.

(a) (b)

Apply power to the data loader using the appropriate aircraft circuit breaker. Push the POWER switch on the data loader. The POWER LED shall light and after the powerup BITE sequence is completed, the DATA LED shall light. On the data loader, select LEFT or RIGHT. Insert the navigation database disk in the data loader. On the CD-810 Control Display Unit (CDU), select the DATA LOAD page from the NAV INDEX, page 2. On the DATA TO BE LOADED page, select NAV DB. On the TRANSFER OF NAV DB page, select FR LOADER. On the CONFIRM TRANSFER OF NAV DB page, confirm selection by selecting YES or NO. Monitor % of loading progress. In the case of the worldwide database, the FMS prompts for insertion of more than one disk. The FMS automatically begins reading the next disk. When complete, the message DB TRANSFER COMPLETE is displayed and the FMS does a restart. NOTE: If power is interrupted, ABORT selected, or other problems stop the loading, the data load process must be repeated from the beginning.

(c) (d) (e)

(f) (g) (h)

(i)

(j)

Remove the disk and turn off the data loader. Remove from the aircraft if not permanently installed.

(2)

Transferring the Custom Database To or From the DL-900 Data Loader. The custom database can be transferred to or from the data loader. When loading the custom database from the data loader, the custom database is completely replaced by the contents of the disk including stored flight plans and pilot defined waypoints. When transferring the custom database to a disk, both the pilot defined waypoints and flight plans are transferred. This option keeps a permanent record of the custom database for loading in case of NZ-2000 replacement or other losses of the custom database. Refer to the following steps to transfer the custom database:

22-05-14

Page 4-51 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(a)

If the DL-900 Data Loader is not installed in the aircraft, connect the data loader cable to the aircraft connector. Apply power to the data loader using the appropriate aircraft circuit breaker. Push the POWER switch on the data loader. The POWER LED shall light and after the powerup BITE sequence is completed, the DATA LED shall light. On the data loader, select LEFT or RIGHT. If transferring from the data loader to the NZ-2000, insert the custom database disk in the data loader. If transferring from the NZ-2000 to the data loader, insert a formatted disk. If a disk needs formatting, use the MAINTENANCE page option. On the CD-810 Control Display Unit (CDU), select the DATA LOAD page from the NAV INDEX, page 2. On the DATA TO BE LOADED page, select CUSTOM DB. On the TRANSFER OF CUSTOM DB page, select TO LOADER or FR LOADER depending on whether you are transferring data from or to the data loader. On the CONFIRM TRANSFER OF CUSTOM DB page, confirm selection by selecting YES or NO. Monitor % of loading progress. When complete, the message DB TRANSFER COMPLETE is displayed. The FMS does a restart in the case where the custom database was loaded from the data loader. NOTE: If power is interrupted, ABORT selected, or other problems stop the loading, the data load process must be repeated from the beginning.

(b) (c)

(d) (e)

(f)

(g) (h)

(i)

(j)

(k)

Remove the disk and turn off the data loader. Remove from the aircraft if not permanently installed.

C.

Repair Procedures
The NZ-2000 battery pack can be replaced by the customer. The battery pack is stocked under Honeywell Part No. 7020116-1 and consists of two AA lithium thionyl chloride batteries shrink-wrapped together and connected to a lead set. A No. 1 Phillips screwdriver is required to access the battery pack during removal and replacement. All battery packs have a manufacturers date code in WW/YY (week/year) format. Battery packs with date codes exceeding 3 years of age should not be used for replacement.

22-05-14

Page 4-52 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(1)

Battery Pack Removal CAUTION: IF AN NZ-2000 BATTERY IS GOING TO BE REMOVED, THE CUSTOM AND NAVIGATION DATABASE WILL BE LOST. THE CUSTOM DATABASE MUST BE DOWNLOADED FROM THE MEMORY TO A 3.5-INCH DISKETTE. THE CUSTOM DATABASE WILL NEED TO BE UPLOADED TO THE NZ-2000 ALONG WITH THE CURRENT NAVIGATIONAL DATABASE SUPPLIED BY HONEYWELL AFTER THE BATTERY IS REPLACED. REFER TO THE PROCEDURES IN PARAGRAPH 24.B.(1) AND 24.B.(2).

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Download the custom database in accordance with paragraph 24.B.(2). Remove power from the NZ-2000. Remove the NZ-2000 in accordance with paragraph 24.A. Remove the four screws which secure the fan/battery access door. The screws are on the left and right side of the chassis near the fan housing located at the rear of the unit. Open the fan/battery access door to gain access to the battery pack. The door is hinged at the bottom. The battery pack is secured to the door with a bracket and two screws. Remove the two screws and the retaining bracket. Disconnect the battery pack lead set from the header on the fan/filter card and remove the battery pack from the unit.

(e)

(f)

(g)

(2)

Battery Pack Installation (a) Position the battery pack into the fan/battery access door so the lead set exits closest to the mating header on the fan/filter card. Place the retaining bracket over the battery pack and install the two screws to secure the battery pack. Connect the battery pack lead set to the mating connector on the fan/filter card. The lead set connector is keyed to ensure the correct polarity (the key in the lead set connector must be positioned over the missing pin on the mating header). Push down on the connector until it seats fully against the header. Close the fan/battery access door and install the four screws to secure the door. Install the NZ-2000 in accordance with paragraph 24.A.

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

22-05-14

Page 4-53 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(f)

Apply power to the NZ-2000 and enter the date and time on the CDU. This step is necessary to place the ICM7170 Clock/Calender chip in low power mode. If the ICM7170 is not initialized, the battery life will be greatly reduced. Refer to procedures in paragraph 24.B.(1) and 24.B.(2) for loading the navigational and custom database.

(g)

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

25. Procedure for the PC-400 Autopilot Controller


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the PC-400 Autopilot Controller. (a) (b) Disengage the Dzus fasteners on the unit. Slide the unit out of the aircraft mounting location and disconnect the cable connector.

(2)

Reinstall the PC-400 Autopilot Controller. (a) Mate the cable connector with the unit connector and slide the unit into the aircraft mounting location. Engage the Dzus fasteners on the unit.

(b)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-54 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

26. Procedure for the RCZ-851(X) Integrated Communications Unit


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the RCZ-851(X) Integrated Communications Unit. (a) (b) Cut the safety wire and loosen the thumbnuts. Slowly pull forward on the unit handle to separate the unit and tray connectors and slide the unit out of the tray.

(2)

Reinstall the RCZ-851(X) Integrated Communications Unit. CAUTION: WHEN PLACING THE UNIT ON THE MOUNTING TRAY, DO NOT FORCE FIT. IF MATING IS DIFFICULT, REMOVE THE UNIT AND CHECK FOR CONNECTOR PINS THAT MAY BE BENT OR OUT OF ALIGNMENT. ALSO, VISUALLY CHECK THE ALIGNMENT OF THE RECEPTACLE ON THE MOUNTING TRAY.

(a)

Place the unit on the mounting tray. Slide the unit backward until its connectors are fully engaged with the mating connectors of the mounting tray. Tighten the thumbnuts and attach the safety wire. NOTE: Instructions for the removal and reinstallation of a COM module are contained with the replacement module.

(b)

B.

Adjustment Procedure
NOTE: All adjustments on the COM Unit are set at the factory for typical operating conditions. Most COM Unit installations should not require any adjustments. If an adjustment is necessary, perform the adjustment in accordance with the following procedures. See Figure 4-5 for the adjustment locations.

(1)

Microphone Level Adjustment Because of differences in microphone characteristics, it may be necessary to reset the MIC Level Adjustment to obtain the desired modulation level.

(2)

Sidetone Level Adjustment The sidetone level on the COM Unit is preset at the factory. If a change in sidetone level is desired, the adjustment should first be attempted on the Audio Control Unit. Refer to paragraph 9.B. of this section. If the desired level cannot be obtained by Audio Control Unit adjustments, adjust the Sidetone Level on the COM unit to obtain desired sidetone level.

(3)

Master Audio Adjustment The Master Audio Adjustment controls sidetone and receiver audio. This adjustment should not be changed, as any adjustment will adversely affect audio input levels in the AV-850A Audio Control Unit.

22-05-14

Page 4-55 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

MIC LEVEL ADJUST

MASTER AUDIO ADJUST

SIDETONE LEVEL ADJUST


AD-17752@

Figure 4-5. COM Unit Adjustment Locations

27. Procedure for the RM-855 Radio Management Unit (RMU)


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the RM-855 RMU. (a) (b) Loosen the clamp screws on the panel at each top corner of the unit. Without turning the screws, push them straight into the panel. This will release the clamp. Slide the RMU out of the panel and disconnect the cable connector.

(c)

22-05-14

Page 4-56 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(2)

Reinstall the RM-855 RMU. (a) (b) Mate the cable connector with the RMU connector. Slide the RMU into the panel.

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Replacement of the tuning knobs. (1) (2) (3) Use a 0.060-inch O.D., 6 flute, Bristol wrench to loosen the setscrews. Remove the defective knob. On new knobs, make sure that the setscrews are out far enough to allow the knob to slide onto the shaft. Apply retaining compound to setscrews. Slide the large tuning knob onto the shaft. Make sure that the space between the knob and the bezel is approximately 0.025 inch (0.6 mm). Tighten both No. 4-40 setscrews with the Bristol wrench. Recheck spacing between the knob and the bezel to make sure that knob has not slipped during installation. Slide the small tuning knob onto the shaft, making sure that the small tuning knob does not rub against the large tuning knob. Align the access holes in the large tuning knob with the setscrews in the small tuning knob. Tighten both No. 4-40 setscrews with the Bristol wrench. Recheck to make sure that the small tuning knob has not slipped during installation, and is not rubbing against the large tuning knob.

(4) (5)

(6) (7)

(8)

(9)

(10) (11)

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-57 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

28. Procedure for the RNZ-851(X) Integrated Navigation Unit


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the RNZ-851(X) Integrated Navigation Unit. (a) (b) Cut the safety wire and loosen the thumbnuts. Slowly pull forward on the unit handle to separate the unit and tray connectors and slide the unit out of the tray.

(2)

Reinstall the RNZ-851(X) Integrated Navigation Unit. CAUTION: WHEN PLACING THE UNIT ON THE MOUNTING TRAY, DO NOT FORCE FIT. IF MATING IS DIFFICULT, REMOVE THE UNIT AND CHECK FOR CONNECTOR PINS THAT MAY BE BENT OR OUT OF ALIGNMENT. ALSO, VISUALLY CHECK THE ALIGNMENT OF THE RECEPTACLE ON THE MOUNTING TRAY.

(a)

Place the unit on the mounting tray. Slide the unit backward until its connectors are fully engaged with the mating connectors of the mounting tray. Tighten the thumbnuts and attach the safety wire. NOTE: Instructions for the removal and reinstallation of a NAV module are contained with the replacement module.

(b)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
All adjustments on the NAV Unit are set at the factory for typical operating conditions. Most NAV Unit installations should not require any adjustments. If an adjustment is necessary, perform the adjustment in accordance with the following procedures. NAV units have holes in the top cover and the holes are labeled. See Figure 4-6 for NAV Unit adjustment locations. Some procedures below refer to digital and analog audio signals. The digital audio is the "normal" audio from the AV-850A Audio Control Unit. The analog audio signals are the traditional audio signals used in aircraft. VOR/LOC analog audio is used for the emergency backup audio system. (1) LOC Audio Level Adjustment The LOC Audio adjustment controls the VOR/LOC receiver emergency audio level out of the AV-850A. This adjustment will not affect the digital audio level from the AV-850A. Emergency audio for the VOR/LOC is a backup system for the digital audio and is connected on the side of the aircraft that has the CD-850 Clearance Delivery Control Head (CDH) installed. Before making any adjustments of the LOC audio level, perform the following procedure to determine if adjustment is needed.

22-05-14

Page 4-58 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

LOC AUDIO

MKR AUDIO (NOT USED)

ADF AUDIO

MKR SENS LOW

MKR SENS HIGH

DME ACT 2 AUDIO

DME ACT 1 AUDIO

AD-51154@

Figure 4-6. NAV Unit Adjustment Locations

22-05-14

Page 4-59 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(a)

Set the HEADPHONE volume control on the AV-850A Audio Control Unit to its typical operating position and push in the EMER button on the AV-850A. Push the NAV AUDIO button on the CD-850 CDH and verify NAV AUDIO is shown on the CDH display. Tune the CDH to a VOR station, either in flight or on the ground and verify a flag-out-of-view condition on an indicator. Listen to the VOR emergency audio with a set of headphones. Adjust the audio level as follows: Find the LOC AUDIO adjustment on top of the NAV unit and increase or decrease audio level as desired For an increase of audio level, turn the adjustment clockwise For a decrease of audio level, turn the adjustment counterclockwise.

(b)

(c)

(d) (e)

(2) (3)

MKR Audio Level Adjustment MKR High and Low Sensitivity Threshold Adjustments The MKR High and Low Sensitivity Adjustments control how long the marker lamps will be ON and how long the marker audio will be heard when crossing a marker ground station. These adjustments will not affect the marker digital or analog audio output levels, only the duration of the marker audio and display. The High sensitivity mode is typically used for "enroute" flying, i.e., high altitudes and the Low sensitivity mode is typically used during approach, i.e., low altitudes, typically when flying an ILS. To determine if either High or Low sensitivity needs adjustment, perform the following flight test procedure: (a) Electromagnetic Compatibility With all aircraft avionics systems operating in flight, verify by observation, that no adverse effects are present. (b) Marker Beacon Performance Checks 1 In low sensitivity mode, the marker beacon annunciator light should be illuminated for a distance of 2,000 to 3,000 feet when flying at an altitude of 1,000 feet AGL on the localizer centerline in all flap and gear configurations.

22-05-14

Page 4-60 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

NOTE:

To determine distances of 2,000 to 3,000 feet time the marker beacon light duration, determine ground speed and then use the formulas listed below: Upper limit = Seconds Lower limit = Seconds 1775 Ground Speed in Knots 1183 Ground Speed in Knots

In high sensitivity mode, the marker beacon annunciator light and audio will remain on longer than when in low sensitivity. The audio signal should be of adequate strength and sufficiently free from interference to provide positive identification. As an alternate procedure, cross the outer marker at normal ILS approach altitudes and determine adequate marker aural and visual indication. NOTE: When adjusting Marker High and Low sensitivity thresholds, the High sensitivity adjustment must always be set to the desired threshold before Low sensitivity adjustment is performed.

Find the adjustments on top of the NAV Unit. To cause the Marker lamps and audio to stay ON for a shorter length of time, turn the MKR SENS HIGH or MKR SENS LOW adjustment clockwise.

(4)

ADF Audio Level Adjustment The ADF AUDIO adjustment controls the ADF receiver analog audio level. This adjustment will not affect the digital audio output level from the Honeywell AV-850A Audio Control Unit. (a) (b) For an increase of audio level, turn the adjustment clockwise. For a decrease of audio level, turn the adjustment counterclockwise.

(5)

DME Audio Level Adjustment The DME audio adjustments control the DME analog audio levels. These adjustments will not affect the digital output level from the Honeywell AV-850A Audio Control Unit. (a) (b) For an increase of audio level, turn the adjustment clockwise. For a decrease of audio level, turn the adjustment counterclockwise.

22-05-14

Page 4-61 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

29. Procedure for the RNZ-851/RCZ-851 Strap Board Assembly


CAUTION: THE STRAP BOARD ASSEMBLY CAN BE DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). GROUND YOURSELF BEFORE HANDLING THE ASSEMBLY, AND ALWAYS HANDLE IT BY THE EDGES.

NOTE:

The Integrated Radio System contains a total of four strap board assemblies; one COM and one NAV assembly contained in each remotely mounted strapping assembly.

A.

Removal and Reinstallation Procedures


(1) Remove the RNZ-851/RCZ-851 Strap Board Assembly. (a) (b) Remove the two screws and cover from the strapping assembly. Remove and set aside the three roundhead screws and lockwashers securing the COM or NAV strap board assembly. Gently pull out on the assembly and disconnect the flat connector from the assembly.

(c)

(2)

Reinstall the RNZ-851/RCZ-851 Strap Board Assembly. CAUTION: BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN CUTTING CONFIGURATION STRAPS SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE THE STRAP BOARD ASSEMBLY.

NOTE:

If the strap board assembly is removed from the aircraft and replaced with an assembly from customer owned shelf stock or was obtained from Honeywell, the configuration straps will have to be cut in accordance with the list in Section 3 of this manual.

(a)

Handle the strap board assembly by its edges and attach the flat connector to the assembly. Secure the assembly using the three roundhead screws and lockwashers that were removed and previously set aside. Check that the harness grommet is positioned at the bottom of slot in chassis.

(b)

(c)

22-05-14

Page 4-62 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

30. Procedure for the RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedure
(1) Remove the RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter. (a) (b) Disconnect the aircraft cable and antenna connectors. Remove and set aside the mounting hardware on the front of the unit and loosen the mounting hardware on the rear of the unit and remove the unit.

(2)

Reinstall the RT-300 Radio Altimeter Receiver Transmitter. (a) (b) Slide the unit into the mounting tray and secure with the applicable hardware. Mate the aircraft cable and antenna connectors.

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Adjust the radio altimeter display zero ground. NOTE: There are two ways that the zero ground adjustment can be accomplished. The preferred and most accurate way is described in paragraph 30.B.(1). If a cable (Figure 4-7) is not available to perform this procedure, then the alternate procedure in paragraph 30.B.(2) can be used.

(1)

Preferred RT-300 Zero Ground Adjustment. (a) (b) Connect the cable (Figure 4-7) in-line with the aircraft cable and the RT-300. Check that the RT-300 transmit and receive ports (J2 and J3) are connected to the antennas. Connect a digital voltmeter (DVM) to the cable meter leads. Apply power to the RT-300. Adjust the potentiometer, that is accessible through hole in front panel of RT-300, for 0 2 mV indication on DVM.

(c) (d) (e)

22-05-14

Page 4-63 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(f) (g) (2)

Remove power and disconnect the adjustment cable. Connect the aircraft cable to the RT-300.

Alternate RT-300 Zero Ground Adjustment. (a) (b) Apply power to the RT-300. Adjust the potentiometer, that is accessible through hole in front panel of RT-300, until a positive radio altitude is displayed on one of the PFDs. Adjust the potentiometer for zero foot display indication on the PFD.

(c)

TO RT-300 A

TO AIRCRAFT CABLE
A

B C
D

B C
D

E F
G H

E F
G H

J K
L

J K
L

M N P
R

M N P
R

S T
U V

S T
U V

W X Y Z a
b

W X Y Z a NOTE 2
NOTE 4 b

c MS3126F16-26S

c MS3121F16-26P

(+)

(-)

NOTES: 1. ALL WIRING 22 AWG, EXCEPT AS NOTED. 2. WIRING FOR PINS b AND c IS 20 AWG.
3. LENGTH OF CABLE IS SIX INCHES.

4. LENGTH OF DVM LEADS ARE AS REQUIRED. CONNECT PLUG TO LEADS AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO DVM.

AD-31291@

Figure 4-7. RT-300 Zero Adjustment Cable

22-05-14

Page 4-64 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

31. Procedure for the RT-910 TCAS Computer Unit


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the RT-910 TCAS Computer Unit. (a) Turn the fluted knob of the Boxmount hold-downs counterclockwise (CCW). NOTE: DO NOT disengage the white locking lever at this time. Continue to turn fluted knob until hold-downs are fully disengaged.

(b) (c)

Disengage the white locking lever by turning it CCW. Slowly pull forward on the unit handle to separate the unit and the tray connectors and slide the unit out of the tray.

(2)

Reinstall the RT-910 TCAS Computer Unit. (a) Slide the unit into the mounting tray and push it completely to the rear, partially engaging the unit connectors. Raise the hold-down extractor so that the front lip of the extractor rests just behind the lower panel of the unit. Turn the white locking lever clockwise (CW) as far as it can go, making sure that the cup engages the hook. Turn the fluted knob of the hold-down extractor CW until the red indicator disappears.

(b)

(c)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-65 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

32. Procedure for the SM-200 Servo Drive and SB-201 Drum and Bracket Assembly
A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the SM-200 Servo Drive. (a) (b) Disconnect the cable connector from the servo drive. Cut the safety wire and remove the four screws and lock washers securing the servo drive to the drum and bracket assembly. Slide the servo drive out of the drum and bracket assembly.

(c) (2)

Reinstall the SM-200 Servo Drive. (a) Slide the servo drive into the rear of the drum and bracket assembly and secure with four screws, Honeywell Part No. 4011086, and lock washers. Safety wire all four screws with Low Mu Monel wire, 0.020-inch diameter. Mate the servo drive connector with the cable connector.

(b) (3)

Remove the SB-201 Drum and Bracket Assembly. (a) (b) (c) Remove the servo drive in accordance with paragraph 32.A.(1). Release the bridle cable tension. Cut the safety wire on the four screws securing the retaining plate. Remove and set aside the screws and the retaining plate. Remove and set aside the four cable keepers, Honeywell Part No. 2518330. Cut the safety wire. Remove and set aside two screws securing the swaged cable terminals to the drum. Unwrap the bridle cables from the drum. Remove and set aside four nuts, bolts, and washers securing the drum and the bracket assembly to the airframe. Lift the drum and bracket assembly away from the airframe.

(d) (e)

(f) (g)

(h)

22-05-14

Page 4-66 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(4)

Reinstall the SB-201 Drum and Bracket Assembly. (a) Mount the drum and bracket assembly rigidly to the airframe with four 1/4-inch diameter bolts of sufficient length, and four suitable lockwashers and nuts.

INSTALLATION CRITICAL
TO MAKE SURE CABLE TERMINAL CAPTURE, USE ONLY 0.138-32-NC-2A STAINLESS STEEL DRILLED SCREWS, HONEYWELL PART NO. 2554911-1. STANDARD FILLISTER-HEAD SCREWS MAY NOT PROPERLY RETAIN THE CABLE TERMINAL. (b) Wrap the bridle cables around the servo bracket drum. Secure the swaged cable terminals to the servo bracket drum with the screws removed in paragraph 32.A.(3)(e), or if a new servo, use the screws supplied with the new servo. Safety wire the screws through adjacent holes in the drum with Low Mu Monel wire, 0.020-inch diameter and 4 inches long. Adjust the control system and the bridle cables to the proper tension as instructed in the aircraft maintenance manual.

(c)

INSTALLATION CRITICAL
TO MAKE SURE THAT THE CABLE CANNOT JAM BETWEEN THE DRUM AND KEEPERS, THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE KEEPERS AND DRUM IS MEASURED AFTER THE KEEPERS AND RETAINING PLATE ARE INSTALLED. THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE DRUM AND KEEPERS MUST NOT EXCEED 0.040 INCH AND MUST NOT BE LESS THAN 0.005 INCH. THE 3/32-INCH CABLE DIAMETER IS VERIFIED. THESE ARE CRITICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. (d) Install two of the four cable keepers removed in paragraph 32.A.(3)(d), on the servo bracket at the points of cable tangency to the drum. The other two keepers must be located at 90 degrees from the first two. Install the retaining plate, Honeywell Part No. 2518332, on the slotted end of the cable keepers using the four 5/16-inch long, No. 8-32, drilled fillister-head screws removed in paragraph 32.A.(3)(c). Safety wire these four screws with Low Mu Monel wire, 0.032-inch in diameter and 4 inches long. Reinstall the servo drive in accordance with paragraph 32.A.(2).

(e)

(f)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-67 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

33. Procedure for the WC-6X0/8X0 Weather Radar Controller


A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the Weather Radar Controller. (a) (b) Disengage the Dzus fasteners on the unit. Slide the unit out of the aircraft mounting location and disconnect the cable connectors.

(2)

Reinstall the Weather Radar Controller. (a) Mate the cable connector with the unit connector and slide the unit into the aircraft mounting location. Engage the Dzus fasteners on the unit.

(b)

B.

Adjustment Procedures
Not applicable.

C.

Repair Procedures
Replacement of the control knobs. NOTE: It is recommended that this procedure be performed in a clean workbench environment. Each knob has two No. 2-56 setscrews. Use a 0.048-inch O.D., 6 flute, Bristol wrench.

(1) (2) (3)

Loosen the setscrews. Slide the knob off the shaft. On new knobs, make sure that the setscrews are out far enough to allow the knob to slide onto the shaft. Apply retaining compound to setscrews. Slide the knob onto the shaft. Make sure that the space between the knob and the front panel is approximately 0.030 inch (0.8 mm). Tighten the setscrews. Visually check the spacing between the knob and the front panel to make sure that the knob has not slipped during installation.

(4) (5)

(6) (7)

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-68 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

34. Procedure for the WU-6X0/8X0 Antenna and Receiver Transmitter Unit (RTA)
A. Removal and Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the RTA. (a) (b) (2) Disconnect the cable connector from the unit. Remove and set aside the hardware used to attach the unit to the airframe.

Reinstall the RTA. (a) (b) Attach the unit to the airframe with the applicable hardware. Mate the aircraft cable connector with the unit connector.

B.

Adjustment Procedures
(1) Adjust the Antenna and Receiver Transmitter Unit on the ground. NOTE: This procedure must be done by two persons. One in the cockpit and one at the RTA unit. POSITION THE AIRCRAFT RADAR SYSTEM TO FACE AWAY FROM BUILDINGS, LARGE METAL STRUCTURES, OR OTHER AIRCRAFT IN CLOSE PROXIMITY BEFORE YOU TURN IT ON. THEY ARE LIKELY TO RETURN LARGE AMOUNTS OF REFLECTED ENERGY AND CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SYSTEM. DO NOT OPERATE RADAR WITHIN 50 FEET OF OTHER AIRCRAFT OR OBJECTS, OR CLOSER THAN 100 FEET TO REFUELING OPERATIONS. NEVER LOOK DIRECTLY INTO THE ANTENNA (WHILE IT IS OPERATING) FOR PROLONGED PERIODS OF TIME AT A CLOSE RANGE. SERIOUS EYE TISSUE DAMAGE CAN RESULT DUE TO THE HEATING EFFECT OF RADAR ENERGY. THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LEVEL (MPEL) BOUNDARY IS A RADIUS OF 9 FT (3.66 M) FOR WU-650/870 UNITS AND 25.7 FT (7.8 M) FOR WU-660/880 UNITS. REFERENCE SECTION 2, CHAPTER 5 FOR DETAILS.

WARNINGS: 1.

2.

3.

(a)

Before applying power to the radar, set the SCAN and XMTR toggle switches, on the RTA housing, to OFF (toward antenna). Level the pitch and roll axes of the aircraft relative to the earths surface. Verify that the mounting surface of the RTA is aligned to the pitch and roll reference axes of the aircraft within 1/4 degree. Apply aircraft power as necessary.

(b) (c)

(d)

22-05-14

Page 4-69 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(e)

On the WC-XXX Radar Controller, make the following selections: RADAR = SBY TILT = 0 GAIN = Push knob in for preset gain.

(f)

Verify, in the SBY mode, that the flat plate antenna is at 0 within 1/2 degree. If not, adjust the elevation feedback potentiometer R1 (WU-650/870 only) for 0 1/4 degrees. Push and hold the AHRS TEST switch located on the maintenance panel. This simulates 15 degrees of nose up pitch and 5 degrees of right roll. Verify that the antenna tilts down 15 2 degrees. Release the AHRS TEST switch. Pull out the GAIN knob to select variable gain. This places the RTA in the roll calibration mode. Press and hold the AHRS TEST switch. Verify that the antenna tilts up 5 1 degrees. Release the AHRS TEST switch. Remove power from the radar. Set the SCAN and XMTR toggle switches, on the RTA housing, to ON (away from antenna). Apply aircraft power as necessary. Verify, in the SBY mode, that the antenna is tilted up 15 2 degrees.

(g)

(h) (i) (j)

(k) (l) (m) (n) (o)

(p) (q) (2)

Adjust WU-650/870 Roll Offset Compensation. NOTE: This procedure is for WU-650/870 installations only and should be done while airborne. The roll offset is preset at the factory so the procedure is necessary only if a roll offset error is detected.

(a)

At an altitude of 10,000 feet (3,048 meters) or greater above the ground, establish a wings-level cruise attitude. On the WC-650/870 Radar Controller, select WX Mode, 100 NM range, variable GAIN, and RCT OFF. Observe that the VAR is displayed in the WX mode box on the MFD. Adjust the antenna tilt down until a fairly solid band of ground clutter is visible.

(b)

(c)

22-05-14

Page 4-70 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(d)

Push the RCT button once and then three more times within 4 seconds. VAR should not be displayed. This puts the radar in the roll compensation mode. Push the RCT button once more and make sure that VAR is not displayed. If it is, repeat this step. Adjust the GAIN control on the WC-650/870 Radar Controller until the ground clutter display is symmetrical. Do not touch the manual GAIN control once the display is adjusted properly. Push the RCT button once and then three more times within 4 seconds. This causes the WU-650/870 to exit the roll compensation mode. When VAR is displayed again, the roll compensation mode has been exited. Set the variable or preset GAIN as desired. This compensation data is now stored in nonvolatile memory in the WU-650/870 and will not be erased when power is removed from the system.

(e)

(f)

(g) (h)

(i) (j)

(3)

Adjust WU-660/880 Roll Offset Compensation. There are two stabilization trim modes available for WU-660/880 installations. If the STAB TRIM ENABLE strap (59J1-61) is open, only adjustment of roll offset is available. If the STAB TRIM ENABLE strap is grounded, roll offset, pitch offset, roll gain, and pitch gain are available for adjustment. WU-660/880 radar installations on Embraer 145 aircraft are configured with the STAB TRIM ENABLE strap open which means only roll offset is adjustable. NOTE: This procedure is for WU-660/880 installations only and must be done while airborne. The roll offset is preset at the factory so the procedure is necessary only if a roll offset error is detected.

(a)

At an altitude of 10,000 feet (3,048 meters) or greater above ground level, establish a wings level cruise attitude. Select WX mode and 25 NM range on the radar controller. Adjust the antenna tilt down until a fairly solid band of ground clutter is visible. Adjust the tilt until the green region of the ground returns start at about 20 NM. Enter the stabilization trim mode by pushing the STAB button, on the radar controller, four times within 3 seconds. A display with text instructions should be displayed on the MFD. See Figure 4-8 for a typical display. The display will have text overlays on the radar data so that ground returns can be seen to make the adjustments.

(b)

(c)

22-05-14

Page 4-71 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(d)

To make a roll offset change, pull out the GAIN knob on the radar controller. See Figure 4-9 for a typical display. The offset range is from -2.0 to +2.0 degrees and is adjusted by the GAIN knob. Polarity is such that clockwise knob rotation causes the antenna to move down when scanning on the right side. While flying straight and level, adjust the GAIN knob until the ground clutter display is symmetrical. Push in the GAIN knob. When it is pushed in, the display will return to the previous message. Set the mode switch on the radar controller to any other position to exit the mode and save the offset value in non-volatile memory.

(e)

(f)

(g)

C.

Repair Procedures
Not applicable.

D.

Return to Service Procedures


Refer to the test procedures in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

22-05-14

Page 4-72 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

FMS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN


33
30

360
N

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS


3

F F S ET: LL O RO GAIN KNOB TO A UT O TAB KEY NEXT DJU S LL ST PU

25
50
WX

50

WX -10

315 47.0 SYSTEM PAGE DISPLAY AREA BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.
AD-51677@

Figure 4-8. Typical PRIMUS 660/880 Stabilization Trim Mode Entry Page

22-05-14

Page 4-73 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

FMS KDVT 12.5 NM 12 MIN


33
30
A
B
AL

360
N

+15 SAT +25 TAT 300 TAS


3

F F S E T: - 0 . 2 C O LL O NO UN RUT GAIN K B WHEN O RA FT ROLL: 1+5 1F B B DON .0 S LL R C : T E P U AI

ST

AP

25
50
WX WX

50

VAR WX -10

315 47.0 SYSTEM PAGE DISPLAY AREA BEZEL MENU DISPLAY AREA

NOTE: THE DISPLAY SHOWN MAY NOT REPRESENT ACTUAL FLIGHT CONDITIONS.
AD-51678@

Figure 4-9. Typical PRIMUS 660/880 Stabilization Trim Adjustment Page

22-05-14

Page 4-74 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 5

SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE


Refer to manual, Pub. No. 09-1100-01, for detailed procedures for preparing all System components for storage or shipment.

22-05-14

Page 5-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page 5-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 6


SECTION/PARAGRAPH/TITLE 6 HONEYWELL SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Worldwide Exchange/Rental Program for Regional Airlines . . . . 2. Contracted Maintenance Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Customer Service Order Desk (End Item LRUs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Customer Support - Material (Repair Piece Part Spares Services) 6. Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Customer Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. Honeywell Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. Regional Airline Customer Engineering Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-4 6-6

22-05-14

Page TC6-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

(Blank Page)

22-05-14

Page TC6-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

SECTION 6

HONEYWELL SUPPORT 1. Worldwide Exchange/Rental Program for Regional Airlines


Honeywells Worldwide Exchange/Rental Program for Regional Airlines provides an extensive service for LRU End Item products, complementing our worldwide support center network. This service is intended to supplement a sound spares program, not to serve as a primary source of spares. For routine exchange or rental service, or for further information regarding Exchange or Rental units, contact any of the facilities listed in Honeywell Facilities, paragraph 9 of this section.

2.

Contracted Maintenance Agreements


Regional airlines have a number of options from which to choose to support their Honeywell avionics in day-to-day operations. These choices involve trade-offs between start-up expenditures for test equipment, shop facilities, personnel training, etc., versus costs associated with having repairs accomplished by an outside agency. Airlines can also consider different levels of in-house repair (Level 2 - repair by SRU or module exchange, or Level 3 - repair by piece part replacement). A variety of contracted maintenance agreements for repairs accomplished by a Honeywell Support Center are available: time and material repair, flat rate repair, cost per flight hour pricing, or other individually customized support concepts covering all Honeywell LRUs installed on regional aircraft. These agreements represent cost effective means for an airline to achieve financial maintenance goals, while minimizing start-up costs. For full details on Honeywell maintenance agreements, or consultation on other customized support options, contact Honeywell Product Support Marketing in Phoenix, Arizona at 602-436-3150.

3.

Test Equipment
Specialized test equipment is not required for normal flight line maintenance of Honeywell avionics. Certain standard, commercially available avionics aids such as ramp (signal) checkers, oscilloscopes, meters, etc., may be useful for more detailed troubleshooting. A breakout box can also be helpful for certain equipment, and availability of this item can be discussed with a Honeywell Customer Engineer. Full details of appropriate Honeywell manufactured test equipment required for shop level repair of specific Honeywell equipment are available through Customer Engineering, or from Product Support Marketing. To request a quote, or to place an order for Honeywell manufactured test equipment, contact Honeywells Customer Service order desk in Phoenix, Arizona at 602-436-4512.

22-05-14

Page 6-1 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

4.

Customer Service Order Desk (End Item LRUs)


Honeywells Customer Service order desk in Phoenix, Arizona is available to receive orders or process inquiries for new, end item LRU spares and/or retrofit avionics products for Honeywells regional airline customers. To place normal orders, determine order status, upgrade an existing order, or request price and delivery information, please contact the Customer Service Representative at: Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602-436-8925 FAX Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602-436-7100.

5.

Customer Support - Material (Repair Piece Part Spares Services)


A. Routine Repair Piece Part Spares Orders
Regional airlines desiring to place routine repair piece part spares orders, determine order status, upgrade an existing order, or request price and delivery for spares should contact the Customer Service Representative in Phoenix, Arizona at: Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602-436-6105 FAX Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602-436-1500.

B.

AOG Repair Piece Part Service


AOG repair piece part spares service for regional airlines is available 24 hours a day, every day. After normal hours call: Inside USA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-800-872-7739 Outside USA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214-402-4300 Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-3-330-1411 Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-800-267-9947

France . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-61-71-9662 Singapore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-542-1313 United Kingdom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-1-256-722200.

To expedite the AOG process, please be prepared to give the operator the airline name, telephone number, type of aircraft, tail number, and part number causing the AOG situation.

22-05-14

Page 6-2 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

6.

Warranty
Honeywell avionics equipment installed on regional airline aircraft are warranted either through the aircraft manufacturer, typically beginning on the date the aircraft is delivered, or for items purchased direct from Honeywell, beginning on the date the items were shipped from Honeywell. During the warranty period, Honeywell will at its option, either repair or replace at no charge, each item that is returned to a Honeywell Support Center. Honeywell also provides a full range of appropriate warranties to cover repair services at Honeywell Support Centers, exchange units and piece part spares. In addition, we will support in-house warranty repair agreements with airlines which possess the necessary technical capability. For additional details regarding the Honeywell Warranty, or response to a specific question, please contact Warranty Administration at: Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602-436-1321 FAX Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602-436-3165.

7.

Customer Engineering
A key element in Honeywells regional airline support is our worldwide Customer Engineering organization. The members of this group are strategically located around the world at air transport hubs and manufacturing locations. These individuals have earned an excellent reputation within the avionics industry as the result of their high level of education, experience, dedication and responsiveness. Customer Engineering is ready to provide regional airlines with on-site technical assistance, provisioning consultation, training and regulatory agency coordination. In addition, customer engineers will provide engineering interface assistance for other inter-related equipment on the aircraft, and will support your maintenance engineers and technicians. Continuing assistance is provided through telephone consultation, or at the airlines facilities, as requirements dictate. Refer to the list at the end of this section for Regional Airline Customer Engineering locations, telephone and fax numbers.

8.

Training
Honeywells dedicated Customer training staff is available to assist airlines in acquiring the technical skills and knowledge needed to operate and maintain Honeywell products. Customer Training conducts formal courses on regional airline systems/products at Honeywells Customer Training Center in Phoenix, Arizona, and at selected locations worldwide. Courses are scheduled annually based on customer interest and new aircraft delivery projections. A regularly updated Honeywell Customer Training Schedule brochure gives full details of all training courses offered.

22-05-14

Page 6-3 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

Honeywell offers the following level of training courses: Operational (Pilot) Training Flight Line Maintenance Training Component Level Maintenance Training.

For full details, and information on Honeywell training courses, or a copy of the Honeywell Customer Training Schedule, contact the Customer Training Department in Phoenix, Arizona at: Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602-436-8972 FAX Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602-436-4100.

9.

Honeywell Facilities
A. North and South America
Central Support Center Honeywell Inc. 1830 Industrial Ave. Wichita, KS 67216 Tel: 316-522-8172 Fax: 316-522-2693 Dallas Support Center Honeywell Inc. 7825 Ridgepoint Drive Irving, TX 75063 Tel: 214-402-4300 Fax: 214-402-4999 Northwest Support Center Honeywell Inc. 4150 Lind Ave. Southwest Renton, WA 98055 Tel: 206-251-9511 Fax: 206-251-9368 Ohio Support Center Honeywell Inc. 8370 Dow Circle Strongsville, OH 44136 Tel: 216-243-8877 Fax: 216-243-1954

Canada Support Center Honeywell Ltd. Aerospace Division 3 Hamilton Ave. Ottawa, Ontario K1y 4J4 Canada Tel: 613-728-4681 Fax: 613-728-7084

22-05-14

Page 6-4 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

B.

Europe and Africa


France Support Center Honeywell Aerospace 1 rue Marcel Doret - BP14 31701 Blagnac Cedex, France Tel: 33-56212-1500 Fax: 33-56130-0258 United Kingdom Support Center Honeywell Avionics Systems Ltd. Edison Road Basingstoke, Hampshire RG21 2QD England Tel: 44-1-256-722200 Fax: 44-1-256-722201 Authorized Support Center Apparatebau Gauting GmbH Ammerseestr, 45-39 89317-0 Gauting, Germany Tel: 49-89-85601-0 Fax: 49-89-85601-183

C.

Asia and Pacific


Australia Support Center Honeywell Ltd. Sperry Drive Trade Park Tullamarine, 3043 Victoria, Australia Tel: 61-3-330-1411 Fax: 61-3-330-3042 Singapore Support Center Honeywell Aerospace Pte. Ltd. 2 Loyang Crescent Singapore 1750 Tel: 65-542-1313 Fax: 65-542-1212

22-05-14

Page 6-5 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MANUAL


EMBRAER 145

10. Regional Airline Customer Engineering Locations


A. North and South America
Phoenix, Arizona Tel: 602-436-4400 Fax: 602-436-4100 Dallas, Texas Tel: 214-402-4332 Fax: 214-402-4399 Reston, Virginia Tel: 703-620-4918 Fax: 703-860-8985 Seattle, Washington Tel: 206-656-2705 Fax: 206-251-9368 Seattle, Washington Tel: 206-656-2705 Fax: 206-251-9368 Wichita, Kansas Tel: 316-522-8172 Fax: 316-522-2693 Wheeling, Illinois Tel: 708-577-1753 Fax: 708-459-8023 Altanta, Georgia Tel: 404-952-4445 Fax: 404-984-8631

Downsview, Ontario, Canada Tel: 416-375-3819 Fax: 416-375-4531

B.

Europe and Africa


Basingstoke, England Tel: 44-1-256-722200 Fax: 44-1-256-722201 Toulouse, France Tel: 33-6212-1500 Fax: 33-6130-0258 Munich, Germany Tel: 49-89-404072 Fax: 49-89-401838 Paris, France Tel: 33-1-4473-8785 Fax: 33-1-4474-9446

Rome, Italy Tel: 39-6-5037-294 Fax: 39-6-5034-406

C.

Asia and Pacific


Singapore Tel: 65-542-1313 Fax: 65-542-1212 Hong Kong Tel: 852-832-5681 Fax: 852-838-3280

Melbourne, Australia Tel: 61-3-330-1411 Fax: 61-3-330-3042

22-05-14

Page 6-6 Nov 1/1996

Use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this document.